/BR 


R.  HOE  &  CO  S 


CATALOGUE  OF 


PRINTING  PRESSES 


AND 


ri^IKTERS'  MATERIALS, 


LITHOGRAPHIC  PRESSES, 
STEREOTYPING   AND   EliECTROTYPING  MACHINERY, 
BINDERS'   PRESSES   AND  MATERIAIiS, 


NEW-YORK: 
504   GRAND  STREET. 
1881. 


&  55- 


FRANKLIN  INSTITUTE  LIBRARY 


PHILADELPHIA 

CLASS.^  >^  BOOK.  .^..^.."7   ACCESSION  ^..L^...^.. 

REFERENCE 


Article  V. — The  Library  shall  be  divided  into  two  classes  ;  the  first 
comprising  such  works  as,  from  their  rarity  or  value,  should  not  be  lent 
out,  all  unbound  periodicals,  and  such  text  books  as  ought  to  be  found 
in  a  library  of  reference  except  when  required  by  Committees  of  the 
Institute,  or  by  members  or  holders  of  second  class  stock,  who  have 
obtained  the  sanction  of  the  Committee.  The  second  class  shall  include 
those  books  intended  for  circulation. 

Article  VI.  —The  Secretary  shall  have  authority  to  loan  to  ]\Iembers 
and  to  holders  of  second  class  stock,  any  work  belonging  to  the  second 
CLASS,  suljj-ect  to  the  following  regulations  : 

Section  1. — No  individual  shall  be  permitted  to  have  more  than  tiuo 
books  out  at  one  time,  without  a  written  permission,  signed  by  at  least 
two  members  of  the  Library  Committe  ;  nor  shall  a  book  be  kept  out 
more  than  two  weeks  ;  but  if  no  one  has  applied  for  it,  the  former  l)or- 
rower  may  renew  the  loan.  Should  any  person  have  applied  for  it,  the 
latter  shall  have  the  preference. 

Section  2. — A  fixe  of  tex  cents  per  week  shall  be  exacted  for  the 
detention  of  a  book  beyond  the  limited  time  ;  and  if  a  book  be  not  re- 
turned within  three  months  it  shall  be  deemed  lost,  and  the  borrower 
shall,  in  addition  to  his  fines,  forfeit  its  value. 

Section  3. — Should  any  book  be  returned  injured,  the  borrower  shall 
pay  for  the  injury,  or  rejilace  the  book,  as  the  Library  Committee  may 
dii-ect ;  and  if  one  or  more  books,  belonging  to  a  set  or  sets,  be  lost,  the 
borrower  shall  replace  them  or  make  full  restitution. 

Article  VII. — Any  person  removing  from  the  Hall,  without  permis- 
sion from  the  proper  authorities,  any  book,  newspaper  or  other  property 
in  charge  of  the  Library  Committee,  shall  be  reported  to  the  Committee, 
who  may  inflict  any  fine  not  exceeding  twenty-five  dollars. 

Article  VIII. — No  member  or  holder  of  second  class  stock,  whose 
annual  contribution  for  the  current  year  shall  be  unpaid  or  who  is  in 
arrears  for  fines,  shall  be  entitled  to  the  privileges  of  the  Library  or 
Reading  Room. 

Article  IX. — If  any  member  or  holder  of  second  class  stock,  shall 
refuse  or  neglect  to  comply  with  the  foregoing  rules,  it  shall  be  the  duty 
of  the  Secretary  to  report  him  to  the  Committee  on  the  Library. 

Article  X. — Any  Member  or  holder  of  second  class  stock,  detected 
in  mutilating  the  newspapers,  pamphlets  or  books  belonging  to  the  Insti- 
tute shall  be  deprived  of  )iis  right  of  membership,  and  the  name  of  the 
offender  shall  be  made  p^^blic. 


i 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2015 


https://archive.org/details/catalogueofprintOOrhoe 


R.  HOE  &  CO  S 


CATALOGUE  OF 


PRINTING  PRESSES 

AND 

PHINTEHS'  MATERIALS, 


LITHOGRAPHIC  PRESSES, 
STEREOTTPIISTG  AND  ELECTROTYPING  MACHINERY 
BINDERS'    PRESSES   ANH  MATERIAIiS. 


IS^EW-YOUK: 
504   GHAKD  STREET. 
1881. 


Copyright,  1881,  by  E.  HoE  &  Co. 


Picas  of 
FHANCis  Hart  &  Co 


THE  CF.TTV  CEfilLR 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


1 


PATENT  DOUBLE-CYLINDER  PRESS. 

This  press  is  exceedingly  strong,  and  the  number  seven  size  is  capable  of 
a  speed  of  three  thousand  per  hour;  the  smaller  sizes,  of  coiirse,  running 
faster  in  proportion  than  the  larger.  As  will  be  seen  by  the  cut,  it  has 
been  entirely  remodeled,  and  the  height  reduced,  so  that  its  solidity,  dura- 
bility, and  general  efficiency  are  greatly  increased. 

The  side  frames  are  very  soUd,  and  rest  upon  a  heavy  foundation  frame. 

The  bed  is  driven  by  an  improved  motion,  and  starts  and  stops  without 
noise  or  jar. 

The  springs,  by  our  new  patent  construction,  are  absolutely  noiseless, 
and  are  so  arranged  as  to  permit  the  turning  of  the  press  backward  or 
forward  freely  by  hand,  without  compressing  the  spring. 

The  machines  are  furnished  with  our  patent  improved  air  springs  when 
desired. 

The  friction-roller  frames  under  the  bed  are  driven  by  a  patented 
mechanism,  instead  of  being  allowed  to  run  free.  This  decreases  the  wear 
on  the  steel  ways,  and  prevents  the  rollers  from  cutting. 

The  bed  fi-iction  rollers  are  made  of  the  best  tool  steel. 

The  gearing  is  all  made  of  special  iron,  and  cut  with  the  greatest 
accuracy.  The  racks  are  cut  on  a  machine  constructed  by  ourselves 
expressly  for  the  purpose. 

The  long  universal- joint  shaft,  assisted  by  a  counterbalance  weight, 
gives  a  regular  motion  to  the  bevel  pinion  driving  the  bed. 

The  fountain  is  so  constructed  that  the  ink  Ues  upon  the  knife  and  passes 
under  the  roUer.  The  fountain  itself,  and  aU  the  rollers,  are  in*  a  sliding 
carriage,  which  may  be  drawn  back  by  a  rack  and  pinion. 

The  roller  stocks  are  of  wrought-iron  pipe,  with  steel  journals  welded  in. 

The  patent  adjustable  roller  sockets  have  wrought-iron  bearings,  case- 
hardened. 

The  finger  motion  is  noiseless. 

The  fly  cam  has  a  continuous  surface,  so  that  the  fly  rises  and  falls 
noiselessly  without  striking  the  table,  and  does  not  require  fastening  up 
when  the  press  is  turned  backward. 

The  vertical  fly-tape  frames  can  be  removed  without  loosening  a  screw, 
so  that  the  forms  are  accessible  from  either  end  of  the  press. 

The  fly  can  be  removed  in  a  minute. 


2 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


The  platforms  for  feeders  are  adjustable,  and  are  provided  with  drawers 
for  tools. 

The  pulley  shafts,  and,  in  fact,  all  the  shafts  throughout  the  press,  have 
their  bearings  in  independent  boxes,  and  not  in  the  side  frames.  Thus, 
when  the  bearings  become  worn,  they  can  be  replaced  at  slight  expense. 


Sizes  and  Prices. 


No. 

Bed. 

Matter. 

Price. 

No.  Bed. 

Matter. 

Price. 

6 

32x47  in. 

27  X  42  in. 

$5,500 

8      38  X  55  in. 

33  X  50  in. 

$6,750 

7 

35  X  51  in. 

30  X  46  in. 

6,000 

9      41  X  60  in. 

36  X  55  in. 

7,500 

The  prices  include  apparatus  for  steam  power;  also,  felt  blanket,  roUer 
moulds,  and  two  sets  of  stocks. 

Improved  sheet  cutter,  extra,  $50  per  cylinder. 


Dimensions,  Weight,  Speed,  and  Power. 


6 
"A 

Over  all. 

Length. 

Width. 

Height. 

6 

16  ft. 

8  ft.  10  in. 

5  ft. 

7 

17  ft. 

9  ft.  3  in. 

5  ft.  3  in. 

8 

18  ft.  4  in. 

9  ft.  7  in. 

5  ft.  7  in. 

9 

19  ft.  10  in. 

10  ft.  6  in. 

6  ft. 

Weight  lioxed, 

iucluding 
steam  fixtures. 

About  8  tons. 
About  9  tons. 
About  10^  tons. 
About  12  tons. 


Speed. 

2340  to  3600 
2040  to  3300 
1830  to  3000 
1750  to  2800 


«  (4 

n  © 

!| 

3 
4 


SUGGESTIONS  TO  PEESSMEN. 


1.  About  the  FomiDATioN.  It  is  very 
important  to  have  a  good  solid  foundation. 
Level  the  bed  plate  carefully,  putting  four 
packings  under  each  side,  and  let  them  be 
slightly  tighter  at  the  ends  than  in  the  centre. 

If  the  machine  stands  on  a  floor,  try  it 
again  when  all  together,  for  fear  that  it 
may  have  settled  out  of  level,  and  re-adjust, 
if  necessary.  Test  the  level  of  the  press 
twice  a  year. 

Continued 


2.  Cleaning.  Clean  thoroughly  aU  the 
joints  and  fitting  parts,  and  screw  them 
together  firmly,  but  without  too  much 
force.  Clean  and  oil  carefully  aU  the 
working  parts  before  putting  them  together. 
See  that  all  the  oil  holes  are  open,  and 
fill  them  with  oU. 

Try  each  moving  piece,  when  put  in 
place,  to  see  that  it  runs  freely,  but  with- 
out play, 
on  page  4. 


E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


3 


PATENT  SINGLE  SMALL  CYLINDER  PRESS. 

This  macliine  has,  within  a  few  years,  been  entirely  remodeled  and  reduced 
in  height,  as  will  be  seen  by  the  cut  of  the  press,  so  as  to  increase  its 
speed,  solidity,  durability,  and  general  efficiency. 

The  side  frames  are  very  soUd,  and  rest  upon  a  heavy  foundation  frame. 

The  bed  is  driven  by  an  improved  motion,  and  starts  and  stops  without 
noise  or  jar. 

The  springs,  by  our  new  patent  construction,  are  absolutely  noiseless,  and 
are  so  arranged  as  to  permit  the  turning  of  the  press  backward  or  forward 
freely  by  hand,  without  compressing  the  spring. 

The  machines  are  furnished  with  our  patent  improved  air  springs^  when 
desired. 

The  friction-roUer  frames  under  the  bed  are  driven  by  a  patented 
mechanism,  instead  of  being  allowed  to  run  free.  This  decreases  the  wear 
on  the  steel  ways,  and  prevents  the  rollers  from  cutting. 

The  bed  friction  rollers  are  of  the  best  tool  steel. 

The  gearing  is  all  made  of  special  iron,  and  cut  with  the  greatest 
accuracy. 

The  racks  are  cut  on  a  machine  constructed  by  ourselves  expressly  for 
the  purpose. 

The  long  universal- joint  shaft,  assisted  by  a  counterbalance  weight, 
gives  a  regular  motion  to  the  bevel  pinion  driving  the  bed. 

The  fountain  is  so  constructed  that  the  ink  lies  upon  the  knife  and 
passes  under  the  roller. 

The  roller  stocks  are  of  wrought-iron  pipe,  with  steel  journals  welded  on. 

The  patent  adjustable  roller  sockets  have  wrought-iron  bearings,  case- 
hardened. 

The  finger  motion  is  noiseless. 

The  fly  cam  has  a  continuous  surface,  so  that  the  fly  rises  and  falls 
noiselessly  without  striking  the  table,  and  does  not  require  fastening  up 
when  the  press  is  turned  backward. 

The  fly  can  be  removed  in  a  minute. 

The  platform  for  the  feeder  is  adjustable,  and  provided  with  drawer  for 
tools. 

For  sizes  and  prices,  see  next  page. 


4  E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


Single  Small  Cylinder  Presses,  continued.    Sizes  and  Prices. 


No. 

Bed. 

Matter. 

Price. 

No.  Bed. 

Matter. 

Price. 

6 

32x47  in. 

27  X  42  in. 

$3,250 

8      38  X  55  in. 

33  X  50  in. 

$4,000 

7 

35  X  51  in. 

30  X  46  in. 

3,600 

9      41  X  58  in. 

36  X  53  in. 

4,500 

The  prices  include  apparatus  for  steam  power;  also,  felt  blanket,  two 
roller  moulds,  and  two  sets  of  stocks. 

Improved  sheet  cutters,  $50.    Patent  reversing  motion  extra. 


Dimensions,  Weight,  Speed,  and  Power. 


Over  all. 

Weight  boxed, 

Speed. 

O  t4 

6 
|Zi 

Length. 

Widtli. 

Height. 

including 
steam  fixtures. 

=  1 

6 

12  ft. 

8  ft.  9  in. 

4  ft.  10  in. 

About  6  tons. 

1350  to  2400 

2 

7 

12  ft.  6  in. 

9  ft.  4  in. 

5  ft. 

About  7  tons. 

1400  to  2200 

24 

8 

13  ft.  7  in. 

10  ft.   6  in. 

5  ft.   5  in. 

About  7J  tons. 

1340  to  2000 

3 

SUaGESTIONS  TO  PRESSMEN. 

Continued  from  page  2. 


3.  Testing.  Turn  the  press  by  hand  oc- 
casionally, while  putting  it  together,  and 
give  it  a  few  more  turns  when  it  is  finished. 
Then  put  on  the  belt,  and  let  it  run  half 
a  day  before  putting  on  a  form,  observing, 
in  the  meanwhile,  that  the  oil  runs  freely 
from  the  bearings,  and  the  working  parts 
keep  perfectly  cool. 

4.  To  ADJUST  Cylinder.  Make  up  the 
cylinder  to  the  exact  height  of  its  bearers 
and  put  on  a  large  form  of  type.  Adjust 
the  screws  to  give  a  proper  impression  and 
raise  the  bearers  on  the  bed  up  against 
the  cylinder;  then  make  aU  fast,  and  do 
not  again  alter  the  impression  except  by 
overlays  or  underlays. 

5.  PoUNTAnsr.  Adjust  the  ink  foimtain 
evenly  from  end  to  end  first,  then  cut  oif 
the  ink  carefully  where  required. 

6.  Changing  Cylinder.  To  change  the 
cylinder  backward  or  forward  with  the  bed 
to  suit  forms,  draw  the  intermediate  wheel 
out  of  gear  with  the  cylinder  wheel.  In 
again  starting,  be  very  careful  that  the 
register  rack  is  properly  adjusted,  for  a 
little  inattention  here  may  cause  trouble 
and  expense. 

Continued 


7.  Reversing  Motion.  Oil  must  be  care- 
fully excluded  from  the  friction  grooves  in 
the  fly  wheel,  and  if  any  oil  gets  in,  it 
should  be  cleaned  out.  No  foreign  sub- 
stance shotild  be  put  in  to  make  the  brake 
operate  more  promptly. 

8.  Oiling.  When  the  press  is  new,  each 
bearing  should  be  oiled  once  every  half 
hour  during  the  first  few  days,  gradually 
extending  the  time  to  twice  a  day.  Open 
and  examine  every  bearing  once  a  month. 
The  finest  quality  of  sperm  oil  is  the  best 
known  lubricator,  and  should  be  frequently, 
but  sparingly,  used. 

Devote  a  little  time  each  day  to  keeping 
the  press  clean. 

As  it  is  very  difficult  to  procure  pui-e 
sperm  oil,  we  have  arranged  to  keep  a 
stock  on  hand  for  the  accommodation  of 
our  customers.  It  will  be  furnished  by 
the  barrel  or  gaUon  at  the  lowest  market 
prices. 

9.  Caution.  Single  small  cylinder  and 
double-cylinder  newspaper  presses  should 
not  be  turned  backward  over  the  centre, 
as  the  grippers,  remaining  partly  open,  may 
damage  the  form  and  injure  the  press. 

on  page  8. 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


5 


TWO-REVOLUTION  PRESS,  WITH  FOUR  ROLLERS. 

(PATENT  CYLINDER  DELIVERY.) 

This  machine,  now  a  great  favorite  with  the  trade,  is  intended  especially 
for  illustrated  newspapers,  periodicals,  and  rapid  book  work,  which  it  will 
perform  at  a  high  speed,  with  accurate  register  and  excellent  distribution. 

It  takes  its  name  from  the  fact  that  the  cylinder  makes  two  revolutions 
to  each  run  of  the  bed,  rising  to  allow  the  bed  to  run  back,  as  in  the 
double  and  single  small  cylinder  presses. 

The  frame  is  verj'  solid,  and  the  gearing  all  made  of  special  iron. 

The  mechanism  for  driving  the  bed  is  similar  to  that  on  our  large 
cylinder  presses,  comprising  the  long  universal- joint  shaft  and  geared 
friction-roller  frames.    Its  motion  is  smooth  and  noiseless. 

The  fountain,  the  fly  cam,  and  the  patent  fly  are  the  same  as  used  on 
all  our  improved  presses. 

The  distributing  rollers  run  in  a  hinged  frame,  which  is  quickly  raised 
to  allow  the  form  rollers  to  be  removed  and  replaced  without  deranging 
their  adjustment.  The  iron  ink  table  and  the  table  distributing  rollers  are 
the  same  as  in  our  stop-cylinder  and  four-roller  large  cylinder  presses.  It 
has,  however,  no  large  distributing  cylinder  unless  especially  ordered. 

There  are  four  ways,  instead  of  two,  for  the  bed.  This  machine  has 
our  new  patent  air  springs,  and  the  press  can  be  turned  by  hand  without 
compressing  them.  The  patent  reversing  motion  enables  the  feeder  to  stop 
the  press  and  run  it  backward  without  leaving  his  stand. 

The  patent  delivering  cylinder  takes  the  printed  sheets  from  the  main 
cylinder  without  the  aid  of  cords  or  tapes,  as  in  the  stop-cylinder  press, 
and  sends  them,  by  a  set  of  independent  and  adjustable  cords,  down  in 
front  of  the  fly. 


Sizes  and  Prices. 


Bed 

Boilers  coverinR 

Bed 

Boilers  covering 

inside 

Entire 

inside 

Entire 

No. 

bearers. 

Matter.  Form. 

Price. 

No. 

bearers. 

Matter.  Form. 

Price. 

6 

32  X  47  in. 

27x42  in.  4 

$4,250 

8 

38  X  55  in. 

33  X  50  in.  4 

$5,300 

7 

35  X  51  in. 

30  X  46  in.  4 

4,750 

9 

41  X  60  in. 

36  X  55  in.  4 

6,250 

The  prices  include  apparatus  for  steam  power,  two  sets  of  stocks,  and 
boxing  and  shipping,  or  delivery,  set  up,  in  New- York. 


Dimensions,  Weight,  Speed,  and  Power. 


Over  all. 

Weight  boxed, 
including 

OS  0) 

6 

Length. 

Width. 

Height. 

steam  fixtures. 

Speed. 

6 

14ft.  Sin. 

8  ft.  11  in. 

5  ft.  4  in. 

About  8  tons. 

1150  to  1800 

3 

7 

15  ft. 

9  ft.  lin. 

5  ft.  6  in. 

About  8^  tons. 

1080  to  1700 

3 

8 

16  ft.  2  in. 

9  ft.  8  in. 

5  ft.  11  in. 

About  10  tons. 

1020  to  1560 

3J 

9 

17  ft.  10  in. 

10  ft.  2  in. 

6  ft.  2  in. 

About  llj  tons. 

950  to  1500 

4 

6 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


HINTS  ON  MAKING-READY 

1.  The  nature  of  the  making-ready  should 
be  governed  by  the  paper  provided  for  the 
work.  Soft  news  paper  readily  takes  im- 
pression ;  hard  writing  paper  resists  it. 
When  Uttle  time  can  be  allowed  for  making- 
ready,  the  paper  should  be  wet  down  and 
made  pliable  the  day  before  the  form  goes  to 
press ;  and  the  quires  of  damp  paper  should 
be  turned  and  put  under  heavy  weights,  or 
in  standing  press,  so  as  to  make  the  sheets 
equally  damp  in  every  part.  Avoid  over- 
damping.  Job  and  wood-cut  work  are  most 
acceptably  done  on  dry  paper,  but  usually 
at  greater  loss  of  time  in  making-ready. 

2.  See  that  the  bearers  of  the  bed  are 
properly  adjusted,  a  trifle  more  than  type 
height,  and  that  both  impression  screws 
have  proper  bearings  on  the  journals,  so  as 
to  allow  the  cylinder  to  fairly,  but  not  too 
firmly,  press  upon  the  bearers. 

3.  The  packing,  or  the  impression  sur- 
face of  the  cylinder,  should  next  receive 
attention.  Every  press  is  provided  with 
an  India-rubber  blanket,  which  makes  the 
most  serviceable  packing  for  general  work. 
It  is  smooth,  firm,  elastic,  and  wiU  last  a 
long  time,  if  carefully  treated.  Do  not 
aUow  oil  or  grease  to  get  on  it.  Do  not 
paste  overlays  on  it. 

4.  For  rude  presswork,  like  posters,  old 
plates,  or  newspapers  set  in  worn  type,  the 
India-rubber  blanket  is,  by  some  printers, 
thought  not  sufficiently  elastic.  They  prefer 
a  woollen  blanket,  because  it  helps  them 
to  make-ready  quicker.  But  what  may  be 
gained  in  speed  by  use  of  blanket  is  lost 
in  increased  wear  of  type  and  in  inferiority 
of  impression.  The  more  elastic  the  sur- 
face, the  duller  or  coarser  the  print. 

5.  Fine  presswork  is  most  surely  had  by 
the  aid  of  an  inelastic  press-board  packing. 
This  press-board  is  the  hard  and  strong 
board  which  is  usually  provided  for  the 
dry-pressing  of  printed  sheets  in  standing 
presses.  Press-board  packing  can  be  used 
to  advantage  only  on  forms  of  types,  or  on 
plates  made  from  types,  that  are  as  good 
as  new.  As  it  compels  the  pressman  to 
slow  and  careful  making-ready,  it  cannot 
be  used  to  advantage  on  general  job  work, 
or  on  small  editions.  When  a  form  of  new 
type  has  been  properly  made-ready  for  this 
packing,  it  will  show  a  sharper  impression 

Continued  o: 


FOR  CYLINDER  PRESSES. 

than  can  be  made  by  any  elastic  packing. 
Properly  used,  it  is  not  wearing  to  type. 

6.  The  different  kinds  of  packing  may 
be  combined  for  special  kinds  of  work. 
Flannel  or  bUliard-table  cloth  may  be  put 
over  a  thin  press-board  packing;  two  or 
more  sheets  of  paper  may  be  put  over  a 
rubber  blanket. 

7.  The  packing  selected  should  be  tightly 
stretched  over  the  cylinder,  without  bag  or 
wrinkle.  Labor  in  making-ready  is  thrown 
away  if  the  packing  be  not  kept  tight. 
One  end  of  the  rubber  or  wooUen  blanket 
may  be  fastened  on  the  hooks  that  project 
inward  in  the  opening  at  the  gripper  edge 
of  the  cylinder.  The  other  end  may  be 
tightly  laced  with  saddler's  thread,  at  the 
other  opening.  A  better  way  is  to  sew  a  strip 
of  canvas  on  that  end  of  the  blanket,  and 
to  wind  it  around  the  reel  in  this  opening. 

8.  To  put  on  a  press-board  packing, 
select  a  board  the  full  width  of  the  cylin- 
der between  the  bearers,  and  about  ten 
inches  longer  than  the  impression  surface. 
If  the  board  be  too  wide  between  bearers, 
cut  down  to  exact  length.  Cut  with  sharp 
knife,  straight  and  smooth,  leaving  no 
rough  or  turned  edge.  Carefully  crease  the 
part  of  the  board  that  will  be  imder  the 
grippers,  about  one  half-inch  from  the 
edge.  Lay  this  creased  part  on  the  flat 
edge  of  the  cylinder  at  its  opening,  cover 
it  with  a  thin  cherry  reglet,  and  bring 
down  the  clamps  provided  for  the  purpose 
quick  and  hard,  so  as  to  hold  the  board 
securely  against  any  pulling  from  the  other 
end.  Proceed  in  a  similar  manner  at  the 
other  end,  stretching  it  so  tightly  that  it 
hugs  the  cylinder  at  every  point.  Some 
pressmen  carefully  dampen  the  packing 
after  it  has  been  put  on,  by  repeated 
spongings,  until  the  board  swells  and  bags. 
When  it  has  swelled  sufficiently,  they  re- 
stretch  the  board  and  fasten  it  down.  As 
the  board  slowly  dries,  it  contracts  and 
hugs  the  cylinder  with  great  tightness.  To 
restore  the  surface,  made  somewhat  rough  by 
dampening  and  stretching,  it  must  be  cov- 
ered, when  dry  enough,  with  shellac  varnish. 
This  is  tedious  work,  usually  taking  two, 
sometimes  three  days ;  but  it  is  worth  the 
trouble,  for  a  packing  neatly  put  on  will 
last,  with  care,  for  years.  One  or  more 
page  12. 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


7 


PATENT  STOP-CYLINDER  PRESS. 

Tliis  press  is  designed  for  the  finest  quality  of  wood-cut  and  color  work, 
and  will  print  with  a  delicacy  of  impression  and  accuracy  of  register 
unequaled  by  any  other  machine.  It  is  of  great  strength  throughout,  and 
the  principal  cams  have  been  enlarged,  and  the  working  parts  are  of  steel 
and  hardened. 

The  gearing  is  all  made  of  special  iron  and  the  cylinder  shaft  of  steel. 

The  bed  is  driven  by  a  crank,  and  stops  and  starts  without  noise  or 
jar.  It  is  shod  with  hard  steel,  and  in  all  but  the  smallest  sizes  runs  upon 
four  tracks,  which  are  also  of  steel  as  hard  as  can  be  worked. 

The  bed  friction  rollers  are  forged  out  of  the  best  tool  steel. 

The  friction-roller  frames  are  driven  by  a  patented  and  positive  motion, 
and  are  guarded  so  that  they  cannot  get  out  of  place  or  strike  against  the 
ends  of  the  ribs. 

The  distributing  cylinder,  of  poHshed  steel,  with  its  large  composition 
rollers,  receives  the  ink  from  the  fountain  and  transfers  it  to  the  table. 

The  ink  table  is  of  iron,  warranted  to  remain  always  true  and  level. 

The  distributing  rollers  can  be  set  parallel  or  at  any  angle  reqvdred. 
They  are  of  wrought-iron  pipe  with  steel  journals  welded  in. 

The  form  rollers,  also  of  iron  pipe  with  steel  journals,  are  from  four 
to  six,  according  to  the  size  of  the  machine.  They  are  not  driven  by 
gearing  or  friction  rolls,  but  by  the  contact  of  the  distributing  rollers 
above  them,  the  surfaces  of  which  run  always  at  the  same  speed  as  the 
type  s\irface. 

When  so  ordered,  the  press  is  arranged  so  that  the  bed  may  run  either 
once  or  twice  before  the  cylinder  moves,  thus  passing  the  form  either  two 
or  four  times  under  the  inking  rollers,  as  desired,  before  taking  the 
impression. 

The  new  patent  cylinder  clamp  causes  the  impression  cyUnder  to  stop 
without  jar  and  stand  without  tremor,  of  course  preventing  the  wear  of 
the  stop  cam.  There  is  also  a  brake  on  the  fly  wheel,  by  which  the  press 
can  be  quickly  stopped. 

The  impression  cylinder  is  stationary  while  the  sheet  is  being  placed, 
the  fingers  closing  and  the  points  being  withdrawn  before  it  starts. 

The  cyhnder  wheel  gears  directly  into  the  rack  on  the  bed,  and  is  driven 
by  it,  so  that  perfect  register  is  warranted. 


8 


E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


The  patent  delivering  cylinder  takes  the  printed  sheets  from  the  main 
cylinder,  without  the  aid  of  cords  or  tapes,  and  sends  them,  by  a  set  of 
independent  and  adjustable  cords,  down  in  front  of  the  fly. 

The  patent  fly  can  be  removed  in  a  minute.  It  has  sharp-edged  fingers 
to  prevent  smear,  any  one  of  which  can  be  changed  in  an  instant  in 
position  by  a  thumb-screw. 


Sizes  and  Prices. 


Bed 

Rollers  covering 

Bed 

Boilers  covering 

inside 

Entire 

inside 

Entire 

No. 

bearers. 

Matter.  Form, 

Price. 

No. 

bearers. 

Matter.  Form. 

Price. 

2 

20  X  25  in. 

16  X  21  in.  4 

$2,600 

6 

32  X  47  in. 

27  X  42  in.  6 

$4,600 

3 

24  X  29  in. 

19  X  24  in.  4 

3,000 

7 

35  X  51  in. 

30  X  46  in.  6 

5,300 

4 

26  X  34  in. 

21  X  29  in.  4 

3,450 

8 

38  X  55  in. 

33  X  50  in.  7 

6,000 

5 

29  X  42  in. 

24  X  37  in.  5 

4,000 

9 

41  X  60  in. 

36  X  55  in.  8 

6,900 

The  prices  include  apparatus  for  steam  power  and  boxing  and  shipping, 
or  delivery,  set  up,  in  New- York ;  also,  roUer  moulds  and  two  sets  of  stocks. 


Dimensions,  Weight,  Speed,  and  Poiver. 


Over  all. 

Weight  boxed, 

Horse  1 
power.  1 

6 

Length. 

Width. 

Height. 

including 
steam  fixtures. 

Speed. 

2 

9  ft.  10  in. 

4  ft.  10  in. 

4  ft. 

About  4  tons. 

1140  to  1800 

3 

lift.  6  in. 

5  ft. 

6  in. 

4  ft. 

6  in. 

About  5  tons. 

924  to  1650 

4 

4 

12  ft. 

6  ft. 

5  ft. 

About  6  tons. 

852  to  1500 

1 

5 

13  ft.  7  in. 

7  ft. 

7  in. 

5  ft. 

4  in. 

About  6J  tons. 

750  to  1350 

n 

6 

15  ft. 

8  ft. 

6  ft. 

About  8^  tons. 

672  to  1200 

If 

7 

16  ft. 

9  ft. 

6  ft. 

4  in. 

About  10  tons. 

588  to  1050 

i| 

8 

18  ft. 

11  ft. 

7  ft. 

About  llj  tons. 

506  to  900 

2 

9 

18  ft.  4  in. 

11  ft. 

2  in. 

7  ft. 

2  in. 

About  12^  tons. 

421  to  750 

2 

SUGGESTIONS  TO  PRESSMEN 

Continued  from  page  4. 

10.  To  ADJUST  Gripper  Motion  on  Im- 
pression Cylinder.  To  prevent  the  tear- 
ing of  sheets  or  dropping  of  them  too  soon, 
care  must  be  taken  that  the  toothed  seg- 
ment on  the  end  of  the  cylinder  rests  on 
its  stop  pin  when  the  fingers  are  closed. 


1 1 .  Springs,  whether  spiral  or  air  springs, 
should  be  regulated  according  to  the 
weight  of  the  form  and  speed  of  the  press, 
for  a  heavy  form  or  high  speed  requires 
more  spring  than  a  light  form  or  slow 
speed. 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


9 


PATENT  FOUR  ROLLER  SINGLE  LARGE 
CYLINDER  PRESS. 


Tliis  machine  has  been  recently  entirely  remodeled  and  improved  in  numer- 
ous important  particulars.  The  height  is  materially  reduced,  and  it  is  in 
every  way  more  solid,  durable,  and  efficient.    Tlie  speed  is  increased  over 

twenty-five  per  cent.,  and  the 
quality  of  the  printing  is  excel- 
lent for  aU  kinds  of  work. 

The  frame  is  cast  soUd,  and 
special  iron  is  used  for  all  the 
gearing. 

The  bed  is  driven  by  an  im- 
proved motion,  and  starts  and 
stops  without  noise  or  jar. 

The  new  improved  patent  air 
springs  are  a  great  improvement 
over  any  springs  of  the  kind  here- 
tofore made. 

The  friction  roUers  and  frames 
under  the  bed  are  driven  by  a  pat- 
ented mechanism  instead  of  being 
allowed  to  run  free.  This  decreases 
the  wear  on  the  steel  ways,  and 
prevents  the  rollers  from  cutting. 

The  long  universal- joint  shaft, 
with  its  heavy  coimterbalance 
weight,  gives  a  regular  motion 
to  the  bevel  pinion  which  drives 
the  bed. 

The  fountain  is  so  constructed  that  the  ink  lies  upon  the  knife  and 
passes  under  the  roller,  a  very  smaU  quantity  being  sufficient  to  operate  it. 
It  has  a  tight  cover,  and  handles  by  which  its  entire  front,  with  knife 
attached,  may  be  quickly  drawn  back  for  cleansing. 

The  distributing  cylinder,  which  is  furnished  when  especially  ordered, 
with  its  large  composition  rollers,  receives  the  ink  from  the  fountain  and 
transfers  it  to  the  table. 

The  ink  table  is  of  iron,  and  of  course  always  remains  trae  and  level. 

The  table  distributing  roUers  can  be  set  parallel  or  at  any  angle  required. 

The  form  rollers  are  driven  by  the  contact  of  the  distributing  rollers 
above  them,  the  surfaces  of  which  always  move  at  the  same  speed  as  the 
type  surface. 

There  are  four  steel  ways  for  the  bed. 

The  patent  yielding  points  hold  the  sheet  till  the  grippers  pull  it  away, 
leaving  no  interval  in  which  it  is  free  to  slide  about. 
2 


Positive  Vibratory  Apparatus  for 
Distributing  Rollers. 


12 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


Hints  on  Making-Beady  for  Cylinde 

sheets  of  paper  may  be  put  over  this  pack- 
ing, on  which  paper  overlays  may  be  fast- 
ened. The  packing  itself  should  never  be 
touched  with  paste,  or  moisture  of  any  kind. 
To  secure  the  overlays,  a  web  of  muslin  may 
be  stretched  over  all  by  means  of  the  reel. 

9.  For  some  Mnds  of  wood-cut  press- 
work,  the  press-board  packing  may  not  be 
hard  enough.  A  packing  or  jacket  of  sheet 
brass  is  sometimes  riveted  on  the  cylinder. 
In  one  New- York  office  the  cylinder  itself 
is  made  so  thick  that  there  is  no  need  of 
packing.  The  added  brass  or  iron  makes 
the  printing  sm-face  solid,  and  best  adapted 
to  the  giving  of  sharp  impressions. 

10.  Examine  the  form  before  anything  is 
done  toward  making-ready.  If  it  is  a  type 
form,  see  that  chase,  furniture,  rules,  and 
types  rest  flat  on  the  bed.  If  any  part  of  the 
form  springs,  it  is  unfit  for  making-ready. 
The  chase  may  be  warped ;  the  form  may  be 
locked  too  tight ;  the  justification  may  be 
bad.  Whatever  the  cause,  the  fault  should 
be  corrected.  If  not  corrected,  spaces  and 
furniture  will  ' '  work  up  "  under  impression, 
presswork  vrill  be  delayed,  and  the  type 
will  be  seriously  damaged.  If  the  form  is 
of  plates,  see  that  the  blocks  are  not 
warped,  and  that  they  are  of  even  height, 
and  are  firmly  held  in  the  chase.  K  plates 
are  fastened  on  blocks,  and  the  blocks  are 
warped,  are  out  of  square,  or  of  uneven 
height,  have  these  faults  corrected  before 
beginning  to  make-ready.  The  blocker  can 
correct  in  shorter  time  than  the  press- 
man. Lock  the  form  up  firmly  on  the  bed, 
so  that  it  cannot  move,  using  furniture  that 
does  not  spring  and  gives  good  bearing. 
If  the  form  be  small,  put  it  as  close  to  the 
back  of  the  bed  as  the  grippers  will  allow, 
and  midway  between  the  bearers.  The 
cylinder  should  have  been  set  so  that  the 
grippers  will  just  lap  over  the  edge  of  the 
back  of  the  bed.  When  the  grippers  are 
in  this  position,  take  exact  measurement 
of  the  distance  between  the  point  of  any 
gripper  and  the  back  edge  of  the  bed. 
Make  a  gauge  from  brass  rule  of  the  meas- 
urement, and  use  it  every  time  a  form  is 
laid  on  the  bed.  See  that  the  distance 
from  the  type  to  the  edge  of  the  chase  tal- 
lies with  the  gauge.  This  test  is  needed 
to  prevent  the  closing  of  the  gi'ippers  and 
the  crushing  of  type  on  a  form  that  may 
have  been  made  up  too  near  the  edge. 

ContiuutM 


r  Presses  ....  Continued  from  page  6. 

11.  Where  an  imusuaUy  wide  margia 
must  be  given  to  the  printed  sheet,  and 
the  chase  is  smaU,  put  enough  of  fur- 
niture at  the  back  of  the  bed  to  make  up 
the  deficiency.  If  the  chase  is  large,  con- 
taining a  book  form,  with  pages  locked  up 
against  the  inner  crossbars,  making  unu- 
sual distance  between  the  outer  edge  of 
page  and  the  chase,  then  unscrew  the 
clamps  at  the  back  edge  of  the  bed,  and 

J  allow  the  chase  to  project  backward,  until 
the  grippers  close  at  the  proper  point  near 
the  type.  If  the  space  between  the  edge 
of  chase  and  edge  of  type  is  very  large, 
then  it  may  be  necessary,  on  a  two-roller 
cylinder,  to  reset  the  cylinder.  Remove 
the  screw  and  washer  at  the  end  of  the 
cylinder  shaft ;  draw  the  intermediate  pin- 
ion out  of  gear ;  loosen  the  screws  in  the 
gauge  rack.  Then  turn  the  cylinder  to  the 
point  required,  seeing  that  the  grippers  just 
escape  the  tj^e  ;  put  the  intermediate  wheel 
again  in  gear,  adjust  the  gauge  rack,  and 
screw  up  tight  as  before.  This  resetting 
of  the  cylinder  can  be  done  only  on  the 
two-roller  cylinder.  Do  not  attempt  to 
reset  it  unless  resetting  is  unavoidable. 
Think  of  what  you  are  doing ;  go  slow,  and 
be  sure  that  every  movement  made  is  right. 

!  12.  Protect  the  packing  by  pasting  over 
it  two  sheets  of  clean  book  paper.  Put 
in  the  inking  rollers,  adjusting  them  so 
that  they  will  lightly  press  the  types  and 
each  other.  Do  not  set  too  tightly,  for 
if  they  chafe  they  will  soon  wear  out. 
Turn  on  the  ink,  by  the  screws  of  the 

'  inking  fountain,  with  caution.  The  ink,  at 
this  stage,  must  just  stain  the  rollers. 
Then  take,  on  the  paper  provided  for  the 
form,  a  pale  impression,  which  will  show 

j  whether  the  margins  are  correct.  If  they 
are  not,  lengthen  or  shorten  the  drop  feed 
guides  until  the  right  margin  is  made. 
Push  out  the  iron  tongues  at  the  edge  of 
the  feed  board  in  positions  where  they  will 
equally  sustain  the  paper.  Slide  the  drop 
guides  along  the  rod  until  they  fall  squarely 
over  the  tongues.  Set  the  side  guide  so 
that  it  will  give  a  proper  margin  in  length 
to  the  sheet  to  be  printed.    Adjust  the 

I  grippers  so  that  all  will  seize  the  sheet  at 
the  same  instant.  Take  a  clean  proof 
on  its  own  paper,  with  the  type  in  proper 
position  on  the  sheet.  If  the  form  is  a 
book  form,  make  sure  that  it  will  register 

on  page  14. 


« 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue.  13 


PATENT  TWO-EOLLER  SINGLE  LARGE 
CYLINDER  PRESS. 

The  two-roller  machines  have,  like  those  with  four  rollers,  been  entirely 
remodeled,  giving  an  increase  of  speed  of  over  twenty-five  per  cent. 

The  general  description  given  of  our  four-roller  large  cyUnder  press 
appHes  equally  to  the  two-roller  presses. 

The  inking  apparatus  is  placed  close  to  the  impression  cylinder,  and 
when  reqidred  is  arranged  so  that  the  whole  may  be  drawn  out  upon  ways 
or  slides  to  the  end  of  the  press,  leaving  the  cyhnder  and  the  bed  exposed 
and  easy  of  access  for  making  overlays  and  adjusting  the  forms. 

When  especially  ordered,  the  table  distribution  will  be  put  on  instead  of 
that  with  the  usual  rack  and  pinion. 


Sizes  and  Prices. 


No. 

1 

2 
3 
4 

5 


Bed 
inside 
bearers. 

17  X  21  in. 
20  X  25  in. 
24  X  29  in. 
26  X  34  in. 
29  X  42  in. 


Hollers  covering 

Entire 
Matter.  Form. 


13  X  17  iu. 
15  X  20  in. 
19  X  24  m. 
21  X  29  in. 
24  X  37  in. 


Price. 

$1,250 
1,700 
2,050 
2,450 
2,850 


No. 

6 
7 


Bed 
inside 
bearers. 

32  X  47  in. 
35  X  51  in. 
38  X  55  in. 
41 X  60  in. 


Rollers  covering 

Entire 
Matter.  Form. 

27  X  42  in.  2 

30  X  46  in.  2 

33  X  50  in.  2 

36  X  55  in.  2 


Price. 

$3,250 
3,800 
4,300 
5,000 


Patent  reversing  motion,  enabling  the  pressman  to  run  the  press  back- 
ward without  leaving  the  feed  stand,  $100  extra  for  sizes  from  No.  1  to 
No.  5  inclusive ;  and  for  sizes  above  No.  5,  $150. 

The  prices  include  apparatus  complete  for  steam  power  and  boxing  and 
shipping,  or  delivery,  set  up,  in  New- York ;  also,  one  extra  set  roller  stocks 
and  blanket. 


Dimensions,  Weight,  Speed,  and  Power. 


Over  all. 

Weight  boxed, 

d  ^ 
en  o 

6 

including 

Speed. 

°l 

Length. 

Width. 

Hei 

ght. 

steam  lixtiires. 

1 

7  ft.   3  in. 

5  ft.   7  in. 

4  ft. 

5  in. 

About  2  tons. 

1200  to  2500 

3 
4 

2 

7  ft.  10  in. 

5  ft.  11  in. 

5  ft. 

9  in. 

About  2J  tons. 

1056  to  2200 

1 

3 

9  ft.   7  in. 

6  ft.   7  in. 

5  ft. 

4  in. 

About  3J  tons. 

1125  to  2000 

14 

4 

10  ft.   7  in. 

7  ft.   2  in. 

5  ft. 

9  in. 

About  5  tons. 

1068  to  1900 

2 

5 

11  ft.  4  in. 

8  ft. 

6  ft. 

2  in. 

About  6^  tons. 

1012  to  1800 

2J 

6 

12  ft.   7  in. 

8  ft-.   8  in. 

6  ft. 

8  in. 

About  7  tons. 

955  to  1700 

3 

7 

13  ft.  11  in. 

9  ft. 

7  ft. 

About  8  tons. 

900  to  1600 

34 

8 

13  ft.  11  in. 

9  ft.  5  m. 

7  ft. 

6  in. 

About  9  tons. 

840  to  1500 

4 

14 


K.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catal,ogue. 


Hints  on  Making -Ready  for  Cylindi 

before  anything  is  done  toward  overlaying. 
If  one  or  more  pages  are  out  of  square, 
and  hang  or  bow,  have  the  error  at  once 
corrected.  K  the  impression  be  too  weak 
and  the  ink  too  pale  to  clearly  show  up 
faults,  a  temporary  overlay  over  the  weak 
spots  and  a  sheet  of  damp  proof  paper 
behind  the  sheet  for  proof  will  bring  them 
out  plainly  enough  on  the  next  impres- 
sion. But  put  on  extra  impression  with 
caution,  if  the  form  contains  delicate  types 
or  wood-cuts.  This  press  proof  should  be 
carefully  examined  by  the  foreman  and  ap- 
proved as  to  margin  and  register.  At  this 
stage  of  the  work,  it  is  possible  to  correct 
a  fault  of  margin  or  register ;  but  if  this 
correction  be  neglected  or  postponed  until 
backing  up,  it  becomes  more  difficult,  and 
is  sometimes  impossible. 

13.  To  set  new  tapes:  pass  the  tape 
around  and  close  to  the  cylinder.  Lap  it 
over  one  of  the  tape  pulleys,  and  then  pass 
it  around  the  small  guide  pulley  on  the 
shaft  above.  To  increase  its  tightness, 
throw  up  the  guide  pulley  from  the  shaft, 
and  set  the  binding  screw  more  tightly. 
All  these  pulleys  are  movable  on  their 
shafts,  and  distance  between  them  may 
be  altered  at  pleasure.  Let  the  tapes 
rest  upon  the  outer  margin  of  the  sheet, 
and  see  that  the  overlays  on  the  tympan 
over  which  the  tapes  pass  are  of  equal 
thickness ;  if  not  equal,  the  sheet  will 
wrinkle. 

14.  To  set  the  fly:  run  through  a  sheet 
of  the  paper  to  be  printed,  and  let  it 
run  down  the  fly,  so  far  that  it  is  barely 
held  by  the  fly  pulleys.  Then  set  the  cam 
which  works  the  fly,  so  that  its  point  just 
clears  the  small  friction  roller  on  the  shaft, 
and  it  will  throw  down  the  sheet  correctly. 
Tighten  the  spring  according  to  the  size 
of  the  sheet,  and  set  the  spring  crank  so 
that  it  will  prevent  the  fly  from  striking 
too  hard  on  the  table. 

15.  On  a  newspaper  form,  the  first  im- 
pression against  a  sound  packing  should  be 
fairly  even,  but  there  will  be  some  weak- 
ness in  the  centre  and  some  hardness  at 
the  edges.  On  a  book  form,  or  job  form 
of  irregular  shape,  a  first  impression  so 
taken  must  be  imeven.  Before  trjdng  to 
correct  the  fault,  consider  the  cause.  Where 
the  force  of  impression  meets  resistance  on 
every  side,  as  in  the  center  of  a  form,  it  is 

Coutiiine 


'  Presses  ....  Continued  from  page  12. 

diffused  and  weakened.  When  this  force 
meets  the  comer  of  a  page,  or  an  exposed 
rule,  or  the  outer  lines  of  a  wood-cut,  it 
meets  but  Uttle  resistance  ;  it  concentrates 
and  makes  a  strong  impression.  The  ime- 
venness  is  evidence  of  irregular  resistance 
in  the  form — an  irregularity  too  often  aided 
by  over-high  plates,  types,  or  rules. 

1 6.  Weakness  of  impression  may  be  cor- 
rected: 1.  By  turning  down  impression 
screws  and  putting  on  more  impression, 
flatting  down  the  high  to  bring  up  the  low 
types — obviously  a  bad  method.  2.  By  rais- 
ing up  the  low  types  or  plates  with  under- 
lays of  paper  or  card.  3.  By  stretching  a 
thin  rubber  or  woollen  blanket  over  the  fast 
packing,  trusting  to  its  elasticity  to  bring 
up  the  types  that  do  not  show.  4.  By 
pasting  overlays  of  paper  of  one  or  more 
thicknesses  over  every  part  of  the  packing 
that  shows  weakness. 

17.  The  method  of  forcing  impression 
by  means  of  the  impression  screws  is  men- 
tioned only  to  be  condemned.  A  large 
form  of  wood  type,  of  old  plates,  of  dia- 
grams on  black  groimd,  which  has  to  be 
printed  in  haste,  may  seem  to  justify  the 
turning  of  the  screws ;  but  the  method  is 
radically  bad,  as  destructive  to  the  press 
as  to  the  type.  The  impression  screws 
should  be  used  for  this  purpose  only  in 
rare  emergencies,  and  as  the  last  resort. 
If  they  are  frequently  tampered  with,  the 
even  bearing  of  the  cylinder  will  soon  be 
lost ;  the  press  will  be  strained  in  false 
bearings,  and  made  incapable  of  giving 
even  impressions. 

18.  The  extra  impression  that  may  be 
required  for  work  in  haste  can  be  quickest 

!  had  by  putting  on  a  thin  rubber  or  woollen 
blanket  over  the  fast  packing.  This  is 
a  common  but  an  unworkmanlike  method. 
The  extra  blanket  will  shorten  making- 
ready,  but  it  wears  the  types  or  plates,  and 

,    makes  thick,  coarse  presswork.    It  is  use- 

i  ful  only  on  short  editions.  On  a  long  edi- 
tion the  extra  blanket  will  lose  its  elasticity 
before  the  work  is  half  done  ;  it  will  pack 
hard  and  require  renewal.  The  single  rub- 
ber blanket  provided  for  the  press  is  elastic 
enough  for  ordinary  work.  .If  it  is  not 
enough,  put  more  paper  over  the  fast  pack- 
ing. Avoid  the  common  fault  of  novices, 
who  put  on  too  much  impression  at  the 
start.    Making-ready  for  fine  work  should 

on  pajie  16. 


K.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


15 


NEWS  AND  JOB  CYLINDER  PRESS. 

This  machine  is  intended  for  job  and  newspaper  work,  and  will  run  at  a 
speed  of  from  1000  to  1500  impressions  per  hour.  In  construction  and 
finish  it  resembles  the  regular  single  large  eyUnder  press,  but  is  simpler. 
It  has  air  springs.  The  cylinder  is  very  strong,  and  the  patent  full-size 
segment,  gearing  into  the  rack  on  type  bed,  insures  a  perfect  register, 
without  slur.  The  finger  motion  is  noiseless.  The  fly  cam  has  a  contin- 
uous surface,  so  that  the  fly  rises  and  falls  noiselessly. 

This  machine  has  the  patent  delivery  cylinder,  which  dispenses  entirely 
with  the  tapes  around  the  cylinder. 

It  would  be  impossible,  for  the  price  charged,  to  make  any  more  perfect 
or  reliable  machine. 


Sizes  and  Prices. 

Bed 
Inside 

No.  bearers. 

5    29  X  42  in. 


33^x49  in.  28jx44in 


Boilers  covering 
Entire 

Matter.  Form. 

24  x37in.  2 

9 


Price. 

$1,700 
2,000 


The  price  includes  boxing  and  shipping,  or  delivery,  set  up,  in  New- York ; 
also,  roller  moulds  and  two  sets  of  stocks. 


Dimensions,  Weight,  Speed,  and  Power. 


Over  all. 

Weiglit  hoxed, 
including 

Speed. 

=  1 

o 

Length. 

Width. 

Height. 

steam  (ixtures. 

5 

11  ft.   1  in. 

6  ft.   7  in. 

5  ft.  8  in. 

About  4  tons. 

600  to  1400 

2 

6^ 

12  ft.   6  in. 

7  ft.   6  in. 

6  ft.  2  in. 

About  4J  tons. 

400  to  1200 

2^ 

CAEE  OF  INKING  ROLLERS. 


•  Care  of  Inking  Rollers.  Good  rollers  j 
are  as  necessary  as  a  good  press.  On  fast 
presses,  the  rollers  should  be  harder  than 
those  provided  for  slow  presses ;  but  on 
either  Mnd  of  press  they  should  have  a 
smooth,  moist,  clinging,  elastic  surface. 
Rollers  with  many  tine  cracks,  or  piu-holes, 
may  serve  for  common  newspaper  work, 
but  no  skUl  of  the  pressman  can  make 
them  do  superior  press-work.  The  best 
press-work  always  requires  rollers  that  are 
as  good  as  new.  Before  they  are  put  in 
press,  they  should  be  tested,  by  lightly 


I  passing  the  palm  of  a  clean  hand  over 
the  surface.  If  they  soil  the  hand,  they 
need  cleaning ;  if  dry  and  skinny,  they  need 
sponging ;  if  wet  and  clammy,  they  should 
be  lightly  rubbed,  and  exposed  to  dry  air. 
Glycerine  rollers  must  be  kept  in  a  dry, 
and  glue-and-molasses  rollers  in  a  damp, 
atmosphere.  In  cleaning,  use  lye  sparingly, 
and  never  on  a  new  roller ;  oU,  benzine, 
or  ttrrpentine  are  better.  Every  press  should 
have  two  sets  of  rollers,  of  different  gi-ades 
of  firmness.  Rollers  should  be  made  a  week 
before  use. 


16 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catai^ogue. 


Hints  on  Making-Beady  for  Cylinder  Presses  ....  Continued  from  page  14. 


alwmjs  begin  with  a  light  impression.  When 
the  full  force  of  the  press  is  not  exerted  at 
the  start,  it  is  always  easy,  at  any  stage 
of  making-ready,  to  overlay  and  increase 
impression  anywhere;  but  when  impression 
is  full  at  the  start,  it  is  often  impossible 
to  take  it  o£E  any  point  without  destroying 
all  the  making-ready  that  has  been  done. 

19.  Fiad  out  whether  the  presswork  de- 
sired is  to  be  common,  good,  or  fine,  and  how 
much  time  can  be  allowed  for  making-ready. 
The  time  allowed  must  determine  the  qual- 
ity of  the  work.  Begin  by  bringing  up  with 
imderlays  all  lines  of  types  or  plates  that 
are  low.  The  imderlay  is  to  be  preferred 
to  the  overlay  only  when  it  brings  the  low 
matter  up  to  the  inking  rollers,  as  well  as 
to  impression.  Cut  imderlays  from  proofs, 
which  will  show  you  where  to  cut  and 
where  to  fasten  them.  The  proper  size 
and  thickness  of  an  underlay  can  be  known 
only  by  experiment.  Cut  out  of  a  proof 
every  feebly  printed  spot,  and  fasten  the 
part  cut  out  on  the  feet  of  the  type.  The 
proof  taken  after  such  an  underlay  has  been 
af&xed  should  show  improvement ;  but  the 
centre  may  be,  probably  will  be,  stUl  too 
feeble.  To  correct  this,  cut  another  under- 
lay from  the  second  proof,  which  will  be 
of  smaller  size,  and  put  it  \inder  the  first. 
If  this  is  not  enough,  cut  and  put  on  a 
third,  taking  care  that  the  smallest  shall 
always  be  next  to  the  bed  of  the  press. 
Avoid  underlaying  any  part  of  the  form 
which  shows  up  fairly  on  the  proof.  At 
this  stage  of  the  work,  do  not  put  a  need- 
lessly thick  underlay  under  a  heavy-faced 
cut  or  type,  because  you  think  it  will  need 
much  impression.  This  extra  impression 
will  be  most  fairly  given  by  an  overlay. 
Do  not  put  a  thick  underlay  under  the  cor- 
ner or  imder  one-half  of  a  large  type ;  for 
if  the  type  rocks  or  tUts,  as  it  probably 
will,  under  impression,  the  tilting  will  work 
up  the  furniture  and  quadrats.  Use  but 
little  paste,  for  the  moisture  in  it  will 
swell  the  wood  it  touches.  For  very  low 
lines  or  blocks,  card-board  is  better  than 
paper.  Put  all  imderlays  on  smoothly, 
without  fold  or  wrinkle.  When  plates  are 
on  patent  blocks,  underlays  may  be  freely 
used  with  excellent  results ;  but  the  under- 
lay should  always  be  between  the  plate 
and  the  block.  An  imderlay  for  a  plate  on 
a  block  should  always  be  cut  smaller  than 

Continued 


is  indicated  by  the  feeble  spot  on  the  proof, 
for  there  is  a  spiing  in  the  plate  beyond  the 
surface  underlaid,  which  wUl  make  up  the 
deficiency.  Do  not  imderlay  too  much ; 
one-fourth  the  surface  of  a  type  form  is  a 
large  allowance.  If  more  is  attempted,  the 
form  is  made  springy,  and  this  spiinginess 
will  surely  work  up  furniture. 

20.  Some  of  the  finishing  work  in  under- 
laying, previously  directed  for  plate  forms, 
can  be  done  more  neatly  on  type  forms 
by  use  of  overlays.  Where  choice  can  be 
had,  use  overlays.  The  office  of  the  under- 
lay is  the  bringing  up  of  low  types  or 
plates  to  inking  rollers  and  reasonably  even 
impression ;  the  office  of  the  overlay,  the 
giving  of  finish  and  delicacy  to  impression. 

21.  To  overlay  a  form,  first  paste  upon 
the  gripper  edge  of  the  cylinder  two  sheets 
of  thin,  hard  paper.  Take  a  pale  proof  on 
the  paper  provided  for  the  work,  obsei-ving 
all  the  directions  previously  given  concern- 
ing margins.  When  margins  are  correct, 
take  two  proofs,  one  on  thick  and  one  on 
thin  paper.  Wherever  there  appears  a  de- 
cided weakness  of  impression  on  the  proof, 
cut  the  weak  part  out,  and  neatly  paste  it 
down  on  the  sheet  next  to  the  fast  pack- 
ing. Use  a  sharp  knife,  and  cut  upon  a 
smooth  surface,  making  no  torn  or  ragged 
edges.  If  the  work  is  fine,  pare  down  the 
edges,  so  that  the  next  proof  will  not 
show  a  sudden  change  of  impression  sur- 
face. Wherever  there  is  but  slight  feeble- 
ness of  impression,  cut  the  overlay  for  it 
out  of  thin  paper,  and  affix  it  in  its  place. 
Put  on  overlays  smoothly :  they  are  worse 
than  useless  if  they  bag  or  wrinkle.  If  an 
overlay  has  been  badly  placed,  regard  it 
as  beyond  repair.  Do  not  try  to  patch  it; 
tear  all  off  and  begin  anew. 

22.  When  the  more  conspicuous  defects  of 
impression  have  been  overlaid,  take  other 
proofs  on  thin  paper,  and  examine  them 
for  minor  faults.  From  these  proofs  cut 
new  overlays,  which  put  on  in  the  same 
manner,  untU  a  sufficiently  even  impression 
is  obtained.  If  at  any  stage  of  the  work 
any  rule  or  letter  shows  too  high,  cut  it 

I  out  of  the  packing  sheets.  If  this  cutting 
out  does  not  sufficiently  reduce  impression, 
have  the  faulty  letter  taken  out  of  the  form, 
and  have  the  batter  (the  usual  cause)  cut  off. 

23.  For  all  work  on  wet  paper  printed 
against  an  elastic  packing,  overlays  may  be 

on  page  18. 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


17 


TWO-ROLLER  STOP-CYLINDER  PRESS. 

This  is  an  excellent,  low-priced,  stop-cylinder  machine,  of  an  entirely  new 
design  throughout.  It  is  capable  of  doing  well,  and  at  a  fair  speed,  up 
to  1200  impressions  per  hour,  aU  the  book,  newspaper,  and  job  work  required 
in  the  smaller  class  of  printing  offices.  It  is  strong,  simple,  and  convenient, 
and  so  low  that  the  attendant  stands  directly  on  the  floor.  The  distribution 
is  cylindrical,  and  the  two  inking  rollers  pass  completely  over  the  form. 
The  sheets  are  fed  to  the  under  side  of  the  impression  cylinder,  which 
arrangement  gives  to  the  bed  a  short  travel,  and  thus  makes  it  a  machine 
easy  to  run  by  hand.  The  feed  table  draws  back  to  facilitate  feeding  the 
sheets  to  a  gauge,  and  advances  to  present  them  to  the  fingers  just  before 
the  impression  cylinder  starts.  A  fly  cylinder  with  fingers  receives  the  sheets 
and  delivers  them  to  a  fly,  so  that  no  tapes  pass  around  the  impression 
cylinder. 

A  No.  6J  machine  can  be  run  by  hand  from  700  to  800  impressions 
per  hour,  and  by  power  at  1000  to  1200  per  hour;  and  at  such  speed  it 
is  almost  noiseless. 


Sizes  and  Prices. 

Bed  Rollers  covering 

inside  Entire 

No.                                                                         bearers.                      Matter.            Form.  Price. 

5                                               29  X  42  in.  24  x  37  in.      2  $1,000 

6^  ....  33i  X  49  in.  28^  x  44  in.      2  1,250 


Dimensions,  Weight,  Speed,  and  Power. 


Over  all. 

Weight  boxed, 

O  U 
CQ  ® 

6 

including 

Speed. 

% 

Length. 

Width. 

Height. 

steam  fixtures. 

W  ft 

5 

11  ft. 

7  ft.  7  in. 

4  ft. 

About  4J  tons. 

1000  to  1400 

6i 

12  ft. 

8  ft.  6  in. 

4  ft.  6  in. 

About  5  tons. 

850  to  1200 

BEFORE  MAKING-READY. 


Before  putting  on  the  form,  see  that 
it  is  perfectly  clean,  both  on  face  and  feet. 
The  cleaning  and  oiling  of  every  part  of 
the  press  that  meets  with  friction  should 
have  been  attended  to  before.  A  clean 
press — not  clean  on  the  outside  only,  but 
clean  in  all  its  working  parts — is  the  first 
condition  of  good  press-work. 

When  the  form  has  been  fastened  on  the 
bed,  brush  it  over,  and  free  it  from  the 
dust  that  fouls  the  rollers.  If  types,  plates, 
or  cuts  are  clogged  with  ink  left  after  a 
careless  washing,  have  the  ink  removed 
3 


with  benzine.  Do  not  neglect  the  bottom 
of  the  form.  Brush  that  also,  and  see  that 
no  bits  of  paper  or  particles  of  sand  or 
plaster  stick  to  it. 

Have  Good  Plates.  If  the  form  con- 
tains plates,  some  of  which  are  too  high 
and  others  too  low,  or  if  the  plates  are 
badly  sized,  unequal  as  to  heads,  widths, 
and  bevels,  have  corrections  made  by  the 
electrotyper.  It  wiU  take  the  pressman 
twice  as  long  as  it  would  the  electrotyper 
to  correct  these  faults,  nor  can  the  press- 
man do  the  work  as  well. 


18 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


Hints  on  Making- Beady  for  Cylinder  Presses 


Continued  from  page  16, 


cut  in  large  masses.  For  fine  work,  on  dry 
paper,  against  hard  packing,  the  overlays 
should  be  smaller  and  on  thin  paper.  For 
the  finest  work,  overlays  are  often  needed 
for  single  letters  and  parts  of  letters,  and 
they  should  often  be  of  tissue  paper. 

24.  Do  not  overlay  hurriedly.  It  is  the 
fault  of  a  novice  to  cut  overlays  out  of 
too  thick  paper,  and  to  put  them  on  in 
spots  where  they  are  not  needed.  An  over- 
lay so  put  on  acts  like  an  over-high  type 
or  bearer ;  it  bears  off  the  impression  from 
other  quarters ;  it  increases  work,  and  makes 
the  impression  more  uneven  than  before. 
Overlaying  on  hard  packing  should  be  done 
gradually,  and  a  proof  should  be  taken  after 
each  overlay  has  been  put  on.  The  pressmen 
who  plan  work  for  two  or  three  layers  of 
overlays  will  make  fewer  mistakes  than 
those  who  try  to  do  the  work  with  one. 

25.  Do  not  overlay  too  much.  Never 
make  an  overlay  higher  than  the  raised 
flange  at  the  ends  of  the  cylinder.  If  made 
higher,  the  circumference  of  the  cylinder  is 
so  increased  that  it  will  not  travel  evenly 
with  the  bed.  The  high  overlay  will  be 
moved  by  the  scraping  pressure  necessarily 
produced,  and  the  print  will  slur  or  mackle. 

26.  Wood-Cut  Printing.  A  form  of  elee- 
trotyped  wood-cuts,  or  of  cuts  and  type, 
can  be  made  ready  on  the  cylinder  by  the 
method  of  overlaying  previously  described, 
but  necessarily  at  great  sacrifice  of  time. 
To  save  delay  on  press,  the  overlays  of  the 
cuts  should  have  been  made  before  the 
form  is  laid  on  the  bed.  By  this  method, 
the  wood-cuts  or  their  electrotypes  (the 
wood  should  never  be  sent  to  press  on  a 
cylinder)  should  be  proved  on  a  hand  press 
on  varying  thicknesses  of  paper.  Out  of 
these  proofs  the  overlays  should  be  cut,  the 
cutter  following  the  lead  of  the  engraver. 
Where  the  lines  are  thin,  wide,  and  sharp, 
that  part  of  the  overlay  should  have  but  one 
thickness  of  very  thin  paper,  or,  in  many 
instances,  none  at  all,  and  be  cut  out  en- 
tirely. Those  parts  of  the  cut  that  are 
black  and  solid  should  have  four  or  five 
thicknesses  of  thick  paper.  The  thick- 
nesses on  the  blackish  grays,  the  middle 
tint,  and  the  pale  grays  should  be  dimin- 
ished to  correspond  with  their  diminishing 
color.  These  separate  overlays  should  be 
pasted  neatly  one  over  the  other,  so  ar- 
ranged that  the  overlay  for  the  palest  gray 

Continued  on 


shall  be  nearest  the  face  of  the  cut.  This 
general  rule  will  serve  for  mechanical  cuts, 
but  not  for  landscapes.  The  management  of 
receding  perspective,  the  subduing  of  a  fore- 
ground, the  keeping  up  of  nice  distinctions 
in  the  paler  grays  of  sky,  clouds,  and 
water,  require  special  skill  in  the  arrange- 
ment of  the  overlays,  for  which  no  rules 
can  be  given.  If  the  overlay  cutter  does 
not  have  a  nice  perception  of  the  proper 
relations  of  light  and  shade,  and  of  tints  in 
masses,  he  will  not  succeed  in  overlaying. 
To  school  the  eye  to  this  nice  perception, 
he  should  note  the  effect  of  different  tints 
in  the  proof  as  seen  from  the  distant  stand- 
point of  eight  or  ten  feet. 

27.  When  the  overlays  have  been  cut, 
they  should  be  smoothly  pasted  down  on  the 
sheet  over  hard  packing.  It  is,  of  course, 
possible  to  print  wood-cuts  against  an  elas- 
tic packing,  but  the  impression  had  there- 
from, although  it  may  be  fine  or  good  in 
the  blacks,  will  not  be  pure  or  clean  on  the 
sharp  lines  or  pale  grays.  The  first  proof 
from  a  form  of  cuts,  fairly  overlaid  as 
here  directed,  will  usually  be  satisfactory, 
and  will  rarely  require  patching  or  altera- 
tion. But  this  satisfaction  is  gained  at  the 
expense  of  the  type  work  aroimd  the  cuts. 
The  putting  on  of  four  or  five  overlays 
to  produce  deep  black  bears  off  impression 
from  many  parts  of  the  form,  making  the 
type  work  very  uneven  in  impression.  To 
correct  this  fault  it  is  necessary  to  put 
overlays  over  all  the  weak  spots,  as  pre- 
viously directed,  but  with  greater  care  than 
is  usually  given  to  type  forms.  It  is  slow 
work.  A  large  form,  containing  many  fine 
cuts,  may  reqiure  three  or  more  days  for 
making-ready  (after  the  overlays  of  the  cuts 
have  been  prepared  and  put  on),  if  done,  as  it 
should  be  done,  with  such  care  that  no  inden- 
tation by  impression  shall  appear  on  the  back 
of  the  printed  sheet.  The  time  apparently 
lost  by  this  treatment  is  in  many  eases 
really  time  saved,  for  it  makes  unnecessary 
a  dry-pressing  of  the  printed  sheets. 

28.  The  large  and  simpler  wood-cuts 
of  weekly  newspapers,  which  have  to  be 
printed  in  haste,  can  be  made  ready  much 
more  quickly  by  taking  the  preliminary 
proofs  on  a  prepared  card-board  made  for 
the  purpose,  which  can  be  readily  peeled 
and  separated  in  three  or  more  layers.  In 
preparing  an  overlay  on  card,  the  solid 

page  21. 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


19 


BED  AND  PLATEN  POWER  BOOK  PRESS. 

The  bed  and  platen  press  now  manufactured  by  us  is  based  upon  that 
originally  made  and  patented  by  Isaac  Adams,  of  Boston. 

The  improvements  we  have  added  and  patented  during  the  last  few 
years  make  it  essentially  a  new  machine.  Two  thousand  pounds  have 
been  added  to  the  weight  of  an  average-sized  press,  which  gives  greater 
solidity  and  exactness  of  impression. 

There  are  also  important  improvements  in  the  distribution,  by  which 
two  form  rollers  will  now  do  work  almost  equal  to  four  upon  one  of  the 
old  machines. 

A  fountain  for  expensive  colored  work  has  been  constructed,  in  which 
the  ink  lies  upon  the  knife  in  fioU  view,  so  that  very  little  is  required  to 
start  the  press.    It  is  quickly  cleaned  and  without  waste  of  ink. 

There  is  no  question  that  in  the  bed  and  platen  press  the  wear  and 
tear  of  type,  or  electrotype  and  stereotype  plates,  is  reduced  to  a  minimum, 
and  for  printing  books,  especially  when  short  numbers  are  required,  it  is, 
and  will  continue  to  be,  the  most  economical  and  desirable  machine. 


Sizes  and  Prices. 


No. 

Size  of  Platen. 

Rollers. 

Price. 

No. 

Size  of  Platen. 

Rollers. 

Price. 

1  . 

.    14x18  inches 

2 

$800 

38  . 

.    29  X  43 

inches 

2 

$3,000 

4  . 

.    19x25  inches 

2 

1,900 

39  . 

.    29  X  43 

inches 

4 

3,300 

5  . 

.    19x25  inches 

4 

2,150 

47  . 

.    31  X  45 

inches 

2 

3,300 

6  . 

.   20x25  inches 

2 

2,000 

48  . 

.    31 X  45 

inches 

4 

3,600 

7  . 

.    20x25  inches 

4 

2,250 

50  . 

.    32  X  46 

inches 

2 

3,600 

11  . 

.    24  X  29 J  inches 

2 

2,250 

51  . 

.    32  X  46 

inches 

4 

4,000 

12  . 

.    24  X  29 i  inches 

4 

2,500 

52  . 

.  35X49 

inches 

2 

4,000 

29  . 

.    27x41  inches 

2 

2,700 

53  . 

.  35x49 

inches 

4 

4,500 

30  . 

.    27x41  inches 

4 

3,000 

The  above  prices  include  two  friskets,  two  sets  stocks,  and  four  sets  of 
nippers  of  three  each,  but  no  roUer  mould  nor  blanket. 


Dimensions,  Weight,  Speed,  and  Power. 


Over  all. 

Approximate 
weight,  bxd., 

including 
steam  flxt's. 

Speed. 

Horse 
power. 

Length. 

Width. 

Height. 

o 

« 

26  X  40  in. 

13  ft. 

6  ft.  8  in. 

5  ft.  10  in. 

5J  tons. 

660  to  1020 

1 

2 

27  X  43  in. 

13  ft. 

7  ft.  2  in. 

6ft.  Sin. 

6^  tons. 

660  to  1020 

1 

2 

27  X  41  in. 

13  ft. 

6  ft.  8  in. 

5  ft.  10  in. 

6  tons. 

660  to  1020 

2 

27  X  41  in. 

14  ft.   6  in. 

7  ft.  4  in. 

6  ft. 

6J  tons. 

480  to  840 

2 

4 

29  X  43  in. 

15  ft. 

7  ft.  6  in. 

6  ft. 

7J  tons. 

480  to  840 

4 

20 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


PATENT  RAILWAY  COUPON  TICKET  MACHINE. 


This  simple  modification  of  our  well-known  cylinder  press  will  print  with  ease 
at  the  rate  of  twelve  hundred  per  hour.  The  paper,  laid  by  the  operator 
sheet  by  sheet  upon  the  feed  table,  is  delivered  automatically  to  the  cylinder, 
printed,  numbered,  perforated,  brought  back  and  laid  down,  printed  side  up, 
upon  the  rack  under  the  eye  of  the  attendant.  The  form  and  numbering 
wheels  are  on  the  same  bed,  and  receive  their  ink  from  the  same  rollers. 
The  impression  cylinder  gears  into  the  bed,  turning  forward  and  backward 
with  it,  and  instead  of  fingers  has  cords,  that  run  around  in  the  spaces 
between  the  coupons.  A  numbering  plate  is  airanged  for  each  different 
spacing  of  coupons,  so  that  no  time  is  lost  in  adjusting  the  wheels.  Local 
tickets  can  be  printed  in  strips,  and  afterward  cut  up. 

For  sizes  and  prices,  see  next  page. 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


21 


Railway  Coupon  Ticket  Machine,  continued.    Sizes  and  Prices. 

Number  of  coupons  that  can  be 
printed  with  wheels  num- 
bering up  to 

No.  Size  of  bed.  Size  of  matter.  10,000.         100,000.      1,000,000.  Price. 

1  .    .    7x29  inches        3  x27  inches        29        25        23  $1,750.00 

2  .    .    9  X  32  inches        5J  x  30  inches        32        28        26  2,250.00 

Prices  inchide  one  chase,  apparatus  for  steam  power,  and  boxing  and 
carting,  but  no  numbering  wheels  or  perforators. 

.  Per  set. 

Price  of  wheels  to  number  np  to  10,000,  with  perforators  .  .-  .  $50.00 
Price  of  wheels  to  number  up  to  100,000,  with  perforators  .  .  .  70.00 
Price  of  wheels  to  number  l^p  to  1.000,000,  with  perforators    .    .    .  90.00 


Dimensions,  Weight,  Speed,  and  Power. 


Over  all. 

Weight  boxed, 

s « 

including 

Speed. 

=1 

6 

"A 

Length. 

Width. 

Height. 

steam  fixtures. 

1 

4  ft. 

4  ft.  9  in. 

3  ft.  8  in. 

Aboiit  li  tons. 

843  to  1500 

2 

5  ft. 

5  ft.  1  in. 

3  ft.  8  in. 

About  2  tons. 

540  to  1200 

Hints  OH  Mah'ng-Beady  for  Cylinder 

blacks  are  left  on,  and  the  grays  are  peeled 
up  and  thrown  out.  Over  overlays  so  cut, 
and  affixed  to  cylinder,  a  thin  billiard-cloth 
is  stretched,  the  elasticity  of  which  makes 
up  the  deficiencies  of  making-ready. 

29.  Do  not  try  to  correct  the  faults  of 
hurried  making-ready  by  a  weak  impression, 
and  by  carrying  an  excess  of  ink  to  hide 
the  weakness.  Excess  of  ink  fouls  the  roll- 
ers, clogs  the  types,  and  makes  the  printed 
work  smear  or  set  off.  A  good  print  cannot 
be  had  when  the  impression  is  so  weak  that 
the  paper  barely  touches  the  ink  on  the 
types  and  is  not  pressed  against  the  types. 
There  must  be  force  enough  to  transfer  the 
ink  not  only  on  the  paper  but  in  the  paper. 
A  firm  impression  should  be  had,  even  if 
paper  be  indented. 

30.  The  amount  of  impression  required 
will  largely  depend  on  the  making-ready. 
With  careful  making-ready,  impression  may 
be  light ;  roughly  and  hurriedly  done,  it  must 
be  hard.  Indentation  is  evidence  of  wear 
to  type.  The  spring  and  the  resulting  fric- 
tion of  an  elastic  impression  surface  is  most 
felt  where  there  is  least  resistance,  at  the 


Presses  ....  Continued  from  jjage  18. 

upper  and  lower  ends  of  lines  of  tjrpe,  where 
they  begin  to  round  off.  It  follows  that 
the  saving  of  time  that  may  be  gained  by 
hurried  and  rough  making-ready  must  be 
offset  by  an  increased  wear  of  type. 

31.  That  impression  is  best  for  preventing 
wear  of  type  which  is  confijied  to  its  sur- 
face and  never  laps  over  its  edges.  But  this 
perfect  surface  impression  is  possible  only 
on  a  large  form  with  new  type,  sound  hard 
packing,  and  ample  time  for  making-ready. 
If  types  are  worn,  the  indentation  of  paper 
by  impression  cannot  be  entirely  prevented. 

32.  Good  presswork  does  not  depend 
entirely  upon  the  press — nor  on  the  work- 
man, nor  the  materials.  Nor  will  supe- 
riority in  any  one  point  compensate  for 
deficiency  in  another;  new  type  vrill  suffer 
from  a  poor  roller,  and  careful  making-ready 
is  thrown  away  if  poor  ink  be  used.  It  is 
necessary  that  all  materials  should  be  good  ; 
that  they  should  be  adapted  to  each  other, 
and  fitly  used.  A  good  workman  can  do 
much  with  poor  materials,  but  a  neglect  to 
comply  with  one  condition  often  produces 
as  bad  a  result  as  the  neglect  of  all. 


E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


PATENT  TABLE  CARD  PRESS. 

WITH  OR  WITHOUT  NUMBERING  AND  COUPON  ATTACHMENT. 

In  this  press  the  form  is  placed  on  an  inclined  bed,  and  receives  ink  from 
two  roUers,  impression  being  given  by  a  cam  and  regulated  by  platen 
screws.  It  has  adjustable  feed  guides,  a  large  distributing  cylinder,  card 
rack  and  receiver,  and  is  well  adapted  for  long  service.  The  removal  of  a 
bar,  easily  effected,  allows  the  platen  and  guides  to  be  thrown  back, 
uncovering  the  bed  and  rollers. 

An  attachment  is  furnished,  when  ordered,  which,  at  one  operation, 
prints  and  numbers  single  local  tickets  or  coupons  of  two  to  four  tickets, 
depositing  them  in  a  trough  in  consecutive  order.  Speed,  two  thousand 
impressions  per  hour. 


R.  Hoe  &  Co's  Catalogue. 


23 


CAED  PRESS  WITHOUT  NUMBERING  ATTACHMENT. 

Dimensions,  inside  chase  3=|x45  inches. 

Largest  card  printed  4  x4|  inches. 

Smallest  card  printed  1^x2^  inches. 

Price  $80.00  |   Table,  extra  $10.00 


NUMBERING  CARD  PRESS  WITH  TABLE. 

(As  shown  on  page  22.) 

Dimensions,  inside  chase   4jx5f  inches. 

Largest  card  printed   4|  x  5|  inches. 

Smallest  card  printed   I;jx24  inches. 

Numbering 
wheels. 

Numbering  up  to  Price.  per  set. 

Arranged   for  cards  or  local         C         100,000         $400.00  $60.00 
tickets   (       1,000,000  425.00  80.00 


NUMBERING  CARD  PRESS  WITH  TABLE  AND 
COUPON  ATTACHMENT. 

Dimensions  of  largest  card  printed  .  .  .  .  4J  x  5J  inches. 
Smallest  coupon  printed  If  inches. 

Numbering 

,  wheeLs, 
Numbering  up  to  Price.  per  set. 

Arranged  to  print  either  single     C  10,000         $375.00  $40.00 

cards  or  from   two  to  fom-     i         100,000  455.00  60.00 

coupons   [      1,000,000  535.00  80.00 


ALL  the  above  prices  include  roller  mould,  two  sets  of  roller  stocks,  chase, 

and  boxing  and  carting. 
Driving  pulley,  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  counter-shaft  hangers,  and  two  cone 

pulleys  for  steam  power,  extra,  $25.   Extra  chases,  $1  each. 


# 


24 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


NUMBEEmO  TICKET  PEESS. 


The  construction  of  this  convenient  and 
rapid  little  machine  is  sufficiently  shown 
in  the  cut.  It  is  entirely  self-acting, 
taking  the  cards  from  a  receiver,  print- 
ing and  nimiberiag  in  one  color  up  to 
10,000,  and  depositing,  face  uppermost, 
in  numerical  order,  at  the  rate  of  10,000 
per  hour.  It  prints  only  one  size,  viz., 
1^  X  2i  inches.  The  tickets  pass  in  side- 
ways, not  endways,  and  only  two  are  in 
the  machine  at  once,  so  that  a  trifling 
variation  from  perfect  accuracy  in  size 
causes  no  embarrassment.  It  has  two 
form  rollers,  is  provided  with  ink  fount- 
ain and  arranged  to  run  either  by  hand 
or  steam  power. 


"Weight,  boxed,  625  lbs. 
Price    .    .    .  $700.00 

Delivered  boxed,  or 
set  up  in  running  order 
in  New- York. 


Nxunbering  Ticket  Press. 


SAMPLE  CAEDS, 

Showing  face  and  arrangement  of 
the  numbering  figures. 


CHI  LD'S 

-TICKET. 

d 

0 

s  z 

a. 

I  o 

tr 

J 

<i8 

S  z 

>^ 

a  o 

z" 

00  140 

E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 
» 


25 


DIAMOND  CAED  PRESS. 

This  maekine  is  one  of  the  most  simple,  durable,  convenient,  and  expeditious 
of  card  presses,  and  will  do  the  best  of  work. 

Size  inside  chase  2f  x4f  inches. 

Card  3f  x4J  inches,  and  smaller. 

Price   $80.00 

Above  price  includes  roller  mould,  two  sets  of  stocks,  chase,  and  boxing 
and  carting.    Extra  chases,  slotted  and  finished  with  steel  set  screws,  $3  each. 


WARRANTED  ROLLER  MOULDS. 


Diameter  for  hand  presses,  3J  inches.    Price,  per  inch,  40  cents. 


No. 

Length. 

Price. 

No. 

Length. 

Price. 

1     .     .  . 

.    .    20  inches 

$8.00 

6 

$19.20 

2       .  . 

9.60 

7    .    .  . 

.    .    52  inches 

20.80 

3    ,    .  , 

11.20 

8 

22.40 

4 

13.60 

9 

24.40 

5   .    .  . 

.    .    42  inches 

16.80 

26  E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


WASHINGTON  HAND  PRINTING  PRESS. 

The  celebrity  which,  oiu-  patent  Washington  and  Smith  hand  presses  have 
obtained  during  the  last  forty  years  renders  any  remarks  upon  their  supe- 
riority unnecessary.  They  are  elegant  in  appearance,  simple,  quick,  and 
powerfvd  in  operation,  and  combine  every  facility  for  the  production  of 
superior  printing. 

Dimensions  and  Prices. 


No. 

Bed. 

Platen. 

Price. 

No. 

Bed. 

Platen. 

Price. 

1 

17x21 

in. 

14x18 

in. 

$150.00 

30  X  44  in. 

26  X  40  in. 

$260.00 

2 

20  X  25 

in. 

16x21 

in. 

175.00 

6 

32  X  47  in. 

28  X  43  in. 

275.00 

3 

24x29 

in. 

20  X  25 

in. 

200.00 

7 

35  X  51  in. 

31  X  47  in. 

300.00 

4 

26  X  34 

in. 

22  X  30 

in. 

225.00 

8 

38  X  55  in. 

34  X  51  in. 

350.00 

4J 

27x39 

in. 

23  X  35 

in. 

240.00 

9 

41  X  60  in. 

37  X  56  in. 

400.00 

5 

29X42 

in. 

25x38 

in. 

250.00 

Price  includes  two  pairs  of  points,  one  screw  wrench  and  brayer,  one  wood 
roller,  one  slice,  one  ink  block,  one  extra  frisket,  and  boxing  and  cartage. 
Extra  for  making  frame  in  pieces  and  boxing  in  small  boxes,  $15  to  $25. 

Per  pair. 

Points  with  springs  .  .  40  cents.  Extra  for  (constructing  bed 
Points  without  springs   .    25  cents.  to   run   on   rollers,  from 

Tympan  bolt  and  nut     .    40  cents.  No.  4  up  $40.00 

For  prices  of  roller  moidds,  see  page  58 ;  and  of  chases,  see  page  42. 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


27 


STANSBURY  PRESS. 


Bed  . 

Platen 


,  16x20  inches. 
.    13  X  17  inches. 


Price,  $125: 


Price  includes  impression 
pin,  screw  wrench,  pair  spring 
points,  and.  boxing  and  cart- 
ing. 

Roller  mould,  extra,  22 
inches,  $8.80.   Chases,  extra. 


Stansbury  Press. 


HAND  LEVER  PRESS. 

No  Bed.  Platen.  Price. 

1  10X13  in.        7x10  in.  $75.00 

2  14x17  in.       10x14  in.  90.00 

3  14  X 17  in.  .    .  110.00 

The  No.  3  is  extra  heavy,  for  cutting 
gloves  or  printing  cigar -box  covers. 

Prices  include  impression  pin  and 
boxing. 

Roller  mould,  extra.  For  No.  1, 
fifteen  inches,  $6;  for  No.  2,  eighteen 
inches,  $7.20.    Chases,  extra. 


Hand  Lever  Press. 


28 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


HINTS  TO 

See  that  the  machine  ofifered  for  sale, 
whether  new  or  second-hand,  is  strong  and 
well  made.  Consider  the  standing  of  the 
maker,  both  as  mechanician  and  machinist. 
A  light-framed  or  shackly-fitted  machine 
will  be  dear  at  any  price.  Do  not  be 
deceived  by  any  beauty  of  paint  or  finish 
on  exposed  work,  which  adds  nothing  to 
the  usefulness  of  the  machine,  and  which 
may  draw  the  eye  from  an  examination  of 
the  working  parts.  Uncover  the  boxes, 
and  see  whether  the  finish  of  shafts  in  their 
bearings,  and  of  journals,  is  as  smooth  and 
true  as  the  white  and  brass  work  of  more 
exposed  pieces.  Take  out,  here  and  there, 
screws  and  bolts ;  see  if  the  threads  are 
deep,  sharp,  and  clean-fitting.  Look  closely 
at  the  fitting  of  all  toothed  or  pinion  wheels ; 
note  whether  they  have  been  cast  and  filled 
to  fit,  or  whether  they  have  been  accu- 


BUYERS. 

rately  cut  by  automatic  machinery,  so  that 
they  will  fit  in  any  position.  Slowly  turn 
pinion  wheels,  and  note  whether  there 
is  any  rattling  or  lost  motion,  or  whether 
the  teeth  fit  snugly,  yet  freely,  so  as  to 
give  oven,  steady  motion.  Closely  examine 
all  castings  for  pinholes  or  air  bubbles, 
which  may  be  most  easily  detected  in 
work  that  has  been  planed.  See  that  east- 
ings are  heavy  as  well  as  solid.  Look 
after  oil  holes  and  provision  for  oiling. 
See  that  castings  are  neatly  fitted ;  that 
they  do  not  show  the  marks  of  the  ham- 
mer or  file,  which  must  be  used  to  connect 
them  if  they  have  been  forced  or  badly 
put  together.  Pay  attention  to  the  noise 
made  by  the  machine  when  in  motion ; 
if  fairly  fitted,  the  noise  will  be  imiform; 
if  badly  fitted,  it  will  be  variable  or 
grating. 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


29 


ABOUT  CHOICE  OF  INK. 


Ink  should  always  be  selected  to  suit  the 
paper  it  wiU  be  used  upon :  for  cheap  paper, 
cheap  ink;  for  fine  paper,  fine  ink.  At 
least  three  qualities — book,  news,  and  fine 
job — should  always  be  kept  in  stock  by  a 
printer  who  does  miscellaneous  work. 
Other  qualities  will  often  be  needed.  The 
speed  of  a  press  will  be  largely  controlled 
by  the  ink.  If  it  is  oily  or  gritty,  if  -  it 
dries  on  rollers,  or  sets-off,  or  does  not 
dry  quickly,  or  does  not  keep  its  color  on 
paper,  it  will  seriously  hinder  the  press- 


man. As  the  finest  black  inks  are  usually 
of  stiff  body,  and  distribute  with  difficulty, 
they  can  be  used  to  advantage  only  on 
presses  that  have  ample  provision  for  dis- 
tribution. When  ink  of  this  nature  is  pro- 
vided for  paper  of  soft  stock,  the  speed  of 
the  press  must  be  reduced,  to  prevent  the 
ink  from  tearing  the  paper  when  the  paper 
leaves  the  form  after  impression.  Ink 
tables  need  frequent  cleaning,  and  the  ink 
fountain  should  always  be  covered,  to  keep 
out  the  dust  and  floating  particles  of  paper. 


30 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


PATENT  PAPER  WETTING  MACHINE. 


The  bundle  of  paper  is  placed  on  the  bank,  and  fed  in  quires,  either  open 
or  folded,  to  guides  on  the  feed  table.  At  the  proper  time  the  table 
advances  and  enters  the  paper  between  two  cylinders  covered  with  felt, 
the  lower  one  of  which  runs  in  a  trough  of  water.  As  the  paper  issues 
from  these  cylinders,  it  passes  between  a  top  and  bottom  sprinkler,  by 
which  additional  water  can  be  put  on,  and  the  quantity  can  be  regulated 
at  pleasure.  The  paper  is  then  conveyed  by  cords  to  a  sheet  flyer,  which 
lays  it  on  a  table  suspended  on  springs.  These  springs  are  readily  adjiisted 
to  suit  the  weight  of  the  paper,  so  that  the  table  falls  as  the  weight 
increases,  and  thus  keeps  the  top  of  the  pile  always  at  the  same  height. 


Dimensions  and  Prices. 

No.  1  win  wet  paper  24x36  inches   $550.00 

No.  2  wiU  wet  paper  32  x  48  inches   600.00 

No.  3  wiU  wet  paper  40  x  60  inches   650.00 

The  price  includes  counter-shaft,  hangers,  and  pulleys. 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


31 


PATENT  LITHOGRAPHIC  POWER  PRESS. 

The  macliine,  in  style  and  operation,  resembles  our  stop-cylinder  wood-cut 
press. 

The  stone  is  placed  in  the  travelling  bed,  on  a  plate  which  is  adjustable 
vertically  to  suit  the  varying  and  uneven  thickness  of  the  stones,  and  these 
can  also  be  moved  laterally  l)y  set  screws,  without  altering  their  height. 

The  impression  cylinder  gears  into  a  rack  on  the  side  of  the  bed,  and 
is  never  altered  in  height,  the  stone  being  set  instead.  There  is  no  danger 
of  the  stones  getting  broken,  or  scratched,  the  cylinder  having  rubber 
cushions  to  compensate  for  any  unevenness  in  their  surface,  and  the  points 
of  the  fingers  lying  in  a  recess  out  of  reach. 

The  patent  cylinder  clamp  causes  the  impression  cylinder  to  stop  without 
jar  and  stand  without  tremor. 

By  means  of  a  brake  to  be  worked  by  the  foot,  the  machine  can  be 
stopped  immediately. 

By  an  improved  arrangement,  the  form  rollers  have  bearings  adjustable 
by  set  screws,  so  as  to  give  the  desired  pressure,  and  are  driven  by  contact 
with  the  distributing  roUers,  which  are  geared  into  the  side  rack  of  the 
bed.  This  mode  of  driving  prevents  any  wiping  of  the  ink  upon  the  stone, 
and  gives  a  perfect  distribution  of  ink. 

The  damping  apparatus  is  self-acting,  the  water  being  supplied  from  a 
reservoir  to  the  wetting  roUers  like  ink  from  a  fountain,  and  these  roUers 
are  also  driven  in  the  same  way  as  the  form  roUers.  This  damping  appa- 
ratus has  the  great  advantage  that  the  quantity  of  water  can  be  regulated 
while  the  press  is  working,  which  gives  the  pressman  the  greatest  facUity 
for  damping  the  stone  properly. 

The  feed-board  is  furnished  with  adjustable  guides  and  an  improved 
pointing  apparatus,  aud  the  register  obtained  is  perfect. 

A  special  feature  of  this  machine  is  the  patent  delivery  cylinder,  which 
takes  the  sheets  from  the  impression  cylinder  and  transfers  them  to  the 
self-acting  sheet  flyer  with  perfect  certainty. 

Each  machine  is  arranged  to  run  the  bed  once,  twice,  or  three  times  to 
each  impression,  as  may  be  desired;  thus  giving  a  distribution  propor- 
tionate to  the  quality  of  the  work.  It  will  also  roU  any  number  of  times 
without  an  impression  while  "inking  up,"  to  avoid  running  through  waste 
sheets.  Each  machine  is  furnished  with  two  sets  of  roUers — one  for  black 
and  one  for  colored  work. 


32 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


Lithographic  Poiver  Presses,  continued.    Sizes  and  Prices. 


Size 
of  stone. 


1  21  X  26  in. 

2  24  X  32  in. 

3  28  X  40  in. 


Eollcrs 
Size  covering 
of  design.     form.  Price. 

19  X  24  in.  4  $4,300 
22  X  30  in.  6  4,900 
26  X  38  in.    6  5,600 


Size 
No.       of  stone. 

4  32  X  46  in. 

5  36  X  52  in. 


Size 
of  design. 


Rollers 
covering 
form.  Price. 


30  X  44  in.  6  $6,400 
34  X  50  in.    6  7,200 


The  prices  inclnde  boxing  and  shipping,  or  putting  up  in  New- York; 
also,  apparatus  to  roll  twice,  two  sets  of  rollers,  counter-shaft,  hangers, 
driving  pulley,  and  two  cone  pulleys,  go  with  each  machine. 


Dimensions,  Weight,  Speed,  and  Power. 


Over  all. 

Weight  boxed, 

incluiUng 
steam  fixtures. 

Speed. 

X  ^ 
u  > 

6 

Length. 

Width. 

Height. 

»i 

1 

13  ft. 

5  in. 

7  ft.   2  in. 

5  ft. 

5  in. 

About  5  tons. 

611  to  1100 

2 

15  ft. 

7  ft.   7  in. 

6  ft. 

About  7J  tons. 

562  to  1000 

t 

3 

16  ft. 

9  ft.  10  in. 

7  ft. 

About  9^  tons. 

506  to  900 

a 

4 

^ 

16  ft. 

5  in. 

10  ft. 

7  ft. 

About  10  tons. 

506  to  900 

4 

18  ft. 

10  ft.   6  in. 

7  ft. 

8  in. 

About  12J  tons. 

512  to  1800 

1 

PRICES  OF  MOLLETON  CLOTH,  ETC. 

Best  quality  molleton  for  lithographers'  rollers,  30  inches  wide    .    .  $1.50 

Best  quality  molleton  for  Lithographers'  roUers,  60  inches  wide    .    .  2.25 

Mole-skin,  29  inches  wide   1.25 

Thick  flannel,  30  inches  wide   4.00 

Thick  flannel,  60  inches  wide   7,25 


LITHOaRAPHERS'  AXIOMS. 


To  get  high  speed,  use  soft  and  easily 
distributed  ink. 

To  get  fine,  sharp  lines,  and  clean  tints, 
use  stiff  or  strong  ink,  necessarily  at  some 
sacrifice  of  speed. 

A  strong  ink  does  not  require  a  full 
dampening  of  the  stone. 

A  soft  or  weak  ink  permits  a  free  damp- 
ening of  the  stone. 

Slow  and  heavy  rolling  tends  to  deposit 
ink  on  the  stone. 

Quick  and  light  rolling  tends  to  take  off 
the  stone  the  ink  already  on. 

The  finest  prints  are  taken  from  soft 
and  calendered  paper. 


Hand-made  or  laid  dry  writing  papers  are 
not  suitable  for  lithographic  work. 

Soft  paper  absorbs  water  and  ink;  hard 
paper  resists  both. 

Never  touch  the  face  of  a  stone  with  a 
warm  or  sweating  finger. 

Keep  the  machine  clean,  not  on  outside 
only,  but  in  all  its  working  parts. 

See  that  rust  does  not  form  on  iron 
work  exposed  to  moisture. 

See  that  every  working  part  is  fairly 
supplied  with  oil. 

Constantly  wipe  up  all  overrunning  oil. 

Sperm  oil  is  the  best  lubricator.  If,  after 
a  while,  it  gums,  add  a  little  para£&ne. 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


33 


HAJSTD  LITHOGRAPHIC  PRESS. 

It  is  made  of  the  best  materials,  is  strong,  simple,  convenient,  and  works 
with  great  ease.  The  roller  imder  the  bed  is  geared  in  presses  of  large 
size,  but  is  so  aiTanged  that  it  may  be  used  with  or  without  the  gearing. 
The  bed  is  made  sufficiently  long  always  to  cover  the  roller,  thus  protecting 
it  from  dirt  or  grease  from  the  scraper,  and  at  the  same  time  giving  it  a 
more  even  movement.  The  toggles  are  adjustable  so  as  to  vary  the  eleva- 
tion of  the  bed  from  one-eighth  inch  to  five-eighths  inch,  as  may  be  desired, 
thus  permitting  the  use  of  any  kind  of  pointing  apparatus. 


Dimensions  and  Prices. 


No. 
1 

2 
3 


Size  of  stone. 

21  X  26  in. 
24  X  32  in. 
28  X  40  in. 


Size  ot  desifni. 

19  X  24  in. 
22  X  30  in. 
26  X  38  in. 


Price. 

$175.00 
215.00 
280.00 


No.  Size  nf  stone. 

4  32  X  46  in. 

5  36  X  52  in. 

6  40  X  60  in. 


Size  of  design. 

30  X  44  in. 
34  X  50  in. 
38  X  58  in. 


Price. 

$335.00 
400.00 
485.00 


A  deduction  is  made  for  the  tympan  and  frame,  when  not  required. 
4 


34 


E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


aEAEED  COPPER-PLATE  PRESS. 

This  is  a  heavy  and  powerful  machine,  capable  of  printing  the  largest 
plates.  The  frame  is  strengthened  by  internal  wrought-iron  tension  rods. 
The  gearing  is  double,  and  the  bed  is  guided  by  side  anti-friction  rollers.. 
It  may  be  worked  by  hand  or  run  by  steam  power. 


Bed 


Dimensions  and  Prices. 
34  X  60  inches.    |   Price  . 


$675.00 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


35 


lEON  COPPEE-PLATE  PRESS. 

The  side-frames,  cylinders,  and  bed  are  made  of  cast-iron;  the  cylinders 
are  turned  and  the  bed  planed  perfectly  true.  The  shafts  through  the 
cylinders,  the  braces,  arms,  and  screws  are  of  wrought  iron ;  the  bearings 
of  composition. 

Every  material  connected  with  copper-plate  printing  supplied. 


Dimensions  and  Prices. 


Width  of  bed. 

Price. 

Width  of  bed. 

Price. 

.    .    .    .  $175.00 

.    .    .    .  $300.00 

.    .    .    .  200.00 

26  inches    .    .  . 

.    .    .    .  325.00 

.    .    .    .  225.00 

28  inches    .    .  . 

.    .    .    .  350.00 

.    .    .    .  250.00 

.    .    .    .  375.00 

.    .    .    .  275.00 

36 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Price  List. 


Blaek- Walnut  Cabinet. 


PATENT  NEWSPAPER  ADDRESSINa  MACHINE. 

This  machine  prints  witli  ink  on  paper  or  wrappers  at  the  rate,  including 
all  necessary  stoppages,  of  about  fifteen  hundred  per  hour.  It  may  he  run  at 
a  much  higher  speed  without  injury. 

Price,  with  black-walnut  cabinet,  and  four  patent  lined  galleys,  boxed,  $80. 

Price,  with  cast-iron  frame  and  black-walnut  top,  and  four  patent  lined 
galleys,  boxed,  $65. 

ADDRESSING  MACHINE  GALLEYS. 

Size  iiislde.  Each.  ' 

1^  X  30  inches,  patent  lined,  with  brass  bottom,  $1.50 
X  30  inches,  unlined,  with  brass  bottom  .  .  .75 
X  30  inches,  unlined,  with  zinc  bottom  .    .    .  .60 

Mailing  type,  with  abbreviations,  per  lb.,  40  cents. 

Bell  reglets,  per  hundred,  50  cents. 

Directions  for  Working.  Classify  the  addresses  by  putting  all  that 
take  two  lines  in  galleys  by  themselves,  as  also  those  of  three  and  four  lines. 
If  it  should  be  required  to  have  a  two-line  address  in  a  three-line  gaUey,  put 
in  an  extra  reglet,  so  that  it  shall  occupy  the  same  space  as  the  three-Une 
address.  In  each  set  of  galleys  the  addresses  should  follow  in  the  geographical 
order  of  the  States,  thus :  Maine,  New  Hampshire,  Vermont^  Massachusetts,  etc.; 


E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Peice  List.  37 

or,  if  preferred,  in  alphabetical  order.  In  each  State,  post-office  addresses 
should  follow  in  alphabetical  order,  and  in  each  post-of&ce  district  the  sub- 
scribers' names  should  be  alphabetically  arranged.  Number  the  gaUeys  from 
one  upward  in  the  above  grder,  leaving  space  in  each  for  future  additions; 
take  proofs  from  aU  the  gaUeys  and  paste  them  in  numerical  order  in  a  mail- 
book,  so  that  any  address  can  be  quickly  found  or  alterations  made. 

As  it  is  desirable  that  the  addresses  should  be  conspicuous,"  the  machine 
and  gaUeys  are  arranged  to  take  in  addresses  of  fi*om  two  to  four  lines  each  of 
pica  type,  with  a  pica  space  reglet  between  each  address,  though  any  tjrpe, 
from  brevier  to  pica,  may  be  used. 

In  flUing  the  galleys,  bring  the  first  line  of  each  address  up  to  the  side  of 
the  galley,  as  it  is  by  this  the  feeding  pawl  pushes  the  galley  along  when 
printing.    In  arranging  the  addresses  in  the  gaUeys,  commence  with  a  post- 


Cast-Iron  Frame. 


office  address  and  put  a  pica  beU  reglet  between  it  and  the  next  address,  and  a 
pica  space  reglet  between  each  of  the  foUowing  addresses  untU  the  next  post- 
office  is  reached,  and  so  on. 

When  filling  gaUeys  with  addresses,  each  complete  within  itself,  thus: 

B.  Hoe  <&  Co. 

Tudor  Street, 

London,  Eng. 

it  is  not  necessary  to  put  in  beU  reglets  to  indicate  the  change  of  post-oflfice. 


38 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Price  List. 


The  space  and  bell  reglets  should  be  of  wood,  as  it  is  desirable  to  have  the 
galleys  as  light  as  possible,  so  that  they  will  move  along  easily  when  printing. 
Lock  them  up  as  tight  as  they  will  bear  without  springing,  and  handle  them 
carefully  when  filled,  so  as  not  to  bend  them. 

When  the  galleys  are  properly  filled  and  ready  to  print  from,  apply  the  ink 
and  enter  a  galley  foot  foremost  into  the  groove  of  the  left-hand  end  of  the 
machine,  and  push  it  forward  by  the  treadle  until  an  address  comes  under  the 
opening  between  the  shields.  Adjust  the  bolt  in  the  slot  of  the  hammer  arm 
so  that  the  sliding  pawl  will  just  bring  forward  another  address  at  each  stroke 
of  the  treadle.  Set  the  sliding  shield  so  as  to  leave  only  the  address  exposed, 
turn  down  the  hammer  face  that  corresponds  to  the  width  of  the  address,  and 
print  aU  the  galleys  of  that  set,  if  convenient,  before  changing  to  another  set. 

When  five  or  more  papers  are  sent  to  the  same  post-office,  they  are  usually 
put  in  wrappers,  containing  from  five  to  fifteen  each.  In  printing  these,  the 
machine  begins  at  the  foot  of  the  galley,  and  the  addresses  are  successively 
printed  on  the  papers  until  the  projecting  nib  on  the  bell  reglets,  which  extends 
over  the  opposite  side  of  the  gaUey,  strikes  the  beU  lever  in  passing  it  and 
rings  the  beU,  which  indicates  that  the  neit  is  the  post-office  address  of  this 
list.  This  may  be  printed  on  a  wrapper  sufficiently  large  to  inclose  from  five 
to  fifteen  papers,  or  it  may  be  printed  on  a  small  piece  of  paper  that  is  laid 


away  with  the  papers  to  des- 
ignate them.  A  good  plan 
is  to  print  these  address- 
es in  advance  on  narrow 
slips,  that  are  afterward  put 
around  each  paper,  and  to 
lay  these  slips  away  inside 
of  their  respective  print- 
ed wrappers  until  required. 
In  this  way,  all  the  print- 
ing can  be  done  in  advance 
of  the  day  of  publication. 
All  addresses  should  consist 
of  at  least  two  lines,  thus : 


B.  Hoe  &  Co. 


Chicago,  III. 


even  those  that  are  put  up  in 
packages;  then,  if  a  package 
should  accidentally  be  bro- 
ken open,  the  papers  would 
still  reach  their  destination. 


NEWSPAPER  PROOF  PRESS. 


This  machine  has  a  strong  cast-iron  frame.    A  roller  brayer  is  sent  with  each. 
Size  of  bed,  9|  x  39  inches.    Price,  $60.    Boxing  and  shipping,  $3.50. 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Pkice  List. 


39 


Iron  bed  and  roller,  without  stand. 


No. 

Size  in  inches. 

Price. 

1  . 

.  9x27 

$20.00 

2  . 

.    12  X  27 

25.00 

3  . 

.    16  X  30 

30.00 

4  . 

.    20  X  36 

45.00 

5  . 

.    30  X  62 

65.00 

Boxing 

and 
shipping. 

$1.00 
1.50 
2.00 
2.50 
4.00 


The  price  with  stand  includes 
roUer  brayer. 

All  our  proof  presses  are  of 
right  height  to  prove  matter  in 
galleys. 

Complete,  with  hard  wood  stand. 


JOB  PROOF  PRESS. 


Boxing 

and 
shipping. 

No. 

Size  in  inches. 

Price. 

1  . 

.  9x27 

$28.00 

$2.50 

2  . 

.  12x27 

33.00 

3.00 

3  . 

.  16x30 

40.00 

3.50 

4  . 

.    20  X  36 

55.00 

4.00 

5  . 

.  30x62 

80.00 

6.00 

PLAIN  FRAME  IMPOSING  TABLES,  WITH 
AMERICAN  MARBLE  TOPS. 

Very  substantial,  with  square  legs  and  short  drawers. 

Single.  Double. 


No.  Size  in  Inches.  Price.  No.  Size  in  inches.  Price. 

1   17x21  $15.00  1    17  X  42  $27.00 

2    20X*25  19.00  2    20  x  50  30.00 

3    24  x  29  23.00  3    24  x  58  36.00 

4    26x34  28.00  4    26  x  68  47.00 

5    29x42  35.00  5    29  x  84  60.00 

6    32  x  47  42.00  6    32  x  94  77.00 

7    35x51  49.00  7    35  x  102  91.00 


All  our  imposing  tables  can  be  taken  to  pieces,  for  convenience  in  packing 

and  shipping. 
The  prices  include  boxing  and  shipping. 


40 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Peige  List. 


lEON  AND  ITALIAN  MARBLE  IMPOSINa  TABLES. 

The  frames  are  of  hard  wood,  with  neatly  turned  legs,  and  in  every 
respect  made  in  the  best  manner.  The  top  is  either  ItaUan  marble,  as 
shown  in  the  above  cut,  or  iron  with  rabbeted  edge,  like  the  patent  top 
shown  on  next  page,  as  may  be  ordered. 


Single. 

No. 

Size  in  inches. 

Price. 

No. 

1 

.    .    .    .  17x21 

$22.00 

1 

2 

.    .    .    .  20x25 

26.00 

2 

3 

.    .    .    .  24x29 

30.00 

3 

4 

.    .    .    .  26x34 

35.00 

4 

5 

.    .    .    .  29x42 

42.00 

5 

6 

.    .    .    .  32x47 

49.00 

6 

7    .  . 

.    .    .    .  35x51 

56.00 

7 

Double. 

Size  in  inches. 

.    .  17  X  42 

X 


20 
24 
26 
29 
32 
35 


50 
58 
68 
84 
94 
X102 


Price. 

$34.00 
37.00 
43.00 
54.00 
67.00 
84.00 
98.00 


WETTING  BOAEDS. 

Inches.        Common.  Iron  bound. 

I^emy  17X22  $1.00  Improved  double  thickness  .  $2.00 

Medium  19x24  1.10  Improved  double  thickness  .  2.20 

^ojal                       23  X  27  1.25  Improved  double  thickness  .  2.50 

Super  Royal  .    .    .    24x30  1.40  Improved  double  thickness  •  .  2.80 

Imperial                    27x36  1.60  Improved  double  thickness  .  3.20 

Double  Medium  .    .    28x40  1.75  Improved  double  thickness  .  3.50 

Tint  boards  of  the  best  seasoned  soft  pine,  and  manufactured  expressly  for 
the  trade,  27^  x  39 J  inches,  each,  $1.60. 


IRON  IMPOSING  TABLES,  WITH  LETTER  BOARDS. 

(Patented  February  22,  1876.) 

This  patent  iron  imposing  table  has  its  edges  rabbeted  all  around,  as  showii 
in  cut,  forming  a  convenient  rest  for  the  gaUey  in  emptying.  The  frame  is 
of  hard  wood,  very  heavy  and  substantial,  and  the  boards,  of  similar  material, 
are  strongly  battened  so  as  to  support  any  form  of  type.  The  price  includes 
boxing  and  eight  letter  boards. 


Size  of  bed, 

Size  of  boards, 

No. 

No. 

inclies. 

inclies. 

Price. 

1     .  . 

.  17x21 

14x15 

$40.00 

5 

2    .  . 

.    20  X  25 

17x19 

45.00 

6 

3    .  . 

.  24x29 

21x22 

50.00 

7 

4    .  . 

.    26  X  34 

23x27 

60.00 

Size  of  bed,  Size  of  boards, 
inches.  inches. 


29x42 
32x47 
35x51 


Price. 

26  x  36  $80.00 
29x41  100.00 
32  X  45  125.00 


Prices  of  letter  boards,  with  two 
battens  on  bottoms. 


Inches.  Pine.  Cherry. 

17x22  $  .80  $1.00 

19  X  24  .90  1.10 

23  X  27  1.10  1.30 

24  X  30  1.40  1.60 
27  X  36  1.65  2.15 

Double  Medium  28x40  1.75  2.25 


Demy    .  . 
Medium 
Royal    .  . 
Super  Royal 
Imperial 


Prices  of  letter  boards,  with  two 
battens  and  end  clamps. 


Inches.  Pine.  Cherry. 

17x22  $1.10  $1.20 

19  X  24  1.20  1.40 

23  X  27  1.35  1.65 

24  X  30  1.75  2.10 
27  X  36  2.00  2.35 

Double  Medium  28x40  2.25  2.60 


Demy    .  . 
Medium 
Royal    .  . 
Super  Royal 
Imperial 


42  •  E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Peice  List. 

WEOUGHT-IRON  CHASES. 
These  are  made  of  the  best  iron  and  are  warranted  square  and  true. 


PAIR  OF  HALF  CHASES. 


PAIR  OF  HALF  CHASES  WITH  BARS. 


No. 

Pair,  overall, 
inches. 

Size  each  inside, 
inches. 

Price 
per  pair. 

No. 

Pair,  oTer  all, 
inches. 

Size  each  inside, 
inches. 

Price 
per  pair. 

1  . 

.    17  X  21 

15  X  83 

$10.00 

1  . 

.    17  X  21 

15  X  8| 

$13.50 

2  . 

.    20  X  25 

18  xlOa 

11.00 

2  . 

.   20  X  25 

18  xlO^ 

14.50 

3  . 

.  24x29 

22  xl2| 

12.00 

3  . 

.   24  X  29 

22  xl2f 

15.50 

4  . 

.    26  X  34 

23f  X  15 

13.00 

4  . 

.  26x34 

233  X 15 

16.50 

5  . 

.  29x42 

26J  X ISl 

14,00 

5  . 

.    29  X  42 

26J  X 18J 

17.50 

6  . 

.    32  X  47 

29 J  X  211 

15.50 

6  . 

.  32x47 

29i  X  21f 

19.00 

7  . 

.  35X51 

32  x23 

17.00 

7  . 

.  35X51 

32  X23 

20.50 

8  . 

.  38X55 

35  X25 

18.50 

8  . 

.  38x55 

35  X25 

22.00 

9  . 

.  41x60 

38  x27^ 

20.00 

9  . 

.  41x60 

38  X27J 

23.50 

BOOK  OR  SHEFTING-BAE  CHASE. 


SKELETON  CHASE. 


Size  over  all, 
inches. 

Size  inside, 
inches. 

Price 
each. 

No. 

Size  over  all, 
inches. 

Size  inside, 
inches. 

Price 
each. 

1  . 

.  17x21 

15  xl9 

$8.00 

1  . 

.    17  X  21 

15  xl9 

$5.00 

2  . 

.  20x25 

18  X23 

8.50 

2  . 

.  20x25 

18  x23 

5.50 

3  . 

.  24x29 

22  x27 

9.00 

3  . 

.  24x29 

22  x27 

6.00 

4  . 

.  26x34 

233  X  311 

9.50 

4  . 

.   26  X  34 

23| X  31f 

6.50 

5  . 

.  29x42 

264  X  39 J 

10.00 

5  . 

.   29  X  42 

26 J  X  39J 

7.50 

6  . 

.  32x47 

29^  X  44 J 

11.00 

6  . 

.  32x47 

29^  X  44 J 

8.00 

7  . 

.    35  X  51 

32  x48 

12.00 

7  . 

.  35x51 

32  X48 

9.00 

8  . 

.  38X55 

35  X52 

13.00 

8  . 

.  38X55 

35  X52 

10.00 

9  . 

.  41X60 

38  X57 

14.00 

9  . 

.  41x60 

38  X57 

11.00 

E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Peice  List. 


43 


The  regular  chases,  from  No.  1  to 
3,  are  made  of  1  x  |  in.  iron ;  from 
No.  4  to  6,  of  1 J  X  I  in.  iron ;  and 
from  No.  7  to  9,  of  x  f  in.  iron.  If 
unusual  strength  is  required,  there 
will  be  an  additional  charge. 


NEWS  CHASE. 


No. 

Size  over  all, 
inches. 

Size  inside, 
inches. 

Price 
each. 

1  . 

.    17  X  21 

15  xl9 

.  $5.00 

2  . 

.    20  X  25 

18  x23 

6.00 

3  . 

.    24  X  29 

22  x27 

7.00 

4  . 

.    26  X  34 

233  X  31f 

8.00 

5  . 

.  29x42 

26J  X  39J 

9.00 

6  . 

.    32  X  47 

29JX44J 

10.00 

7  . 

.    35  X  51 

32  X48 

11.00 

8  . 

.    38  X  55 

35  X52 

12.00 

9  . 

.    41  X  60 

38  x57 

13.00 

mON  SroE  AND  FOOT  STICKS. 

Iron  side  and  foot  sticks,  5  cents 
per  inch  in  length.  They  are  made, 
unless  otherwise  ordered,  IJ  inch 
shorter  than  the  inside  measurement 
of  the  chase  with  which  they  are  to 
go.   

CAST-mON  FOEM  TEUCK. 

Cast-iron  form  truck,  $3.00. 

CAST-IRON  CHASES. 


size 
inside. 

Price 
each. 

Size 
inside. 

Price 
each. 

Size 
inside. 

Price 
each. 

Size 
inside. 

Price 
each. 

Size 
inside. 

Price 
each. 

Size 
inside. 

Price 
each. 

4x  5i 

^  .28 

6x12 

$  .55 

8x32  $  .80 

10x18  i 

f  .80 

12x24  $  .90 

16x20  $1.15 

4x24 

.70 

6x20 

.70 

8x40 

1.30 

10x22 

.85 

12x30 

.95 

16x28 

1.15 

5x  7 

.40 

6x24 

.70 

9X12 

.70 

10x28 

.90 

13x28 

.95 

17x22 

1.15 

5x16 

.55 

6x30 

.75 

9x18 

.80 

10x31 

.95 

14x22 

.90 

18x24 

1.15 

5X28 

.75 

7x16 

.70 

9x25 

.90 

12x14 

.75 

14x26 

.95 

20x25 

1.20 

6X43 

1.25 

7x27 

.75 

9x31 

1.00 

12x17 

.85 

15x20 

1.00 

24x28 

1.25 

6x  8 

.40 

8x21 

.70 

10X14 

.75 

12x20 

.90 

15x24 

1.10 

24x30 

1.30 

GALLEY  CABINET.    (FULL  SIZE.) 


44 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Price  List. 


The  full-size  cabinet,  made  as  shown  in  cut,  will  hold  198  single-column 
galleys,  which  may  be  kept  in  order  by  niunbering  each  rack  to  correspond 
with  proof  slip.    Each  galley  must  be  locked  up  before  putting  in  place. 

Boxing 
ami 

Cherry.         Pine.  shipi)iDg. 

Nine  columns  wide,  holding  198  single-column  galleys  $100.00  $90.00  $4.00 
Sis  columns  wide,  holding  132  single-column  galleys  .  72.00  62.00  3.00 
Three  columns  wide,  holding  66  single-column  galleys  .   40.00     30.00  2.00 


CABINET  WITH  "SORT"  DRAWERS  AND  GALLEY  TOP. 


Made  entirely  of  hard  wood  or  pine.  The  drawers  are  divided  into  three 
compartments,  each  holding  25  lbs.  The  top  is  arranged  for  single  galleys, 
unless  otherwise  ordered. 


Price,  with 

Arranged  in 

Pine. 

Cherry. 

Boxing 
and  shipping. 

10  drawers  . 

.    .    2  tiers  . 

.    .  $25.00  . 

.    .  $30.00  . 

.    .  $1.00 

15  " 

.    .  3 

a 

.    .   40.00  . 

.    .   45.00  . 

.    .  1.50 

20  " 

.    .  4 

u 

.    .    50.00  . 

.    .    55.00  . 

.    .  2.00 

25  " 

.    .  5 

u 

.   .    70.00  . 

.    .    75.00  . 

.    .  2.50 

30  " 

.    .  6 

u 

.    .    90.00  . 

.    .    95.00  . 

.    .  3.00 

35  « 

.   .  7 

u 

.    .  100.00  . 

.   .  105.00  . 

.    .  4.00 

E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Peice  List. 


45 


'  i  t  1  i  it  t 

i  tit  t 

1  i  i  t  1  t  i 
M  u  1  U 

i   <>  U  U 
i  i  {  t  i(  i 

TYPE  CASES. 

(Patented  May  2,  1871.) 


These  patent  type  cases  are  of  unusual  strength,  owing  to  the  use  of  our 
patent  brass  clasp  and  long  pin,  which,  being  clinched  to  bottom  of  case, 
holds  securely  every  partition.  They  are  made  iu  the  very  best  manner, 
with  hard  wood  frames  and  fillings. 


PAIR 

Per  Pair. 

Full  size,  with  patent  clasps  .  $1.75 
Two-third  size,  patent  clasps  .  1.50 
Rooker,  with  patent  clasps  .  1.75 
German,  with  patent  clasps  .  1.75 
Music,  with  patent  clasps  .  .  3.75 
Greek,  with  patent  clasps  .  .  3.75 
Half  cap,  patent  clasps,  each  .  .60 


Per  Pair. 

Full  size,  without  clasps    .    .  $1.60 

Two-third  size,  without  clasps .  1,40 

Rooker,  without  clasps  .    .    .  1.60 

German,  without  clasps  .    .    .  1.60 

Music,  without  clasps     .    .    .  3.50 

Greek,  without  clasps     .    .    .  3.50 

Half  cap,  without  clasps,  each  .50 


Full  size,  patent  clasps  

Three-fourths,  patent  clasps  .... 
Job  or  Yankee  combination,  two-thirds, 
clasps   


.    .   .  $1.00  .  without  clasps  $  .90 

.  .  .  .90  .  without  clasps  .80 
patent 

.    .    .     .80  .  without  clasps  .75 


Triple,  with  patent  clasps 


1.00    .    without  clasps  .90 


46 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Peice  List. 


RULE  CASE.  SLUG  CASE. 

Rule  case,  with  patent  clasps  .  $1.25      Lead  case  $1.00 

Rule  ease,  without  clasps  .    .    1.15       Slug  case  1.00 

Blank  case  $  .65 


Our  gaUey  patents,  which  have  been  sustained  by  the  Circuit  Court  of  the 
United  States,  give  us  the  sole  right  to  make  galleys  with  linings  attached 
in  such  a  manner  as  to  leave  their  surfaces  unbroken  by  screws  or  other 
fastenings. 

COMMON  PROOF  GALLEY. 

Inches  Inches 
Inside.         Single.  inside.  Double. 

With  wood  rim,  brass  bottom    .    .    .    .  3f  x  23^  $1.25  6J  x  23^  $1.50 

With  linings  screwed  on  and  brass  bottom  3f  x  23J  1.75  6 J  x  23J  2.00 

Extra  single-column   5  x  23J  2.00 

SoUd  east-brass   3|  x  23i  8.00  6J  x  23^  10.00 

AH  wood   3|  X  23J  0.75  6^  x  23^  1.00 


Inches 
Inside. 


Half- 
lined. 


Full, 
lined. 


Single-column 
Extra  single-column 
Amateur  single-col. 
Double-column  . 


3|  X  23i  $1.75  $2.00 
5  x23i  2.00  2.25 
3f  X  12  .75  1.00 
6Jx23i   2.25  2.50 


PATENT  LINED  GALLEY. 

The  rim  is  of  wood,  faced  with  brass,  as  shown  in  section,  thus  making  a 
smooth  surface  for  type  to  rest  against. 


Single-column 
Double-column 


Inches 
inside. 


Price. 

3fx23J  $2.50 
6i  X  23i  3.00 


PATENT  TUBE-REM  GALLEY. 

The  brass  tubular  rim  is  filled  with  wood,  as  shown  in  the  section,  and  the 
corners  are  bent.  The  entire  surface  is  brass,  and  may  be  immersed  in 
water  without  injury,  as  the  wooden  core  is  hermetically  sealed. 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Peice  List, 


47 


Inches 

inside.  Price. 

Single-column    .    .    3Jx23i  $2.75 

Double-column  .   .   6Jx23i  3.25 

ANGLE-EBI  GALLEY. 

All  brass,  with  bent  corners,  and  as  Light  as  either  of  the  above.  For 
strength  and  durability  unsurpassed. 


Inches 

inside.  Price. 

Single-column    .   .   3^x23^  $3.50 

Double-column  .    .    6Jx23i  4.50 


PATENT  LINED  LOCK-UP  GALLEY. 

The  types  are  held  securely  by  a  brass  clamp,  worked  by  a  steel  pinion 

and  ratchet. 


COMMON  ALL- 


Inches  inside.  Full  rims.  Half  rims. 

5  X  15  $  .40  $  .30 

5JX  18  50  .40 

6  X  20   60  .50 

7  X  22   65  .55 

8  X  24   70  .60 


WOOD  GALLEY. 


Inches  inside. 

All  wood. 

With  brass 
slice  and 

pat.  lining. 

Octavo 

6 

X 

10 

$2.00 

$4.00 

Quarto 

8i 

X 

13 

2.25 

4.75 

Medium 

10 

X 

16 

2.50 

5.50 

Royal 

12 

X 

18 

2.75 

6.25 

Sup.  Royal  14 

X 

21 

3.50 

7.00 

Imperial 

15 

X 

22 

4.00 

8.00 

Republican 

18 

X 

25 

4.50 

10.00 

SLICE  GALLEY. 


ADDRESSING  MACHINE  GALLEYS. 

Inches  inside.  Price. 

1^  X  30   .    .    Patent  lined,  with  brass  bottom  $1.50 

1^  X  30    .    .    Unlined,  with  brass  bottom  75 

1^  X  30    .    .    Unlined,  with  zinc  bottom  60 


48 


E,  Hoe  &  Go's  Peice  List. 


MAILING  GALLEYS. 

Closed  at  both  ends,  wide  enough  for  four  or  five  columns  names,  about  $3.50 
Brass  reglets  for  same,  nonpareil  thickness   .35 


JOB  GALLEY,  WITH  BRASS  BOTTOM. 


Inches 
inside. 

Patent 
lined. 

Wood 
rim. 

Inches 
inside. 

Patent 
lined. 

Wood 
rim. 

Octavo 

6 

X  10 

$2.00 

$1.00 

Royal     .  . 

12x18 

$3.50 

$1.75 

Quarto 

8 

|x  13 

2.50 

1.25 

Super  Royal 

14x21 

4.00 

2.00 

Foolscap 

9 

X  14 

2.75 

1.35 

Imperial 

15x22 

4.50 

2.25 

Medium 

10 

X  16 

3.00 

1.50 

Republican 

18x25 

5.00 

2.50 

WOOD  CASE  STANDS. 

No. 

Price. 

1.  . 

2.  . 

4  00 

3.  . 

.    Single  stand,  with  racks  for  eight  cases  and  galley  rest 

4.25 

4.  . 

4,25 

5.  . 

4  50 

6.  . 

.    Double  stand,  with  eight  racks  and  gaUey  rest  

4.75 

7.  . 

.    Double  stand,  with  eight  racks  and  galley  rest  and  racks  . 

6.25 

8.  Double  stand,  with  racks 

for  eight  full  and  eight 
two-third  cases      .    .  5.25 

9.  Double  stand,  with  galley 

rest,  and  racks  for  six- 
teen full  cases  .  .  .  6.25 
.0.  Double  stand,  with  gaUey 
rest  and  gaUey  rack, 
with  racks  for  eight  full 
and  eight  two-third 
cases  8.25 


CASE  RACKS. 

Wronsht 

iron.  Pine. 

Single,  to  hold  10  cases  $10.00  $5.00 
Single,  to  hold  12  cases  11.00  6.00 
Single,  to  hold  16  cases  12.00  7.00 
Single,  to  hold  20  cases  13.00  8.00 
Single,  to  hold  24  cases  14.00  9.00 
Single,  to  hold  30  cases  15.00  10.00 
Double,  to  hold  40  cases  20.00  14.00 
Double,  to  hold  60  cases   24.00  18.00 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Peice  List. 


49 


GALLEY  RACKS. 

WEOUGHT-mON-PIPE  GALLEY  EACK 

With  cast-iron  brackets  and  wrought- 
iron  uprights. 

To  hold  10  gaUeys  .  .  .  $8.00 

To  hold  12  gaUeys  .  .  .  9.00 

To  hold  15  gaUeys  .  .  .  10.00 

To  hold  20  gaUeys  .  .  .  12.00 

WOODEN  GALLEY  EACKS. 


Galley  rack  with  wrought- 
iron-pipe  uprights 
and  iron  arms. 


All 

Wooden 
iipiiKhts 
with  iron 
arms. 

pine. 

To  hold  6  gaUeys 

$2.00 

$3.00 

To  hold  8  gaUeys 

3.00 

4.00 

To  hold  10  gaUeys 

4.00 

5.00 

To  hold  12  gaUeys 

4.50 

6.00 

To  hold  15  gaUeys 

5.00 

7.50 

To  hold  20  gaUeys 

6.00 

10.00 

Iron  arms,  40  cents  per  pair. 


Galley  rack  with 
wooden  upright 
and  iron  arms. 


10. 


11. 


No.  3. 

PATENT  WROUGHT-IRON- 
PIPE  STANDS. 

(Patented  July  16,  1872,  and  Anprust  13,  187.5.) 

5 


Single  stand,  without  racks  $7.00 

Single  stand, with  racks  for 
eight  cases  7.50 

Single  stand,  with  racks  for 
eight  cases  and  gaUey  rest  9.50 

Double  stand, without  racks  10.00 

Double  stand,  with  eight 
racks  (see  cut)  ....  13.50 

Double  stand,  with  eight 
racks  and  gaUey  rest    .  16.75 

Double  stand,  with  eight 
racks,  gaUey  rest  and 
racks  17.00 

Double  stand,  with  racks  for 
eight  fuU  and  eight  two- 
third  cases  18.00 

Double  stand,  with  galley 
rest  and  racks  for  six- 
teen fuU  cases  ....  20.00 

Double  stand,  with  gaUey 
rest  and  gaUey  rack, with 
racks  for  eight  fuU  and 
eight  two-third  cases    .  25.00 

"PoUiemus"  double  stand, 
with  racks  for  sixteen 
fuU-size  cases,  gaUey  rest 
and  standing  gaUey  be- 
hind. The  cases  draw  out 
behind  or  before,  as  de- 
sired  25.00 


No.  9. 


R.  HoE  .&  Go's  Peice  List.  61 


PATENT  WROUGHT-IRON  STANDINa  GALLEY,  WITH 
IRON  RACKS  AND  ALL-BRASS  TOP. 


52 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Peice  List. 


PRICES  OF  WROUaHT-IRON  STANDING  GALLEYS. 


Five 
Columns. 

Six 
Columns. 

Seven 
Columns. 

Eight 
Columns. 

Nine 
Columns. 

Ten 
Columns. 

Jj  1  VtJ  ICtJt  lUllgj  WlLXl  1  dCJvo  LU 

IIUXU.  CXii-LL  U    U  W       tJl  1 1  1,  LI.  OiUXJ. 

Cli'llu  XLU.1.  1o/C*oCO    •        •        •  • 

ifefiO  00 

.<fefi5  00 

$70  00 

$75  00 

$80  00 

$85  00 

ftiY  "fpAf  Inno"   wifTl  Ti5f*KC:  ■f.n 

llUlLt  Clt'llL   LWW'tli-LlLl  dlH-l. 

piclit,  "Fnll  pfl'iip^  RTirl 

fi5  00 

71  00 

77  00 

83.00 

8Q  00 

00 

to  hold  sixteen  fiill  cases 

70.00 

77.00 

84.00 

91.00 

98.00 

105.00 

Eight  feet  long,  with  racks 

to  hold  sixteen  full  cases 

and  gaUey  rack     .    .  . 

75.00 

83.00 

91.00 

99.00 

107.00 

115.00 

Ten  feet  long,  with  racks  to 

hold  twenty-four  full 

80.00 

90.00 

100.00 

110.00 

120.00 

130.00 

Twelve  feet  long,  with  racks 

to  hold  thirty-two  full 

cases   

85.00 

97.00 

109.00 

121.00 

133.00 

145.00 

WOODEN  STANDING  GALLEYS,  WITH  HARD  WOOD 
TOP  AND  RACKS. 


Five 
Columns. 

Six 
Column.s. 

Seven 
Columns. 

Eight 
Columns. 

Nine 
Columns. 

Ten 
Columns. 

Five  feet  long,  with  racks 

to  hold  eight  two-third 

and  eight  full  cases    .  . 

$15.00 

$17.50 

$20.00 

$22.50 

$25.00 

$27.50 

Six  feet  long,  with  racks  to 

hold  eight  two-third  and 

eight  fuU  cases  and  gal- 

19.00 

23.00 

26.00 

29.00 

32.00 

35.00 

Seven  feet  long,  with  racks 

to  hold  sixteen  full  cases 

23.00 

26.50 

30.00 

33.50 

37.00 

40.50 

Eight  feet  long,  with  racks 

to  hold  sixteen  full  cases 

and  gaUey  rack     .    .  . 

27.00 

31.00 

35.00 

39.00 

43.00 

47.00 

Ten  feet  long,  with  racks  to 

hold  twenty-four  full 

35.00 

40.00 

45.00 

50.00 

55.00 

60.00 

Twelve  feet  long,  with  racks 

to  hold  thirty-two  full 

43.00 

49.00 

55.00 

61.00 

67.00 

73.00 

FORTY-CASE  COMBINATION  CABINET. 


54 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Price  List. 


Piue. 


Cherry.      Walnut.  Boxing. 


$85.00    $90.00   $95.00  $3.25 


21  cabinet,  40  cases,  "Combination,"  includ- 
ing 20  two-third,  8  fuU  job,  8  triple,  10 
drawers  for  sorts,  2  copy  drawers,  gaUey 
rest,  and  2  pairs  on  top  

Standing  gaUeys  are  furnished  with  the  cabinets,  if  preferred,  to  take  the 
place  of  cases  on  top. 

Book-binders'  and  amateur  cabinets  made  to  order. 

^  ^'-^  i    <  \  4.  <  <.<.. ,<.,^.4,.^geii_  ^ 

_   ^  ^-^  ■  ^  t  -J.  <  J  J-         . rw<t.A,-4iUik^^fe 


No. 


No.  19. 

FORTY-CASE  "EAGLE"  CABINET. 

Pine.  Cherry. 


Boxing 
Walnut.  and 

.shipping. 


16  cabinet,  22  cases,  with  copy  drawer,  includ- 

ing  6  job,  4  triple,  4  two-third  pairs,  and 
2  parrs  on  top   $50.00   $55.00   $60.00  $2.25 

17  cabinet,  32  cases,  with  copy  drawer,  includ- 

ing 14  two-third  cases,  6  full  job,  4  triple, 
2  pairs,  and  2  pairs  on  top  

18  cabinet,  36  cases,  with  2  copy  drawers,  in- 

cluding 18  two-third  cases,  7  full  job,  3 
triple,  2  pairs,  and  2  pairs  on  top  .    .  . 

19  cabinet,  *'  Eagle,"  40  cases,  with  2  drawers, 

including  20  three-quarter  job,  8  full 
job,  8  triple,  and  2  fuU  pairs  on  top  .  . 

20  cabinet,  42  eases,  inchidiug  21  three-quarter 

job,  8  triple,  9  full  job,  and  2  pairs  on 
top  75.00 


60.00     65.00     70.00  2.25 


65.00     70.00     75.00  3.00 


70.00     75.00     80.00  3.25 


80.00     85.00  3.25 


E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Pkice  List. 


55 


DUST-TIGHT  CHERRY,  PINE,  AND  WALNUT  CABINETS. 

Boxinsaml 


No. 

Containing 

Pine. 

CheriT- 

Walnut. 

sliippiiifj. 

1  . 

.  5 

,  $6.50 

$8.50 

$11.00 

$  .50 

2  . 

.  10 

a          a  a 

.  12.00 

14.00 

16.00 

.65 

3  . 

.  15 

u          a  a 

.  16.50 

18.50 

20.50 

1.00 

4  . 

.  10 

.  15.00 

17.00 

19.00 

.75 

5  . 

.  12 

a       li  u 

.  17.00 

19.00 

21.00 

1.00 

6  . 

.  16 

a       u  ii 

.  22.00 

24.00 

26.00 

1.25 

7  . 

.  20 

a       a  u 

.  30.00 

32.00 

34.00 

1.50 

8  . 

.  10 

Ttree-quarter  job  cases 

.  17.00 

19.00 

21.00 

.75 

9  . 

.  12 

u          a          u  u 

.  19.00 

21.00 

23.00 

1.00 

10  . 

.  16 

a          u          a  u 

.  25.00 

27.00 

29.00 

1.25 

11  . 

.  20 

U               U               U  ii 

.  31.00 

33.00 

35.00 

1.50 

12  . 

.  16 

.  27.00 

29.00 

31.00 

1.50 

13  . 

.  20 

it  it 

.  32.00 

34.00 

36.00 

1.75 

Above  prices  for  flat  tops;  if  with  galley 

top,  like  above  cut,  extra   2.00        2.50  3.00 

Iron  stands,  to  screw  on  flat  top  cabinet  to  hold  cases  for  compositors  to 
work  at,  per  pair,  $1.50. 


4 


56 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Peice  List. 


No.  23. 


PATENT  PROJECTING  FRONT  ECONOMIC  CABINET. 

This  patent  cabinet  is  an  improvement  on  our  Economic  cabinet,  as  the 
addition  of  the  projecting  front  makes  it  also  serviceable  as  a  printer's 
tjrpe-stand,  at  which  the  compositor  can  work.  With  all  straight  front 
cabinets  this  cannot  be  done,  as  there  is  no  room  for  the  compositor  to 
assume  a  working  position. 

It  contains  on  the  left  a  copy  drawer  and  20  two-third  job  cases, 
Yankee  or  Boston  patterns;  in  the  centre,  safe  receptacles  for  5  brass 
galleys  and  16  full-sized  job  cases ;  on  the  right,  another  copy  drawer  and 
20  two- third  job  cases,  or  an  equal  number  of  pair  or  triple  cases,  to  suit 
purchaser;  on  the  left  upper  surface  are  subdivisions  for  labor-saving  leads 
of  various  thicknesses,  from  4-em  pica  up,  and  on  the  right  are  spaces  for 
the  larger  display  type,  face  up,  both  of  which  are  sunk  sufficiently  to  admit 
of  putting  up  a  pair  of  cases,  left  and  right,  without  injury  to  their  eon- 
tents;  and  in  the  centre  upper  surface  there  are  (always  uncovered)  every 
convenience  for  labor-saving  rules,  combination  borders,  right  and  left  orna- 
ments, etc.,  and  standing-galley  room. 

Two  extra  pairs  of  cases  go  with  each  cabinet,  and  are  not  shown  in 
cut,  for  the  accommodation  of  the  two  56-lb.  fonts  of  body  letter;  two  of 
the  job  cases  accommodate  their  italics;  and  the  remainder  of  the  ample 
assortment,  enumerated  below,  is  provided  with  case-room  without  mixing 
up  any  two  of  the  fonts  specified. 

This  cabinet  occupies  a  space  only  8x3  feet,  and  embraces  the  necessary 
stands,  cases,  cabinets,  gaUey  rack,  etc.,  for  an  office  which,  with  ordinary 
furniture,  would  require  a  room  15  x  20  feet  and  cost  $110. 

It  will  thus  be  seen  that  the  compositor  has  in  this  cabinet  his  material 
concentrated,  directly  under  his  eye  and  within  reach.  And  there  is  thus 
a  great  saving  both  in  time  and  wear  and  tear. 

Price,  in  walnut,  $130.  Boxing  and  shipping,  $5.  GaUey  closet,  at  end 
of  cabinet,  extra,  $5. 


E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Pkice  List. 


57 


CLOTH  AND  RUBBER  BLANKETS. 

CLOTH.  EUBBER. 


Thick, 

Thin, 

Three-ply.  Five-ply. 
One-twelfth  One-eishtli 

Width. 

per  yard. 

per  yard. 

Width.        inch  tliick. 

incli  thick. 

Thirty-four  inches  . 

$4.50 

$2.75 

Twenty-six  in.  $6.25 

$8.25 

Thirty-nine  inches  . 

5.00 

3.00 

Thirty-two  in.  7.00 

Forty -four  inches  . 

5.75 

3.^5 

Thirty -four  in. 

9.25 

Forty-seven  inches  . 

6.25 

Thirty-six  in.  7.75 

Fifty-one  inches 

6.75 

Forty  in.  .    .  8.75 

11.75 

Fifty -five  inches 

7.50 

Forty-four  in.  10.00 

13.50 

Roller  cloth  (in  roUs,  12  yards  long  by  2J  inches  wide),  per  roll,  $5. 
Prices  subject  to  change. 


ROLLER  FRAMES, 

Frame  with  Extra 
Dimensions.  one  stock,  stock. 

6  inches  long  (1  handle)  $1.25  $  .40 

8  inches  long  (1  handle)  1.25  .40 

10  inches  long  (1  handle)  1.50  .50 

12  inches  long  (1  handle)  1.75  .60 

14  inches  long  (2  handles)  2.00  .70 

16  inches  long  (2  handles)  2.25  .80 

18  inches  long  (2  handles)  2.50  .90 


WITH  STOCKS. 

Frame  with  Extra 
No.      Dimensions.  one  stock,  stock. 

1.  23  in.  long  (1  handle)  $3.00  $1.00 

2.  26  in.  long  (1  handle)  3.50  1.10 

3.  31  in.  long  (1  handle)  4.00  1.25 

4.  36  in.  long  (1  handle)  4.50  1.40 

5.  44  in.  long  (1  handle)  5.00  1.55 

6.  49  in.  long  (1  handle)  5.50  1.70 

7.  53  in.  long  (1  handle)  6.00  1.85 


ROLLER 

Per  inch 
in  length. 

To  3  inches  in  diameter  .  .  $  .40 
To  4  inches  in  diameter    .    .  .50 


MOULDS. 

Per  inch 
in  len  gth. 

To  5  inches  in  diameter  .  .  $  .60 
To  6  inches  in  diameter    .    .  .95 


When  ordered  of  less  than  usual  length,  the  foot  and  centre  pieces  are  charged  extra. 


LINEN  TAPE. 


One-half  Three-fourths  Cue  and  one- 
in.  wide.  in.  wide.     eighth  in.  wide. 


Two-ply,  per  roU,  thirty-six  yards  long     ...    $  .75  $1.25 
Four-ply,  per  roll,  thirty-six  yards  long    ...       .75  $1.60 


58 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Price  List. 


INK  CLOSET. 

Black  walnut,  with  Italian 
marble  miUler  and  stone 
(20x20  inches)    ....  $20.00 

Pine,  with  American  marble 
miiUer  and  stone  (20x20 

inches)   15.00 

French  marble  ink  stone  and 

muller  only  (20  x  20  inches)  5.00 

Italian  marble  ink  stone  and 

muUer  only  (20  x  20  inches)  7.50 


INK  BRAYER. 
Price  25  cents. 


INK  TABLE. 

Foolscap,  with  roUer;  size  of 

top  18  X  24  inches    .    .    .  $7.50 

MISCELLANEOUS. 

Patent  safety  benzine  cans,  of 

brass,  quarts,  each  .  .  .  $  .75 
Patent  safety  benzine  cans,  of 

brass,  pints,  each  60 

Steel  folders  25 

Adjustable  lead  mould,  high 

and  low  25.00 

Best  spenn  oil,  per  gallon  .  .  2.00 
Quoins,  boxwood,  per  100  .  .  .60 
Quoins,  hickory,  per  100    .    .  .40 


COMPOSITION  KETTLES. 

To  hold  Per  set. 

Tin  kettles    .    .    1^  gallons  $7.50 

Tin  kettles    .    .    3  gallons  10.00 

Copper  kettles  .    3  gallons  16.00 

Copper  kettles  .    12  gallons  65.00 
to  work  by  steam. 


INKING  BALLS. 

Ill  diameter.  Per  pair. 

BaUs,  made  up    .    10  inches  $7.50 

Balls,  made  up       8^  inches  6.00 

BaUs,  made  up    .    7  inches  5.00 


E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Pkice  List. 


59 


DOUBLE-LEVER  RULE  AND  LEAD  CUTTER. 

By  combination  of  levers,  great  power  is  secured,  and  the  thickest  rules  are 

cut  with  little  exertion. 

Bed  15  in.,  shears  4  in.    .    .   $11.00   |   Bed  15  in.,  with  outside  gauge,  $11.50 


BRASS  RULE  AND  LEAD  CUTTER. 

Single  lever,  bed  15  inches,  shears  3  inches  $6.00 

Single  lever,  with  outside  gauge  6.50 


60 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Pkice  List. 


Price 


PATENT  KNIFE  AND  BODKINS. 


$2.00 


Price 


PRINTERS'  KNIFE. 


$1.50 


MALLETS.                              Small.  Large. 

Oval  handle,  liiokory  $  .40  $  .50 

Oval  handle,  lignum-vitee     .  50  .75 

Oval  handle,  hickory,  iron-bound   1.00 

PLANERS. 

Hard  maple   $  .30 

Hard  maple,  faced  with  cloth,  and  hacked  with  leather  50 

Hard  maple,  curved,  for  rotary  presses  75 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Peice  List. 


61 


Price 


HARD-WOOD  MITRE  BOX. 
.    ,    .    .    $  .50   I    Saw  for  mitre  box 


$1.50 


SHOOTING  STICKS. 


Steel,  large,  bright 
Steel,  large,  black 
Brass  


$  .75 
.60 
1.00 


Steel,  small,  black 
Steel,  small,  bright 
Hickory  .       .  . 


$  .45 
.60 
.10 


FOLDING  SPRING  BODKIN. 
Price  60  cents. 


BODKIN. 
Steel,  with  hard-wood  handle,  15  cents. 


SPRING  BODKIN. 
AU  steel,  40  cents. 


Hard  wood,  with  real  cjt  mu'         Black  walnut  backs 

bristles,  small,  UNJv  oLilOJii.  genuine  bris- 

3i  X  4  inches    .    .     .75     All  brass,  75  cents.        ties,  3x7  inches,  $1.50 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Peice  List. 


63 


Patented  February  8,  1876. 


PATENT  REVERSIBLE  KNEE  COMPOSINa  STICK. 
2,  2i,  OR  2i  INCHES  DEEP. 


In  principle  and  construction,  the  best  in  the  world.  All  steel.  Warranted 
true. 

The  clamp  does  not  project  under  the  bottom  of  shell,  but  slides  along 
the  bead  on  the  back,  so  that  a  proof  can  be  taken  from  matter  in  the 
stick.  The  bead  adds  stiffness  to  the  sheU,  and  the  inclined  position  of 
the  screw  binds  the  point  of  the  knee  closely,  against  the  bottom.  The 
knee  can  be  set  instantly  and  firmly  to  any  position,  and  when  worn  it 
can  be  reversed,  so  as  to  present  a  fresh  side  to  the  type,  thus  doubling 
the  life  of  the  stick. 

PRICES. 


Nickel- 
Polished,  plated. 

6  inches  $  .75  $1.00 

8  inches  80  1.05 

10  inches  1.00  1.25 

12  inches  1.15  1.40 


Nickel- 
Polished,  plated. 

14  inches   $1.30  $1.60 

16  inches   1.45  1.75 

18  inches   1.60  1.90 

20  inches   1.75  2.10 


JOB  STICKS. 


Cherry  or  walnut. 

Patent 


Mahogany. 

Patent 


12  inches 
14  inches 
16  inches 
20  inches 


Unlined. 

$  .80 
.85 
.90 
1.00 


lined. 

$1.00 
1.05 
1.15 
1.25 


Unlined. 

$  .90 
.95 
1.00 
1.10 


Uned. 

$1.15 
1.20 
1.30 
1.40 


Cherry  or  walnut. 

Patent 
Unlined.  lined. 

24  inches  $1.10  $1.40 

30  inches  1.25  1.60 

36  inches  1.30  1.75 

40  inches  1.60  2.00 


Mahogany. 

Patent 
Unlined.  lined. 

$1.20  $1.50 

1.35  1.75 

1.50  1.90 

1.75  2.25 


Steel  composing  rules 


25  cents.      Steel  make-up  rules 


25  cents. 


64 


E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Pkice  List. 
BRASS  RULE. 


Cents 

No.  per  foot. 

1.  10  to  Pica  .  6 

2.  7  to  Pica  .  6 

3.  6  to  Pica  .   8 

4.  5  to  Pica  .  —  10 

5.  4  to  Pica  .   _12 

6.  3  to  L'g  prim.    14 

7.  3  to  Pica   .   •   III!  18 

8.  Pearl    .   .    22 

9.  Agate   .    .    22 

10.  3  to  at.  prim.   25 

11.  Nonpareil  .  -fllM  27 

12.  §  of  L'g  prim.  i^H  30 

13.  Minion  .    .    32 

14.  Brevier  .    .   ^Hl  35 

15.  2  to  Gt.  prim.  JHl  37 

16.  fEngHsh  .    42 

17.  Long  primer  i^H 

18.  3of  EngUsh   Hi -"^^ 

19.  Pica      .    .   : — 60 

30.  5- to  Pica    .    =^^=—  10 

31.  4  to  Pica    .    =_^_  12 

32.  2  to  Minion  ^»  16 

33.  3  to  Pica    .  —  18 

34.  3  to  Pica    .  20 

35.  Pearl     .    .  —  22 

36.  3  to  Gt.  prim.  m  27 

37.  §  of  L'g  prim.  1  32 

38.  Minion   .    ,    :^:^ZZ:^«  37 

39.  f  of  Pica  . 

40.  3  of  Pica    .  Z^:^^B42 

41.  fofEngUsh   ZI^ZMl  47 

50.  3  to  "'^^""•^"H'-  —  1,1  10 

51.  3  to  L'g  prim.  — — .i^^b  14 


Cents 

No.  per  foot. 

52.  3  to  Pica    .  — --^m  18 

53.  Pearl     .    .  — — 22 

54.  §  of  Bourgeois^— 27 

55.  §  of  L'g  prim.M|MH^Hg[^B  27 

56.  §  of  Sm.  pica  b^m^^  32 

57.  §  of  Pica    .    jHMHflB  37 

58.  f  of  Pica    .    f^mfSKM  42, 

59.  fofEngHsh   ^^Hg^  47 

65.  3  to  L'g  prim.  14 

66.  3  to  Pica    .  —  in 

67.  Pearl     .    .  m^m  ^0 

68.  3  to  Gt.  prim.  —  25 

69.  §  of  L'g  prim.  ^^l^^riMH  30 

70.  Minion  .    .  WItM 

71.  §  of  Pica    .  ^T::^'"3iM37 

72.  a  of  Pica    .    ^^^^BH  42 

73.  'i  of  EngUsh  '^^^JHI  47 

74.  §  of  Gt.  prim.  "^^^^^^^J/j^  52 

75.  f  of  Paragon  68 

76.  3-Une  Agate  """"TH 

77.  2-line  Bonrg.  ""^|||5B 

90.  3  to  Gt.  prim.  —  25 

91. *  Minion  .    .  ^^^=■■132 

92.  §  of  Pica    .  ^^^^H35 

100.  7  to  Pica    .    10 

101.  7  to  Pica    .    10 

102.  7  to  Pica    .    10 

103.  7  to  Pica    .   10 

104.  7  to  Pica    .   10 

105.  7i;oPica    .  10 

110.  7  to  Pica    .  10 

111.  7  to  Pica    .  10 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Price  List. 


65 


No. 

112. 
113. 
114. 
115. 
116. 
121. 
122. 
123. 
124. 
125. 
126. 
135. 
138. 
139. 
140. 
141. 
142. 
143. 
144. 
145. 
146. 
147. 
148. 
149. 
150. 
151. 
158. 
159. 
160. 
161. 
162. 
163. 
164. 
165. 


5  to  Pica 
5  to  Pica 
3  to  Small  pica- 
3  to  Small  pica-N^^-xxx^- 
5  to  Pica 
5  to  Pica 
5  to  Pica 
5  to  Pica 
5  to  Pica 
3  to  Small  pic£ 

3  to  Small  pica  N 

4  to  Pica 

3  to  L'g  prim.  ::..::=::::::::«= 

2  to  Minion  : 

3  to  L'g  prim. 

3  to  Small  pica  ::::.:>::5cx: 

3  to  L'g  prim.  : 
3  to  Small  pica  ; 

3  to  L'g  prim. 
3  to  Small  pics 
3  to  L'g  prim. 
3  to  Small  pica? 
3  to  Small  pica^ 
3  to  L'g  prim. 
3  to  Small  picax 
3  to  Small  picai 
3  to  L'g  prim. 


3  to  Small  pica~— ~- 
3  to  L'g  prim. 
3  to  Small  pic£ 
3  to  L'g  prim. 
3  to  Small 
3  to  Small  pica- 

3  to  Pica      .  :: 

6 


Cents 
per  foot. 

 12 


12 
16 
16 
12 
12 
12 
12 
12 
16 
16 
16 
16 
16 
16 
16 
16 
16 
16 
16 
16 
16 
16 
16 
16 
16 
16 
16 
16 
16 
16 
16 
16 
20 


No. 

176. 
177. 
178. 
190. 
191. 
192. 
193. 
194. 
195. 
196. 
197. 
198. 
199. 
200. 
201. 
202. 
203. 
204. 
205. 
206. 
207. 
208. 
209. 
210. 
211. 
212. 
213. 
214. 
215. 
216. 
217. 
218. 
219. 


8  to  Pica  .   

3  to  Pica    .    1 1 1 1  ■  ■  ■  I  ■  I 
Minion  .    .  Mlllllll 
3  to  SmaU  picas-vwww^ 
3  to  Small  pica^< 
3  to  SmaU  pic£ 
3  to  SmaU  pica 
3  to  SmaUpica»»»»»»»»»i 
3  to  SmaU  pica*««««««««a 
3  to  Pica 
3  to  Pica 
3  to  L'g  prim. 

2  to  SmaU  pica*********i 
6  to  Pica  . 

3  to  SmaU  pica  « 

2  to  SmaU  pica-^  •  •  

3  to  Pica  . 


6  to  Pica 
3  to  Pica  . 
Pearl      .  . 
6  to  Pica 

3  to  L'g  prim,  imtn  

Minion   .    .   ' 

3  to  Minion     -  ^  ^  - 
Pearl     .    .  - 
6  to  Pica  . 
6  to  Pica  ■■«■-■-■- 
3  to  L'g  prim.  ..^.^.^.^ 
3  to  SmaU  pica—— 
Pearl     .    .  --^ 
Pearl     .  . 
§  of  L'g  prim. 
Pearl     .  . 


Cents 
per  loot. 

 12 


18 

40 
16 
16 
16 
16 
16 
16 
16 
18 
18 
18 
12 
22 
22 
22 
12 
22 
22 
20 
18 
40 
12 
22 
12 
12 
18 
22 
24 
24 
35 
30 


66 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Peice  List. 
BEAS8  DASHES. 


No. 

1. 

3  to  Pica  . 

2. 

3  to  Pica  . 

3. 

3  to  Pica 

4. 

3  to  Pica  . 

5. 

3  to  Pica  . 

6. 

3  to  Pica  . 

7. 

3  to  Pica  . 

8. 

3  to  Pica  . 

9. 

3  to  Pica  . 

10. 

3  to  Pica  . 

11. 

3  to  Pica  . 

12. 

3  to  Pica  . 

13. 

3  to  Pica  . 

14. 

3  to  Pica  . 

15. 

3  to  Pica  . 

16. 

3  to  Pica  . 

17. 

3  to  Pica  . 

18. 

3  to  Pica  . 

19. 

5  to  Pica  . 

20. 

5  to  Pica  . 

21. 

3  to  Pica  . 

22. 

3  to  Pica  . 

23. 

3  to  Pica  . 

24. 

3  to  Pica  . 

25. 

3  to  Pica  . 

26. 

3  to  Pica  . 

27. 

3  to  Pica  . 

28. 

3  to  Pica  . 

29. 

3  to  Pica  . 

30. 

3  to  Pica  . 

31. 

3  to  Pica  . 

Cents 
eacli. 


9 

32. 

9 

33. 

9 

34. 

9 

35. 

9 

36. 

9 

37. 

9 

38. 

9 

39. 

9 

40. 

9 

41. 

9 

42. 

9 

43. 

9 

44. 

9 

45. 

9 

46. 

9 

47. 

9 

48. 

9 

49. 

9 

.50. 

9 

51. 

10 

52. 

12 

53. 

10 

54. 

10 

55. 

10 

56. 

10 

57. 

10 

58. 

10 

59. 

10 

60. 

-10 

61. 

- 10 

62. 

3  to  Pica 
3  to  Pica 
3  to  Pica 
3  to  Pica 
3  to  Pica 
3  to  Pica 
3  to  Pica 
3  to  Pica 
3  to  Pica 
3  to  Pica 
3  to  Pica 
3  to  Pica 
3  to  Pica 
3  to  Pica 


3  to  Long  primer 
3  to  Long  primer 


3  to  L'g  prim. 
3  to  Sm.  pica 
3  to  Pica  .  . 
3  to  Pica  . 
3  to  Pica  . 
3  to  Pica  .  - 
3  to  Pica  .  - 
58.    3  to  Pica  .  - 
3  to  Pica 
Pearl   .  — 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Peice  List. 


67 


Brass  Dashes,  continued. 

No.  Cents  eacli. 

63   3  to  Pica    .    .    .  — 9 

64   3  to  Pica    .    .    .   ♦  ^  »   9 

65   3  to  Great  pi-imer   <»    10 

66   3  to  Great  primer  ^  ^  »   10 

67   3  to  Great  primer  ♦  ^  »   10 

68   3  to  Great  primer  ♦  »   10 

69   3  to  Great  primer   ♦   10 

PERFORATING  RULE. 
Brass    ....    25  cents  per  foot.   |   Steel    ....    75  cents  per  foot. 


BRASS 

COLUIVIN 

RULES. 

Nonpareil 

Brevier  Minion 

Long  Primer  Small  Pica 

tliickne.9s.      thickness.  thickness. 

thickness,  thickness. 

Twelve  inches  and  under    .  . 

.   $  .25 

$  .35      $  .32 

$  .40  i 

?  .45 

Fifteen  inches  and  under    .  . 

.35 

.50  .45 

.55 

.70 

Eighteen  inches  and  under 

.45 

.60  .55 

.70 

.75 

Twenty-four  inches  and  under 

.50 

.70  .65 

.80 

.90 

02 

.04  .03 

.05 

.06 

Notching-  column  rules  under,  for  the  use  of  brass  reglet  . 

.    .  each, 

.05 

Composing-rule  steel,  per  strip,  twenty -four  inches  long 

.    .  each. 

.75 

Make-up-rule  steel,  per  strip,  twenty-four  inches  long     .  . 

.    .  each, 

.75 

.75 

REGLET,  FURNITURE,  AND  SIDE  STICKS. 

Done  up  in  quantities  of  twenty,  fifty,  and  one  hundred  yards,  and  plainly  marked. 
Per  yard.  Cherry.     Pine.  Per  yard.  Cherry.  Pine. 

Smaller  than  two-1.  pica  $  .03  $  .02      Thirteen  to  sixteen  1.  pica  $  .08  $  .06 

Two  to  five  line  pica    .       .04     .03      Bearers  12 

Six  to  twelve  line  pica  .       .06     .05      Side  sticks  06 

Twenty-five  per  cent,  discount  when  ordered  in  lots  of  one  hunSred  yards.  We  have 
every  facility  for  cutting  reglet  or  furniture,  accurately  and  cheaply,  to  any  measurement. 

LABOR-SAVING  FURNITURE, 

Finished  in  oil  and  made  from  two  to  ten  ems  pica,  by  picas  in  length.  The  size  is  stamped 
on  end  of  each  piece.    A  neat  ease  is  furnished  when  desired,  for  keeping  furniture  in  order. 

stained  pine  case.  Cherry  case. 

Single  case,  containing  560  pieces  $10.00  $12.00 

Double  case,  containing  1120  pieces   16.00  22.00 

Cherry  blocking,  three-fourths  inch  thick  ....  per  square  foot,  25  cents. 
Mahogany  blocking,  three-fourths  inch  thick  .    .    .  per  square  foot,  45  cents. 


68  R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Price  List. 

NEWSPAPER  RULES  AND  DASHES. 


straight, 
each. 

Curved, 
ea«h. 

Curved, 
eacli. 

Advertisement    .  . 

4  cts. 

9  cts. 

Wave  

6  cts. 

11  cts. 

?„50 

6  cts. 

11  cts. 

Head,  double  (steel)    .    .    .  . 

^50 

Double  and  mourning 

6  cts. 

11  cts. 

Each. 

straight, 

Curved, 

Wave,  parallel,  and  double  cur- 

each. 

per  inch. 

.15 

Single  head     .    .  . 

6  cts. 

6  cts. 

Plain     and    misery  curved 

Double  head   .    .  . 

6  cts. 

7  cts. 

12 

Parallel  head  .    .  . 

6  cts. 

7  cts. 

Fancy  curved  dashes     .    .  . 

.22 

LABOR-SAVma  RULES. 


Sets  of  the  single  rule,  assorted  lengths,  per  lb   $2.00 

Sets  of  the  parallel  or  double  rule,  assorted  lengths,  per  lb   1.75 

Sets  of  the  dotted  rule,  assorted  lengths   2.00 

Additional  pieces  of  any  length,  cut  to  ems,  will  be  furnished  to  order. 


BRASS  RULE— LABOR  SAVING. 


Single,  Dotted,  Hyphen,  Parallel,  and  Double. 

Three- 
lb.  fonts, 

Five- 
lb.  fonts. 

Ten- 
lb.  fonts. 

each. 

each. 

each. 

Six  to  pica  and  eight  to  pica  

$6.00 

$10.00 

$20.00 

Four  to  small  pica  and  four  to  pica    .  . 

4.80 

8.00 

16.00 

4  75 

7.50 

15.00 

Agate,  nonpareil,  minion,  and  brevier  .  . 

4.50 

7.50 

15.00 

Bourgeois,  long  primer,  small  pica,  and  pica 

7.00 

14.00 

Our  labor-saving  rule  is  cut  on  mitre  machine,  and  not  sawed  off,  as  by  other  makers. 


SUGGESTIONS  TO  PRINTERS. 


When  you  order  Type  for  newspaper  or 
book  work,  state  whether  or  not  you  want 
the  fonts  to  contain  italics,  accents,  leaders, 
fractions,  or  commercial  marks. 

In  ordering  Sorts  to  match  type  you 
already  have,  state  the  number  of  the  face, 
as  well  as  the  size  of  the  body ;  or,  if  you 
cannot  do  this,  then  send  a  capital  H  and 
a  lower-case  m  (as  little  used  as  possible) 
of  the  fonts  the  sorts  are  to  work  with ; 


also  state  the  number  of  pounds  or  ounces 
that  you  wish  of  each  particular  sort. 

Job  Fonts,  such  as  title,  antique,  clar- 
endon, ornamented,  etc.  (except  scripts), 
are  put  up  without  spaces  and  quads,  and 
if  you  want  them  to  any  size  body  it  will 
be  necessary  for  you  to  mention  it  when 
ordering. 

Prices  of  type  are  subject  to  change  from 
time  to  time. 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Peice  List. 


69 


PATENTED  STEREOTYPE  BLOCKS. 

The  superior  quality  of  the  material  and  the  workmanship  in  these  blocks, 
and  their  accuracy,  are  weU  known.  Every  portion  is  made  and  fitted  with 
the  utmost  care.  We  have  increased  our  facilities  for  theu-  manufactixre. 
A  large  stock  of  the  best  San  Domingo  mahogany,  thoroughly  seasoned 
and  planed  up,  is  kept  on  hand.  The  different  parts  are  also  kept  in 
stock,  ready  for  use,  enabling  iis  to  fill  orders  for  bloclcs  in  any  quantity,  or 
of  any  size,  in  from  twenty-four  to  forty-eight  hours  after  receipt  of  order. 
Orders  may  be  sent  by  telegraph  or  telephone. 

Any  clasp  or  hooJc  tvMch  moves  in  fixed  hearings  upon  a  screw,  infringes 
our  patented  rights,  and  all  infringers  uill  be  prosecuted. 


DIMENSIONS  AND  PRICES  WITHOUT  END  HOOK. 


Dimensions. 

Prices  without  end  hook. 

Outside 

Size  of 

Size  of 

No.  of 

Plain 

Patent 

(Umensions 

largest  plate 

smallest  plate 

side 

maliog- 

mahog- 

Patent 

Folio: 

of  blocks. 

takeu  on. 

taken  on. 

hook.s. 

any. 

any. 

iriui. 

Imperial  . 

16  X22J 

1.5.J  X  22^ 

14| X  21 J 

4 

$6.25 

$6.75 

$16.00 

Slip.  Royal 

13.^  X  2li 

13  X21J 

12i  X  20i 

4 

4.75 

6.25 

15.00 

Royal  .  . 

12*  X19J 

12  xl9i 

llixlSi 

4 

4.25 

5.75 

14.00 

Medium  . 

114X18^ 

11  xlSi 

lOi  X 17i 

4 

3.75 

5.25 

13.00 

Demy  .  . 

11  xl6 

lOJ  X  16 

9f  X  14| 

4 

3.25 

4.25 

12.00 

7 


70  E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Price  List. 


DIMENSIONS  AND  PRICES  WITHOUT  END  HOOK. 


Dimensions. 

Prices  without  end  hook. 

Outside 

Size  ot 

Size  ol 

No.  of 

Plain 

Patent 

Quarto : 

(Ij-iiicnsioiis 

liii'gest  jiliite 

smallest  plate 

of  tjlocks. 

taken  011. 

taken  on. 

hooks. 

an)'. 

any. 

iron. 

Imperial  . 

11  xl6 

10^  X 16 

93  X 143 

4 

$3.25 

$4.25 

$12.00 

Sup.  Royal 

lOJ  X 13J 

10  X13J 

9ix 

12i 

3 

3.00 

4.00 

10.50 

Royal  .  . 

9^x12^ 

9  X12J 

Sixllj 

3 

2.75 

3.75 

10.00 

Medium  . 

9  xll^ 

8^X11  J 

7|  X  10:1 

3 

2.50 

3.50 

9.50 

Demy  .  . 

7f  xll 

7^x11 

6JX 

3 

2.25 

3.25 

9.00 

Octavo : 

Imperial  . 

7^x11 

6JX11 

53  X 

93 

3 

2.25 

3.25 

9.00 

Sup.  Royal 

H  X  IQJ 

6  xlO 

54  x 

94 

3 

2.00 

2.75 

8.25 

Royal  .  . 

6x9^ 

5|x  9^ 

43  X 

Si 

3 

1.85 

2.50 

8.00 

Medium  . 

5^x  9 

5x9 

41 X 

73 

3 

1.70 

2.25 

7.75 

Demy  .  . 

5ix  7| 

4|x  7f 

4  X 

H 

3 

1.55 

2.00 

7.50 

Duodecimo : 

Broad  .  . 

5ix  63 

43  X  63 

4  X 

5i 

2 

1.30 

1.65 

Sixteenmo : 

Slip.  Royal 

5  x  6J 

4fx  6  J 

3|x 

5i 

2 

1.20 

1.50 

Medium  . 

4ix  6 

4x6 

3ix 

43 

2 

1.10 

1.35 

Demy  .  . 

3|x  5i 

3ix  5i 

2ix 

4 

2 

1.00 

1.20 

Eighteenmo : 

Medium  . 

Six  53 

3  X  53 

2ix 

^ 

2 

.90 

1.10 

Thirty- two  1110 

Sup.  Royal 

3x5 

2|x  5 

If  X 

3f 

2 

.80 

1.00 

PRICES  WITH  END  HOOKS  FOR  CYLINDER  PRESSES. 


No.  of 

New  style 

Proper  number  of  blocks 

Folio : 

siile»feenrt 

Plain 

patent 

Patent 

to  work  a 

hooks. 

mahogany. 

mahogany. 

iion. 

sheet  of  paper. 

Imperial  .    .  . 

7 

$7.50 

$9.00 

$24.00 

4 

blocks 

to 

33x46 

Super  Royal 

7 

7.00 

8.50 

22.00 

2 

blocks 

to 

22x28 

Royal  .... 

7 

6.50 

8.00 

20.00 

4 

blocks 

to 

26x40 

Mediimi   .    .  . 

7 

6.00 

7.50 

18.00 

4 

blocks 

to 

24x38 

Demy  .... 

6 

5.50 

6.50 

16.00 

8 

blocks 

to 

33x46 

Quarto : 

Imperial  .    .  . 

6 

5.50 

6.50 

16.00 

8 

blocks 

to 

33x46 

Super  Royal 

5 

4.50 

5.50 

14.50 

4 

blocks 

to 

22x28 

Royal  .... 

5 

4.25 

5.25 

13.00 

8 

blocks 

to 

26x40 

Medium   .    .  . 

5 

3.75 

5.00 

12.00 

8 

blocks 

to 

24x38 

Demy  .... 

4 

3.00 

4,00 

11.00 

16 

blocks 

to 

.33  X  46 

Octavo: 

Imperial  .    .  . 

4 

3.00 

4.00 

11.00 

16 

blocks 

to 

33x46 

Super  Royal 

4 

2.75 

3.50 

10.00 

8 

blocks 

to 

22x28 

Royal  .... 

4 

2.60 

3.25 

9.50 

16 

blocks 

to 

26x40 

Medium   .    .  . 

4 

2.45 

3.00 

9.00 

16 

blocks 

to 

24x38 

Demy  .... 

4 

2.30 

2.75 

8.50 

32 

blocks 

to 

33x46 

R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Peice  List.  71 


PEICES  WITH  END  HOOKS  FOE  CYLINDEE  PEESSES. 


No.  of 

Now  stylo 

Proper  minibor  of  blocks 

Duodecimo: 

pjitoiiti 

to  worlc  a 

hooka. 

mahogany. 

mahogany. 

sheet  of  paper. 

3 

$2.05 

$2.40 

24  blocks  to  23  x  41 

Sixteenmo : 

3 

1.95 

2.25 

16  blocks  to  22  x  28 

3 

1.85 

2.10 

32  blocks  to  26x40 

3 

1.75 

1.95 

32  blocks  to  23  x  33 

Eighteenmo: 

3 

1.65 

1.85 

18  blocks  to  19  X  24 

Thirty-twomo: 

3 

1.55 

1.75 

32  blocks  to  22x28 

Blocks  with  end  hook  will  take  plate  nine-sixteenths  of  an  inch  shorter 
than  the  largest  plate. 

Rvde  borders  extra,  according  to  the  size  and  style. 

Extra  brass  hooks,  with  steel  pinions,  inserted  in  wood  blocks  at  75 
cents  each,  and  in  iron  blocks  at  $1.00  each.    Stereotype  ratchets,  50  cents. 

In  sending  orders,  give  the  size  of  each  block  outside,  and  also  the  size 
of  largest  and  smallest  plate  to  be  worked,  measiuing  the  back  of  the  plate. 
All  blocks  are  made  three-quarter  inch  thick,  unless  otherwise  ordered. 


ABOUT  CARE  AND 

To  prevent  warping,  patent  blocks  should 
never  be  sent  to  the  washing  trough,  nor 
allowed  to  lie  on  a  wet  stone.  Where  plates 
have  to  be  cleaned  up  on  press,  use  no 
more  benzine  than  is  needed ;  when  clean- 
ing is  over,  sop  up  with  a  moist  sponge, 
and  make  di'y  with  rags  or  waste.  Blocks 
should  be  frequently  cleaned  and  oiled, 
special  care  being  taken  to  keep  the  mor- 
tises and  screw-threads  free  from  dirt. 
When  not  in  use  keep  in  a  dry  and  close 
closet,  where  they  will  not  be  exposed  to 
dust  or  to  changes  of  temperature. 

Never  order  a  set  of  new  blocks,  nor  make 
up  a  form  of  patent  blocks  for  press,  imtil 
you  know  the  exact  size  of  the  chase  that 
must  hold  the  blocks,  and  the  thickness 
and  position  of  its  cross-bars. 

Ascertain  also  the  exact  size  of  the  paper 
for  which  the  blocks  are  intended ;  and 
whether  the  leaves  of  the  paper  after  print- 


USE  OF  BLOCKS. 

ing  are  to  be  cut  or  uncut,  to  be  sewed  or 
to  be  stitched. 

In  making-up  blocks,  if  the  paper  is  to 
be  uncut  and  sewed,  allow  nothing  for  loss 
by  waste  on  the  fore  edge ;  if  it  is  to  be 
side-stitched  and  trimmed,  make  suitable 
allowance  for  the  margin  that  will  be  cut 
off  or  concealed  in  binding. 

Always  make  up  the  margins  full  to  the 
paper  that  will  be  used,  so  that  the  sheet 
can  be  evenly  folded  by  edges,  and  trimmed, 
if  necessary,  after  the  folding.  Never  make 
up  blocks  with  irregular  margins  that  com- 
pel the  cutting  and  the  waste  of  paper 
before  folding. 

When  you  can  do  so,  put  in  every  gutter, 
at  every  head,  and  on  the  sides  of  every 
cross-bar,  one  or  two  pieces  of  nonpareil 
or  pica  reglet,  so  that  the  margins  can  be 
easily  corrected  if  they  are  found  faulty  on 
the  first  proof. 


72  E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Peice  List. 


ESTIMATE  FOE  PEESS,  TYPE,  AND  MATEEIALS 


Six-column 
lolio  sheet, 
22  X  32. 

Seven-column 
folio  sheet, 
24  X  36. 

Regular  single  large  cylinder  press,  with  roller 

moulds,  blankets,  and  two  sets  stocks, 

Hand  cylinder  press,  with  moulds,  blankets, 

and  two  sets  stocks — boxed,  on  board  .  . 

Washington  hand-press,  with  two  pair  points. 

one  screw-wrench,  one  brayer,  one  slice, 

one  extra  frisket — boxed,  on  board  .    .  . 

No.  4, 

$225.00 

No.4^,$240.00 

No.  4, 

18.00 

No.  4^, 

19.00 

No.  4, 

17.00 

No.  4^, 

21.00 

2  No.  4,  13.00 

2  No.  4^, 

14.00 

4 

3.60 

4 

4.30 

Furniture,  (a)  $3.00  per  100  yards  

100 

3.00 

100 

3.00 

Quoins,  1®  40  cents  per  hundred  

200 

.80 

200 

.80 

Mallet,  40  cents;  planer,  30  cents;  steel  shoot- 

ing stick,  75  cents  

1 

1.45 

1 

1.45 

Double  iron  imposing  bed  and  frame     .    .  . 

No.  4, 

54.00 

No.  5, 

67.00 

25 

5.00 

25 

5.00 

Composition  kettle,  tin  

7.50 

7.50 

RoUer  composition,  (S)  20  cents  per  pound  . 

25 

5.00 

25 

5.00 

Lye  brush,  75  cents ;  proof  brush,  $1.50     .  . 

2.25 

2.25 

Ready  proof  press,  without  stand  

20.00 

20.00 

1 

1.25 

1 

1.25 

3.75 

3.75 

8 

12.80 

10 

16.00 

3 

2.70 

3 

2.70 

12  .^^S,,  17.00 

-|  9  two- 
-L'i  thirds. 

17.00 

No.  5  wooden  double  stands,  with  racks. 

®  $4.50  

2 

9.00 

3 

13.50 

Composing  sticks,  eight-inch,  (®  95  cents  .  . 

3 

2.85 

4 

3.80 

3 

.75 

4 

1.00 

Proof  galleys,  single  column,  patent  lined. 

«z)  $2.00  

6 

12.00 

6 

12.00 

Common  wood  gaUeys,  (S>  60  cents  .... 

6 

3.60 

6 

3.60 

4.00 

4.00 

1 

2.00 

1 

2.00 

$447.30 

$490.90 

E,.  Hoe  &  Go's  Peice  List.  73 


FOR  A  WEEKLY  PAPER  OF  SMALL  CIRCULATION. 


Eight-columu 
folio  sheet, 
26  X  40. 

Five-column 
quarto  sheet, 
2G  X  40. 

Nine-column 
folio  sheet, 
28  X  44, 

Six-column 
quarto  sheet, 
30  X  44. 

Seven-column 
quarto  sheet, 
35  or  36  X  48. 

No.  5,  $250.00 
No.  5,  19.00 
No.  5,  21.00 
4  28.00 

4  4.30 
200  6.00 
300  1.20 

1  1.45 
No.  5,  67.00 
25  5.00 
7.50 

25  5.00 
2.25 

28.00 

1  1.25 
3.75 

14  22.40 
3  2.70 
16  24.00 

5  22.50 

6  5.70 
6  1.50 

8  16.00 
6  3.60 

5.00 
1  2.00 

No.  5,  $250.00 

4  28.00 

4  4.30 
200  6.00 
300  1.20 

1  1.45 
No.  5,  67.00 
50  10.00 

16.00 
50  10.00 
2.25 

28.00 

1  1.25 

16  25.60 

4  3.60 
20  ^Ti,  32.00 

5  22.50 

6  5.70 
6  1.50 

12  24.00 
8  4.80 
40.00 
5.00 
1  2.00 

No.  6,  $275.00 

4  35.00 

4  4.80 
200  6.00 
300  1.20 

1  1.45 
No.  6,  84.00 
50  10.00 

.  16.00 
50  10.00 
1  2.25 

50.00 
1  1.25 

18  28.80 

5  4.50 
20  32.00 

6  27.00 
8  7.60 
6  1.50 

12  24.00 
8  4.80 
50.00 
6.00 
1  2.00 

• 

No.  6,  $275.00 

4  38.00 

4  4.80 
400  8.00 
400  1.60 

1  1.45 
No.  6,  84.00 
100  20.00 

16.00 
100  20.00 

2  4.50 

50.00 
1  1.25 

25  40.00 
6  5.40 
20  thTds,  32.00 

8  36.00 
10  9.50 
8  2.00 

16  32.00 
10  6.00 
60.00 
6.00 
1  2.00 

No.  8,  $350.00 

4  44.00 

4  5.80 
400  8.00 
400  1.60 

1  1.45 
No.  6,  98.00 
100  20.00 

16.00 
100  20.00 

2  4.50 

50.00 
1  1.25 

30  48.00 
6  5.40 
20fuU,  34.00 

10  45.00 
12  11.40 
10  2.50 

20  40.00 
10  6.00 
75.00 
7.00 

1  2.00 

$556.10 

$592.15 

$685.15 

$755.50 

$906.90 

74  R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Peice  List. 

ESTIMATE  FOR  PRESS,  TYPE,  AND  MATERIALS 


six-column 
folio  sheet, 
22  X  32. 

Seven-column 
folio  sheet, 
24  X  36. 

$447.30 

$490.90 

2 

1.50 

3 

2.25 

4.00 

4.50 

5 

1.25 

5 

1.50 

Column  rules,  according  to  thicTcTi  ess,  aljout 

20 

10.00 

24 

12.00 

iiQ.verijisciij.enT}  ruies,  singic,  'eo  t  ccnij&  . 

75 

3.00 

100 

4.00 

Advertisement  rules,  double,  fa>  6  cents  . 

8 

.48 

10 

.60 

Advertisement  rules,  parallel,  <fz)  6  cents    .  . 

8 

.48 

10 

.60 

10 

.70 

10 

.70 

5 

.40 

5 

.40 

20 

1.80 

25 

2.25 

j_iOug  piiinei                   poimu.o,  'of  rt^  ccnio  • 

Bourgeois,  .                pounds,  ®  44  cents  . 

225 

99.00 

300 

132.00 

Brevier,  .    .                pounds,  ®  48  cents  . 

Minion,  .    .                pounds,  ®  52  cents  . 

Nonpareil,  .                pounds,  ®  58  cents  . 

200 

116.00 

250 

145.00 

12 

50.00 

15 

60.00 

Leads  and  slugs,  pounds,  about  18  cents    .  . 

25 

4.50 

30 

5.40 

5.00 

10.00 

8.00 

9.00 

$753.41 

$881.10 

HINTS  ON  THE  PURCHASE  OF  TYPE. 


Select  faces  and  bodies  carefully.  Buy 
according  to  your  ability  and  your  need, 
but  only  what  you  can  use  to  profit.  Con- 
sider well  how  you  can  use  a  face  before 
you  purchase  it.  Don't  buy  it  because  it 
is  a  pretty  style.  It  may  be  pretty,  and 
yet  unsuitable  for  general  work. 

Give  preference  to  the  regular  bodies  of 
Roman  type  —  pearl,  nonpareil,  brevier, 
long  primer,  pica,  great  primer,  double 
small  pica,  and  the  multiples  of  pica. 

Get  as  large  fonts  as  you  can  afford  to 
buy.  One  font  of  500  pounds  of  long 
primer  is  more  useful  and  more  durable 
than  two  fonts  of  long  primer  and  botir- 
geois,  each  of  250  pounds.    Small  fonts 


are  always  unequally  and  unduly  worn.  The 
two  small  fonts  wUl  cost  more,  earn  less, 
and  wear  out  sooner  than  one  large  font. 

Select  uniform  faces  as  far  as  possible. 
The  symmetry  of  harmonious  faces  is  al- 
ways pleasing.  For  a  very  large  ofl&ce,  it 
may  be  judicious  to  get  a  series  of  two  or 
three  styles  of  faces.  In  such  case  let 
these  series  be  very  perceptibly  unlike. 
But  in  all  cases  maintain  the  imiformity  of 
each  series.  Do  not  allow  your  customers 
to  choose  for  you.  To  buy  faces  without 
system,  to  please  a  passing  fancy,  is  sure 
to  make  great  trouble.  It  is  impossible  to 
keep  them  separate,  and  yet,  when  mixed, 
they  make  the  greatest  confusion  and  loss. 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Price  List.  75 


FOR  A  WEEKLY  PAPER  OF  SMALL  CIRCULATION. 


Eight-coliunn 
folio  sheet, 
26  X  40. 

FiTecolumn 
quarto  sheet, 
26  X  40. 

Nine-colunm 
folio  sheet, 
28  X  44. 

six-column 
quarto  sheet, 
30X44. 

Seven-colnmn 
quarto  sheet, 
35  or  36x48. 

$556.10 

$592.15 

$685.15 

$755.50 

$906.90 

5 

3.75 

5 

3.75 

6 

4.50 

8 

6.00 

10 

7.50 

4.50 

4.00 

5.00 

5.00 

6.00 

5 

1.75 

9 

2.70 

5 

2.00 

9 

2.70 

9 

3.60 

28 

16.80 

32 

24.00 

32 

19.20 

40 

24.00 

48 

36.00 

150 

6.00 

200 

8.00 

200 

8.00 

250 

10.00 

300 

12.00 

15 

.90 

20 

1.20 

20 

1.20 

25 

1.50 

30 

1.80 

15 

.90 

20 

1.20 

20 

1.20 

25 

1.50 

30 

1.80 

20 

1.40 

20 

1.40 

50 

3.50 

100 

7.00 

100 

7.00 

10 

80. 

10 

.80 

25 

2.00 

50 

4.00 

50 

4.00 

30 

2.70 

40 

3.60 

40 

3.60 

60 

5.40 

75 

6.75 

400 

200.00 

450 

225.00 

500 

250.00 

700 

350.00 

375 

165.00 

350 

168.00 

400 

192.00 

400 

192.00 

500 

240.00 

300 

174.00 

200 

116.00 

300 

174.00 

70.00 

20 

80.00 

80.00 

90.00 

100.00 

40 

7.20 

50 

9.00 

60 

10.80 

70 

12.60 

80 

14.40 

10.00 

20.00 

10.00 

10.00 

15.00 

15.00 

15.00 

10.00 

10.00 

14.00 

16.00 

20.00 

$1031.80 

$1119.80 

$1272.15 

$1524.20 

$1926.75 

HINTS  ON  THE  PURCHASE  OF  TYPE. 


Order  sorts  suitable  for  your  own  pecul- 
iar class  of  work.  The  assortment  sold  by 
the  founder  is  for  general  work  only.  The 
special  work  that  may  require  a  profusion 
of  figui-es,  capitals,  points,  accents,  etc., 
must  have  these  special  sorts  added  to  the 
font. 

For  job  work  get  abundance  of  quadrats 
— double  or  treble  the  ordinary  supply. 
To  limit  the  font  to  the  allowance  of  the 
type-founder's  scheme  is  to  deprive  the 
office  of  all  the  advantages  of  fat  matter, 
of  poetry,  and  of  tables,  etc.  With  an  in- 
sufBeient  supply  of  quadrats,  such  matter 
becomes  lean  and  unprofitable.  A  careful 
examination  of  miscellaneous  job  work,  like 


bill-heads,  bills  of  lading,  checks,  displayed 
circulars,  etc.,  will  show  that  the  surface 
area  of  the  type  is  but  half  of  the  entire 
area.  The  other  half  must  be  quadrats, 
leads,  quotations,  furniture,  etc.  The  pro- 
vision of  fat  matter  of  this  nature  for  a 
job  ofl&ee  should  be,  in  bulk,  as  great  as 
that  of  type.  Most  job  offices  are  sadly 
deficient  in  blanking-out  material.  Where 
this  is  the  case,  the  compositor  works  to 
disadvantage,  and  the  office  loses  more 
than  the  value  of  the  deficient  material. 

Get  plenty  of  leads.  The  free  use  of 
leads  is  not  only  profitable  in  measurement, 
but  is  of  economical  advantage  in  extend- 
ing the  capacity  of  the  font. 


76 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Peice  List. 


PRICE  LIST  OF  TYPE  FROM  A^Y  FOUNDRY 
IN  THE  UNITED  STATES. 
Price  per  pound. 


Roman,  Italic 

and  German. 

Antique 
Condensed, 

Shaded, 

sizes. 

In  fonts  less 

In  fonts  over 

Title, 

Ornamented, 

Superiors. 

Signs. 

tliau  25  lbs. 

2.5  lbs. 

Borders,  etc. 

Script,  etc. 

Diamond .    .  . 

$2.50 

$1.50 

$2.50 

$3.20 

Pearl  .... 

1.80 

1.08 

1.80 

2.80 

$2.80 

Agate  .... 

1.44 

.68 

1.44 

2.40 

2.40 

$1.44 

Nonpareil    .  . 

1.16 

.58 

1.16 

2.00 

2.00 

1.06 

Minion     .    .  . 

1.00 

.52 

1.00 

1.80 

1.80 

1.00 

Brevier    .    .  . 

.90 

.48 

.90 

1.60 

1.60 

.90 

Bonrgeois    .  . 

.80 

.44 

.80 

1.44 

1.44 

.80 

Long  primer  . 

.74 

.42 

.74 

1.30 

1.30 

.74 

Small  pica  .  . 

.70 

.40 

.70 

1.22 

1.22 

.70 

Pica  .... 

.66 

.38 

.66 

1.16 

1.16 

.66 

English   .    .  . 

1.12 

Roman, 

Antique 

Roman, 

Antique 

Italic, 

Con- 

Shaded, 

Italic, 

Con- 

Shaded, 

German. 

densed, 

Orna- 

German. 

densed, 

Orna- 

Sizes. 

Fonts  of 

Title, 

mented, 

sizes. 

Fonts  of 

Title, 

meuted. 

S  j  lbs. 

Borders, 

Script, 

2.5  lbs. 

Borders, 

Script, 

and  over 

etc. 

etc. 

and  over 

etc. 

etc. 

English  .    .  . 

$  .38 

$  .62 

$1.10 

Canon.    .    .  . 

$  38 

$  .54 

$  .72 

Columbian  .  . 

.38 

.60 

Four-line  pica  . 

.38 

.54 

.72 

Great  primer  . 

.38 

.60 

1.00 

Five-line  pica  . 

.38 

.52 

.64 

Paragon  .    .  . 

.38 

.60 

.94 

Six-line  pica 

.38 

.52 

.64 

Dbl.  smaU  pica 

.38 

.56 

.90 

Seven -line  pica . 

.38 

.50 

.60 

Double  pica 

.38 

.56 

.90 

Eight-line  pica . 

.38 

.50 

.60 

Two-1.  English . 

.38 

.56 

.86 

Nine-line  pica  . 

.48 

.58 

Two-Hne  great 

Ten-Line  pica  . 

.48 

.58 

primer    .  . 

.38 

.56 

.82 

Eleven-line  pica 

.46 

.56 

Double  paragon 

.38 

.54 

.78 

Twelve-line  pica 

.46 

.56 

PIECE  FRACTIONS. 

LEADS. 

Per  lb. 

Per  lb. 

Brevier  (half -brevier  body)  . 

.  $3.50 

Six  to  pica  or  thicker 

.  $  .18 

Bourgeois  (diamond  body)  . 

.  3.20 

Seven  to  pica 

24 

Long  primer  (pearl  body)  . 

.  2.80 

Eight  to  pica 

28 

Small  pica  (agate  body)  .  . 

.  2.40 

Nine  to  pica 

44 

Pica  (nonpareil  body) 

.  2.00 

.56 

MISCELLANEOUS. 

Per  font.                                                Per  set.  Each. 

Comb'n  borders  $2.00 «»  $18.00    Corners  &  centres  250.®  $6.25  Brass  circles  60c. 

Brass  flourishes  5.00  <(»    8.00    Brass  braces  .    .    .    5.00  Brass  dashes  10c. 

Metal  flourishes  5.00  <®  25.00    Circular  quads   .    .    3.50  Brass  ovals  90c. 


ELECTROTYPING 

AND 

STEREOTYPING. 


ELECTBOTYPING  AND  STEBEOTYPING. 


CONTENTS. 

Page. 


Part  I. — Electrotypeng. — Arrangement  of  the  Establishment. 

Preparing  the  Forms:    Composition — Locking-up — Wood-Cuts — Correction  Matter — 

Washing — Black-leading,  by  Hand  and  by  Machine   80 

Making  the  Mould :  The  Moulding  Case — Filling — Toggle  and  Hydraulic  Presses — The 

Cloth — Eemoving  the  Form — Building — The  Irons — Building  Wax    ....  84 

Black-leading  and  Coating  the  Mould:  Black-leading — Selection  of  Graphite  —  The  Wet 
Process  —  The  Nucleus — The  Connection  Gripper — Coppering — Silvering — Gild- 
ing— Adams's  Process — Tin  Powder — Stopping  off — Quicking  —  Dispelling  the 
Air   87 

Depositing:  Batteries  —  Single-Solution  Batteries  —  Smee's — WoUaston's — Double  So- 
lution —  Bunsen's  —  Darnell's  —  Leclanch^'s  —  Hoe's  —  Management  —  Defective 
Deposit  —  Amalgamating  —  The  Dynamo-Electric  Machine  —  Conductors  and 
Connections — Connecting — Copper  Solution     .    93 

The  Shells :  Thickness  —  Eemoving — Tinning   99 

Backing,  FinisMug,  and  Blocking:  Electrotyping  from  Plaster  Moulds  100 

Part  II. — Stereotyping. — The  Plaster  Process. 

Preparing  the  Form:  Oiling — Moulding  from  Gelatine  Plates  —  The  Plaster — Rolling — 

Removing — Picks  107 

Casting:  The  Pans — Casting — The  Crane  —  The  Cooling  Trough — Remelting — Color 

Blocks   109 

Clay  Process. 

Moulding  Composition — Moulding — Press — Furnace  113 

Papier-Mache  Process. 

The  Paste  :  The  Form — Matrix  Paper — Moulding — Beating  Table — Drying  Press — 
Preparing  for  Casting — Rolling  Machine  —  "Type,  Presses,  and  the  Wee  Sma' 

Hours"   115 

The  Metal:    Qualities  —  Fluxing — Old  and  Dirty  Metal — Furnace  119 

Casting:    Plate  Mould — Casting — Separating  the  Matrix  121 

Backing,  Finishing,  and  Blocking :  Backing — The  Stand — Metal — Steam  Melting  Table 
— Finishing — Saw  Table  —  Trimming — Planing — Bringing  up  Low  Places — 
Defective  Letters — Shaving  Machine — Chiselling — Bevelling — Dressing  Curved 

Plates  —  Routing — Alterations  123 

Mounting:   Blocking — The  Wood — Nailing — Height — Squaring — The   Shoot-board — 

Mortising — Mounting  on  Metal  125 


Appendices. 


A. — Materials.    B. — Antidotes  for  Poisons.  C. — Relative  Power  of  Batteries.  D. — Tests 

for  Impurities  132 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


79 


I. 

ELECTBOTYPING. 

As  applied  to  letter-press  printing,  electrotyping  is  strictly  an  American  art. 
Experiments  were  made,  both  in  England  and  France,  some  years  ago,  but  all 
proved  failures  in  practice.  In  1841,  Mr.  Joseph  A.  Adams,  a  wood-engraver 
of  this  city,  reproduced  and  printed  an  engraving  in  a  magazine  published  by 
James  J.  Mapes,  in  New- York;  he  also,  in  1843,  electrotyped  the  various 
borders  around  the  larger  engravings  in  "  Harpei"'s  Illustrated  Bible."  Mr. 
Daniel  Davis,  of  Boston,  a  manufacturer  of  magnetic  machines,  in  1842,  made 
and  used  electrotype  plates  of  engravings  and  letter-press  in  his  "  Manual  of 
Magnetism " ;  but  he  made  no  trade  of  it.  To  Mr.  Wilcox,  of  the  last-named 
city,  is  due  the  credit  of  first  making  a  business  of  electrotyping  shortly  after, 
and  also  the  credit  of  making  many  early  improvements  of  importance.  He 
was  followed  by  Filmer,  Gay,  Lovejoy,  Wheeler,  Ferguson,  Knight,  Ward,  and 
others,  each  making  contributions  more  or  less  valuable  to  this  art,  which  now 
ranks  next  in  importance  ,to  printing. 

The  following  familiar  account  of  the  process  of  electrotyping,  with 
descriptions  of  the  most  improved  machinery  and  tools  now  in  use  in  the 
best  establishments  in  the  United  States,  should  make  the  practice  of  the  art 
perfectly  simple : 

Electrotyping,  as  distinguished  from  electroplating,  is  duplicating  printing 
surfaces  in  copper  by  means  of  a  galvanic  current,  and  suitably  mounting 
them  for  use  on  the  press. 

To  effect  the  whole  operation  intelligently  and  weU  demands  special  knowl- 
edge on  the  part  of  the  compositor,  the  electrotyper  proper,  and  the  mounter. 

ARRANGEMENT   OF   THE  ESTABLISHMENT. 

It  is  necessary,  for  work  on  a  large  scale,  to  have  a  depositing  room,  vats 
for  solutions,  scouring  and  cleaning  apparatus,  batteries  (or  a  magneto-electric 
machine),  etc.,  etc. 

The  depositing  room  is  best  on  the  ground  floor,  on  account  of  the  weight 
of  the  vats.  It  should  have  a  cemented  and  drained  floor,  be  weU  Lighted  and 
ventilated,  and  have  a  plentiful  water  supply. 

Vats  for  siilphate  of  copper  solution  are  usually  of  wood,  lined  with  pitch. 
Cedar  makes  the  best. 

The  batteries  should  be  in  a  separate  and  open  room,  as  their  vapors  are 
very  nauseous.  Where  a  dynamo  machine  is  used,  it  should  be  away  from  the 
vats,  on  account  of  the  moisture. 


80 


E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


PREPARING  THE  FORMS. 

Wien  forms  are  to  be  electrotyped,  it  is  necessary  that  great  care  should, 
be  exercised  in  choosing  the  type,  rules,  etc.,  in  justifying  the  matter,  and  in 
locking  up  the  form. 

COMPOSITION. 

Every  quad,  space,  lead,  slug,  reglet,  or  piece  of  furniture  should  be  high. 

Some  leads  have  one  or  both  edges  bevelled ;  but  even  though  the  bevel  is 
small  it  is  sufficient  to  cause  considerable  trouble,  and  such  leads  should  not  be 
used  in  moulding,  as  the  wax  is  sure  to  be  forced  into  the  space  of  the  bevel,  to 
be  broken  off,  and  to  require  extra  labor  in  distributing  the  type,  besides  mak- 
ing it  necessary  to  scrape  the  wax  from  the  leads  before  they  can  be  used  again. 

So  far  as  possible,  use  thick  rules,  and  those  having  a  bevel  on  each  side  of 
the  face.  Thin  rules  make  so  small  an  opening  in  the  wax  there  is  great  diffi- 
culty in  black-leading  the  mould,  and  in  the  battery  the  copper  may  bridge 
across  a  small  opening,  leaving  the  face  and  sides  of  the  rule  uncovered,  or  at 
most  with  but  a  thin,  imperfect  deposit  that  is  useless.  For  this  reason,  type 
having  considerable  bevel  is  best  for  electrotyping.  English  type  has  more 
bevel  than  American.  Bevelled  rules  also  make  impressions  in  which  the 
hairs  of  the  black-leading  brush  can  penetrate  more  deeply.  Type-high  bear- 
ers or  guards,  about  one-fourth  of  an  inch  thick,  should  be  put  around  each 
page  and  scattered  through  the  blank  spaces,  to  prevent  the  wax  from  spread- 
ing while  the  form  is  pressed  in  it,  and  also  to  facilitate  the  operation  of 
"  backing."  If  there  are  several  pages  in  a  form,  separate  them  by  two  guards; 
one  guard  does  not  give  sufficient  room  to  saw  between  the  pages  and  leave 
enough  of  the  bearer  to  protect  the  edges  of  the  plate  in  shaving.  When  the 
matter  occupies  but  a  portion  of  a  page,  or  the  lines  are  shorter  than  the  fuU 
width  of  the  page,  as  in  poetry,  an  em  dash  or  a  letter  should  be  placed  bottom 
up  in  each  corner  of  the  page,  as  a  guide  for  the  finisher  in  trimming  the  plate. 
When  the  foUo  is  at  one  corner,  that  will  answer  for  one  of  the  guides. 

All  large  blanks,  chapter  heads,  and  lines  unprotected  by  other  matter  should 
have  type-high  bearers,  so  placed  as  to  guard  the  exposed  parts  from  injury. 

LOCKING  UP. 

If,  whUe  trying  to  plane  down  and  lock  up  a  form,  the  spaces  and  leads  are 
found  to  rise  to  a  level  with  the  face  of  the  type,  it  is  a  sure  indication  that 
either  the  matter  was  not  properly  justified,  the  guards  or  rules  bind  so  as  to 
cause  some  parts  of  the  form  to  be  tighter  than  other  parts,  or  the  chase, 
furniture,  or  quoins  are  not  square  and  true. 

Use  plenty  of  quoins,  and  lock  forms  much  tighter  than  for  printing,  for, 
in  order  that  the  mould  shaU  be  perfect,  the  wax  must  enter  and  fill  solidly  aU 
the  interstices  of  the  form.  To  accomplish  this  requires  a  very  great  pressure, 
and  the  movement  of  the  wax  caused  by  the  entering  of  the  type  in  taking  the 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue.  81 

mould  is  very  likely  to  displace  any  portions  of  the  form  that  may  be  at  all 
loose — sometimes  the  spread  of  the  wax  being  sufficient  to  bend  rules  or  break 
small  type  in  exposed  situations. 

Forms  containing  curved  lines  should  be  filled  solid  to  the  shoulder  of  the 
type  with  plaster. 

It  must  not  be  supposed  that  because  a  proof,  taken  when  the  quoins  are 
merely  pressed  up  with  the  fingers,  shows  the  lines  to  be  straight  and  the  form 
square  and  true,  that  it  will  be  so  when  tightly  locked.  A  proof  should  always 
be  taken  after  the  form  is  locked  up  for  the  foundiy,  and  both  form  and  proof 
examined,  to  make  sure  that  no  part  has  moved  from  its  proper  place  in  driving 
the  quoins.  Place  a  quoin  under  one  side  of  the  chase,  and  by  pressing  forcibly 
on  different  portions  of  the  form  with  the  thumb,  ascertain  whether  there  are 
any  loose  spots ;  if  so,  they  must  be  made  tight,  or  the  wax  will  be  Ukely  to 
be  forced  between  and  separate  the  lines,  or  else  when  drawing  the  mould  it 
will  pull  the  loose  type  out  of  the  form.  Crooked  lines  in  plates,  and  pied 
forms,  are  almost  invariably  due  to  lack  of  knowledge  or  care  on  the  part  of 
the  compositor. 

Sometimes  matter  is  set  with  high  spaces  but  low  leads,  or  high  leads  but 
low  spaces,  or  low  spaces  but  no  leads — one  portion  of  a  form  high  spaces  and 
another  portion  low  spaces ;  frequently  copper-faced  and  white-faced  type  are 
used  in  the  same  form.  None  of  these  combinations  should  be  allowed,  but 
the  whole  form  should  be  either  high  spaces  and  high  leads,  or  low  spaces  and 
low  leads.  A  satisfactory  plate,  for  fine  printing,  from  a  form  set  with  low 
spaces  and  no  leads,  or  with  low  spaces  and  high  leads,  is  a  result  that  may  be 
hoped  for,  but  rarely,  if  ever,  realized,  unless  the  type  is  large. 

In  offices  having  no  high  quads,  etc.,  low  material  must  be  used,  but  greater 
care  is  necessary  in  preparing  the  form,  more  labor  is  required  of  the  electro- 
typer,  and  the  plate  is  usually  much  less  satisfactory  than  when  high  material 
is  used. 

Wood-cuts  are  locked  up  in  the  same  way  as  type,  but,  before  black-leading, 
they  must  be  perfectly  cleaned  with  naphtha  or  benzine  from  the  ink  which  is 
commonly  adhering  to  them,  and  dried  thoroughly.  Great  care  must  be  taken 
that  no  particles  of  black-lead  clog  the  fine  lines  of  the  engraving,  as  very  much 
depends  upon  the  preparation  of  the  form  for  moulding.  Where  cuts  and  type 
are  in  the  same  form  together,  the  cuts,  of  course,  if  they  be  low,  must  be 
brought  up  to  exact  type  height  by  proper  underlaying. 

Avoid  using  electrotype  cuts  to  make  duplicates  from,  as  a  much  better 
mould  can  generally  be  made  from  the  wood-cut. 

Always  send  to  the  electrotyper  with  a  form  or  cut,  a  clean  proof  of  the 
same. 

CORRECTION  MATTER. 

When  necessary  to  make  alterations  in  plates,  the  matter  for  the  corrections 
should  be  set  up  and  electrotyped ;  but  the  compositor  should  separate  each 
correction  by  a  space  of  about  a  pica,  in  order  that  there  may  be  room  to  saw 
between  them.  If  the  alteration  is  but  a  single  letter  or  short  word,  it  is  cus- 
tomary to  solder  the  type  in  the  plate.    Should  the  correction  requii'e  more, 


82  R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 

or  less,  room  than  the  matter  to  be  cut  away,  the  whole  line,  or  several  lines,, 
should  be  set  up,  so  that  the  spacing  may  be  regulated. 

By  setting  up  corrections  in  their  regular  order,  as  far  as  practicable,  and 
marldng  proofs  distinctly,  the  labor  and  cost  of  plate  alterations  may  fi'equently 
be  very  much  reduced. 

A  due  attention  to  the  foregoing  hints  will  be  of  material  advantage  to  the 
compositor,  the  electrotyper,  and  the  printer. 


Iron-Topped  Case-Filling  Table ;  Wax  Kettle  and  Steam  Heating  Table. 


Prices  of  Iron  Case-Filling  Tables. 


3 
5 


For  No.  1  to  No.  3  case 
For  No.  4  to  No.  5  case 


Price. 

$27.50 
37.50 


No. 

7 


Price.^ 


For  No.  6  to  No.  7  case  $ 


Prices  of  Steam  Seating  Tables. 

No.  Price.       I     No.  Price. 

3  For  No.  1  to  No.  3  case  $55.00  7  For  No.  6  to  No.  7  case  $ 
5     For  No.  4  to  No.  5  case       72.00    |  Pipe  and  connections  extra. 


Prices  of  Iron  Steam  Wax  Kettles. 

Price.  Price. 

Nine-inch  diameter     .    .    .    $25.00   |   Twelve-inch  diameter  .    .    .  $30.00 

Pipe  and  connections  extra. 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


83 


WASHING. 

Before  black-leading  the  forms  to  prevent  sticking  in  the  wax,  they  should 
be  thoroughly  washed  with  lye  or  benzine  if  they  be  very  dirty ;  with  clean 
water  if  not  very  dirty.  A  rubber  pipe  and  rose  sprinkler  will  do  this  work 
well.    They  should  then  be  dried. 

BLACK-LEADING    THE  FORM. 

To  prevent  sticking  of  the  form  to  the  wax,  its  face  should  be  very  carefuUy 
and  thoroughly  black-leaded,  the  black-lead  being  made  to  penetrate  every 
crevice.  For  this  purpose  a  soft  hand-brush  is  used.  It  is  essential  that  the 
fine  lines  of  the  form  should  not  be  filled  up  with  black-lead.  The  film  allowed 
•  to  remain  should  be  practically  devoid  of  thickness,  in  order  that  the  mould 
may  be  an  exact  copy  of  the  form. 


Toggle  Press  for  Electrotype  Moulds,  with  Fixed  Head. 
Price,  $325. 


84 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


Toggle  Press  with  Lifting  Head,  for  Electrotype  Moulds. 


Price  of  Toggle  Moulding  Press,  with  Swinging  Head. 

Size  of  matter.  Price. 

Toggle  moulding  press,  with  swinging  head  .    .    .    18  x  24  inches.  $550.00 


MAKING  THE  MOULD. 

The  moulding  case  is  a  flat  brass  pan  aboiit  three-sixteenths  of  an  inch  deep, 
with  two  flanges,  which  fit  into  the  clamps  of  the  moulding  press.  The  back 
of  the  pan  must  be  planed  smooth. 

The  moulding  composition  is  made  of  the  best  pure  yellow  beeswax.  In  a 
temperature  of  ninety  to  ninety-five  degrees,  the  wax  may  need  no  admixture ; 
but  if  the  room  is  cooler,  it  should  be  prevented  from  cracking  by  the  addition 
of  from  five  to  twenty  per  cent,  of  virgin  turpentine. 

New  wax  should  be  l)oiled  several  hours  before  pouring  into  the  moulding 
case;  old  wax,  only  long  enough  to  evaporate  all  moisture.  Care  must  be 
taken  not  to  have  too  much  heat,  or  the  wax  will  be  burned,  and  rendered 
quite  useless.  Steam  is  much  the  l)est  for  this  piirpose,  as  with  it  the  wax  is 
not  so  likely  to  be  overheated. 


E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


85 


FILLING   THE  CASE. 

The  moulding  ease,  having  been  slightly  warmed  on  the  steam  heating  table, 
is  placed  on  the  level  case-filling  table  and  the  melted  wax  is  poured  into 
it  with  a  clean  iron  or  copper  ladle,  great  care  beiag  taken  to  run  the  wax 
entirely  over  the  case  while  it  is  hot,  so  that  it  may  not,  by  cooling  too  quickly 
in  any  part,  cause  irregularities.  The  air-bubbles  which  rise  to  the  sxirface 
must  be  touched  with  the  heated  building  iron,  when  they  wUl  disappear. 

Should  the  wax,  in  cooling,  shrink  away  from  the  edges  of  the  case,  it  can 
be  remelted  there  by  running  the  heated  iron  over  it,  so  as  to  close  up  any 
fissure.  When  the  wax  has  become  cool,  it  should  present  a  smooth,  even 
surface ;  otherwise,  it  is  useless,  and  it  is  better  put  back  into  the  pot  and 
melted  over  again.  The  whole  surface  should  now  be  caref uUy  and  thoroughly 
rubbed  over  with  black-lead,  and  pohshed  by  means  of  the  soft  brush  alluded 
to,  after  which  the  wax  is  ready  for  the  impression. 


Hydraulic  Press  for  Electrotype  Moulds. 


Prices  of  Hydraulic  Moulding  Presses,  with  Solid  Heads. 

Size  of  matter. 

Hydraulic  moulding  press,  with  solid  head  .  .  .  .  21  x  28  in. 
Hydraulic  moulding  press,  with  solid  head,  to  work  by 

power   

Hydraulic  moulding  press,  with  solid  head,  with  single 

hand  pump  24  x  32  in. 

Hydraulic  moulding  press,  with  solid  head,  with  patent 

accumulator   24  x  32  in. 


Price. 

$800.00 


1150.00 


86 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


THE  PBESSES. 

To  make  the  impression  of  the  form  in  the  wax,  a  great  and  steady  pressure  is 
needed.  To  give  this,  there  may  be  employed  either  a  "  toggle "  press  or  a 
"  hydraulic  "  press. 

The  "  toggle "  press  consists,  in  one  form,  of  a  massive  frame,  having 
a  planed  bed,  over  which  is  a  fixed  head.  There  is  a  projecting  table,  on 
which  the  form  and  case  may  be  arranged  before  sliding  them  in  to  receive 
the  pressure,  which  is  put  upon  them  by  raising  the  bed  by  means  of  the 
screw  and  two  toggles. 

The  swinging-head  toggle  press  has  a  solid  frame  with  a  planed  movable 
bed,  over  which  is  a  head,  swung  on  pivots,  and  so  counterbalanced  that 
it  can  be  readily  thrown  up,  leaving  the  whole  bed  exposed,  the  black-lead 
case  being  clamped  on  the  bed ;  the  type  form,  also  black-leaded,  is  carefully 
placed  on  the  case,  and  the  head  is  turned  over  and  held  down  by  the  swinging 
front  piece  shown,  turned  back  to  the  right.  The  toggle  pressure  is  then  put 
on  by  the  hand  wheel  and  screw  shown ;  and  the  result  of  the  combined 
mechanical  forces,  the  wheel  and  axle,  the  screw  and  the  toggle,  is  an  enor- 
mous pressure  with  but  little  manual  exertion. 

THE   HYDRAULIC  PRESS. 

The  hydraulic  press  has  projecting  rails  and  a  sliding  plate,  on  which  the 
form  and  case  are  prepared  before  being  placed  in  the  press.  The  pump, 
which  is  hand-worked,  is  supported  by  a  framework  on  the  cistern  below 
the  cylinder,  and  has  a  gi'aduated  adjustable  safety-valve  to  give  any  desired 
pressure.  As  shown,  it  takes  up  a  floor  space  of  4  ft.  6  ia.  x  4  ft.  6  in., 
and  takes  in  a  form  24  x  32  inches.  The  maximum  pressure  which  it  exerts  is 
80  tons.    It  may  be  arranged  to  be  worked  by  power. 

The  exact  depth  of  impression  can  be  attained  only  by  practice. 

THE  CLOTH. 

Where  low  spaces  are  used,  it  is  customary  to  make  a  preliminary  impression 
with  a  thin  sheet  of  gum  cloth  interposed ;  this  is  then  removed  and  the  press- 
ure put  on  again.  Where  the  cloth  is  not  used,  it  is  necessary  to  shave  off,  with 
a  wide,  thin  knife,  the  projecting  wax  ridges. 

Where  the  form  is  large,  but  one  impression  is  taken  in  the  wax,  but  small 
ones  may  be  applied  several  times,  shifting  them  over  the  surface. 

REMOVING   THE  FORM. 

Where  the  swinging  head  is  not  used,  should  the  form  stick  in  the  wax,  it  may 
be  relieved  by  touching  the  chase  gently  in  two  or  three  places  with  a  long 
screw-driver,  so  as  not  to  break  the  face  of  the  wax.  When  once  the  form  or 
engraving  is  withdrawn  from  the  wax,  after  making  a  final  impression,  it  must 
not  be  reentered,  as  it  probably  would  not  go  exactly  into  the  same  place 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue.  87 

again,  and  the  impression  would  be  rough.  Now  remove  the  case  from  the 
clamps  and  place  it  upon  a  table  ready  for  the  process  of 


BUILDING. 

This  operation  requires  skill  and  a  steady  hand.  A  weU-built  mould  will  save  a 
great  deal  of  trouble  in  the  stages  which  follow,  as  the  object  is  to  obviate,  as 
much  as  possible,  the  necessity  of  chiselling  the  plates.  Wax  is  run  or  built  on 
the  places  where  blanks  are  to  be.    This  building  is  performed  with 


THE   BUILDING  IRON, 


which  is  heated  and  applied  to  a  strip 
of  wax,  melting  it  and  causing  it  to 
flow  down  from  the  point  of  the  iron 
on  to  the  blanks  of  the  mould.  This 
process  cannot  be  easily  taught ;  but 
it  must  be  acquired  by  careful  prac- 
tice. The  great  difficulty  is,  to  prevent  the  wax  from  running  where  it  is  not 
required.    A  quick  eye  and  steady  hand  will  do  this. 


The  Building  Iron. 
Price,  $3.50. 


BUILDING  WAX. 

The  wax  used  in  building  should  be  cut  in  strips  eight  to  ten  inches  long,  five- 
eighths  wide,  three-eighths  thick,  and  must  be  kept  perfectly  dry.  If  any  por- 
tion gets  damp,  it  is  best  not  to  use  it  for  building  purposes,  as  there  is  danger 
of  its  spattering  over  the  moidd.    The  building  iron  must  not  be  too  hot. 


BLACK-LEADING  AND   COATING  THE  MOULD. 


After  the  wax  mould  is  properly  built,  it  is  ready  for  black-leading,  which  is 
necessary  to  give  it  a  conducting  surface  and  cause  the  copper  to  be  gradually 
deposited  over  every  part  of  it. 

Black-lead  for  this  purpose  must  be  absolutely  pure,  with  a  bright  lustre, 
free  from  grit,  and  very  fine.*  If  it  is  inferior  and  dead-looking,  it  is  worse 
than  useless.  It  should  be  thoroughly  worked  into  every  letter  and  line,  or  it 
is  useless  to  put  the  mould  into  the  precipitating  ceU  or  vat,  for  the  copper  will 
not  be  deposited  perfectly  over  its  surface. 

*  The  purest  selected  Ceylon  lumps  should  be  pulverized  by  rolling  with  heavy  iron  balls, 
which  make  it  an  infinitely  fine  powder,  instead  of  scales.  It  should  be  pulverized  imtil  the 
particles  will  not  glisten,  but  the  mass  becomes  a  dead  black.  It  should  be  separated  by  air 
floating,  or  by  floating  in  a  bath  of  dilute  sulphuric  acid,  which  will  take  up  the  particles  of 
spar  and  iron,  leaving  the  sulphates  of  Ume,  magnesia,  and  iron  easily  washed  out. 


88 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


Black-Leading  Machine. 
Sizes  and  Prices  of  Black-Leading  Machines. 

No.  Size  of  m.atter.  Price.       I     No.  Size  of  matter.  Price. 

4  .    .    15X20  inches    .    .   $175.00   \   1    .    .    24x32  inelies    .    .  $250.00 

5  .    .    18  X  24  iuches    .    .     200.00   i   Apparatus  for  steam  power,  30.00 

BLACK-LEADING   THE  MOULDS. 

This  operation  has  for  its  object  the  covering  of  the  non-conducting  wax  with 
a  conducting  surface  on  which  the  copper  fihn  will  deposit  readily,  but  to  which 
it  shall  not  adhere.  Naturally,  black-leading  the  moulds  requires  better  mate- 
rial and  greater  care  than  was  required  to  prevent  the  forms  sticking  in 
the  wax.    To  effect  it,  either  a  hand  brush  or  a  machine  may  be  used. 

When  a  brush  is  used,  it  should  have  a  large  and  thick  body  of  short  hairs. 

Above  is  shown  a  black-leading  machine,  with  its  cover  removed. 

It  has  a  travelling  carriage  holding  one  or  more  forms,  and  passing  back- 
ward and  forward  under  a  laterally  vibrating  brush.  A  case  12  x  28  inches 
can  be  leaded  in  two  minutes.  An  apron  under  the  machine  catches  the 
powder  and  prevents  waste. 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


89 


After  this  operation  has  been  thoroughly  performed,  the  superfluous 
graphite  must  be  blown  out  of  the  lines  of  the  mould  by  a  flat-nosed  bellows, 
or  brushed  out,  so  that  the  thickness  of  the  graphite  film  shall  be  as  nearly 
nothing  as  possible,  and  thus  insure  clean,  sharp,  fine  lines. 

The  dry  black-leading  machine,  just  described,  has  the  disadvantage  of 
being  comparatively  wasteful  of  graphite,  causing  great  dirt  in  the  room,  and 
being  unhealthfiil  to  the  operators ;  fiu'thermore,  a  form  black-leaded  with 
dry  powder  is  apt  to  repel  the  liquid  in  the  bath,  by  reason  of  clods  clinging 
in  bubbles.  Where  the  dry  process  is  employed,  the  superfluous  graphite 
must  be  blown  out  by  a  broad-nosed  bellows, —  not  a  loose  particle  being 
allowed  to  remain ;  or,  the  copper  being  deposited  over  it,  a  rough  and  faulty 
electrotype  wUl  result.  The  mould,  held  to  the  light,  should  reflect  it  from  aU 
parts  of  its  polished  face. 

The  wet  process^  the  invention  of  Mr.  SUas  P.  Knight,  the  chief  of  the 
electrotyping  department  of  Messrs.  Harper  Bros.,  New- York,  is  designed  to 
work  more  quickly  and  neatly,  producing  moulds  that  are  thinly,  evenly,  and 
perfectly  covered,  not  omitting  the  dot  to  an  i,  nor  allowing  "bridging"  over 
fine  lines. 

There  is  a  chest  provided  with  a  sheK,  on  which  the  moulds  are  placed ;  and 
a  rotary  pump  forces  an  emulsion  of  graphite  and  water,  through  a  travelling 
fine-rose  nozzle,  over  the  moulds.  The  capacity,  neatness,  economy,  and  effect- 
iveness of  this  machine  deserve  high  commendation. 


Moulding  Case,  with  Patent  Electric  Connection  Gripper. 
Price,  $ 


90 


E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


STOPPING. 

The  back  and  edges  of  the  moulding  case  must  be  coated  with  hot  wax  after  it 
is  black-leaded,  to  prevent  the  copper  forming  upon  it.  To  prevent  the  deposit 
of  copper  oh  any  places  where  it  is  not  wanted,  the  hot  building  iron  is  run 
over  them,  so  as  to  destroy  the  continidty  of  the  black-lead  surface,  and  leave 
a  non-conducting  wax  face. 

THE  NUCLEUS. 

The  black-lead  being  a  poorer  conductor  than  metal,  and  its  whole  surface  not 
being  in  the  current  at  once,  it  is  necessary  to  have  some  nucleus  of  metal  on 
which  the  copper  deposit  may  commence.  This  is  sometimes  provided  by 
removing  the  wax  from  the  rim  of  the  brass  case — if  the  "connection 
gripper"  be  not  used;  on  this  the  deposit  will  gradually  begin,  and  spread 
over  the  whole  surface  of  the  wax.  Another  way  is  to  fasten  a  piece  of  metal 
to  the  wax  at  the  top  of  the  mould,  and  connect  it  with  the  metal  by  a  copper 
wire,  perfectly  clean,  wound  around  the  connecting  rod. 

PATENT  ELECTRIC   CONNECTION  GRIPPER. 

This  is  made  to  hold  and  sustain  the  moulding  case,  and  at  the  same  time  to 
make  an  electric  connection  with  the  prepared  conducting  face  of  the  mould 
only ;  consequently  leaving  the  metal  case  itself  entirely  out  of  the  current  of 
electricity,  so  that  no  copper  can  be  precipitated  on  it.  This  prevents  the 
necessity  of  plastering  hot  wax  on  the  back  and  edges  of  the  case  before 
immersion  in  the  precipitating  cell,  and  also  saves  the  time  expended  in 
removing  the  wax  from  its  back  before  it  can  be  used  again.  It  is  simple  and 
easy  to  manage. 

COPPERING,   SILVERING,   GILDING,  ETC. 

The  conducting  power  of  black-lead  is  greatly  improved  by  gilding  or  silvering, 
or  by  mixing  with  one-third  its  weight  of  finest  white  bronze  powder. 

Gilding  powder  is  made  of  one  part  of  chloride  of  gold  dissolved  in  100  of 
sulphuric  ether,  and  added  to  50  of  plumbago  ;  mix,  expose  in  a  can  to  sun- 
light, stirring  until  dry ;  apply  by  brushing. 

Coppering.  By  a  simple  and  ingenious  patented  device  of  Mr.  S.  P.  Knight, 
the  mould  may  be  at  once  coated  with  a  thin  film  of  copper,  to  cause  uniform 
deposition  over  its  entire  face.  The  graphited  wax  mould  being  dusted  from  a 
pepper-box  with  impalpably  fine  iron-filings,  which  are  in  some  cases  brushed, 
is  next  sprinkled  with  a  solution  of  sulphate  of  copper  (bhie  vitriol),  which 
causes  the  precipitation  of  pure  metallic  copper  over  the  entire  mould.  Should 
any  portion  remain  uncoppered,  the  operation  must  be  repeated.  The  excess 
is  washed  off,  and  the  mould  is  then  ready  for  the  bath. 

Some  establishments  reverse  this  operation ;  fli-st  pouring  the  solution  of 
sulphate  on  the  mould,  and  then  dusting  with  the  iron  filings  ;  stating  that  the 
first  method  may  wash  off  some  of  the  filings. 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


91 


THE    ADAMS    PROCESS    FOR    COVERING    MOULDS    WITH  A 
METALLIC  SURFACE. 

This  process,  patented  in  1870,  gives  a  perfect  surface  witli  more  certainty  and 
rapidity  than  any  other. 

While  the  wax  is  still  warm  in  the  moulding  case,  apply  finely  powdered  tin 
with  a  soft  brush  until  the  surface  presents  a  bright,  metallic  appearance. 
Then  brush  off  superfluous  powder. 

The  form  of  type  or  wood-cut  is  first  coated  with  black-lead,  to  insure  the 
separation  of  the  mould  from  it,  and  an  impression  is  taken  in  the  wax. 

Build  up  and  connect  the  mould  in  the  usual  manner.  Then  brush  tin 
powder  over  it  by  hand  or  machine,  and,  after  blowing  out,  touch  with  a  hot 
block  building  iron  all  parts  of  the  mould  on  which  the  copper  is  not  to  be 
precipitated. 

Immerse  it  in  alcohol,  then  wash  with  water  to  remove  the  aii*  from  the 
surface,  and  it  is  ready  to  be  suspended  in  a  solution,  which  should  be  made 
as  follows : 

Fill  a  precipitating  cell  nearly  full  with  water,  keeping  an  account  of  the 
niunber  of  gallons  poured  in ;  hang  a  bag  of  sulphate  of  copper  crystals  in 
the  top  of  it  until  the  water  is  saturated ;  for  every  gallon  of  water  add  from 
a  half -pint  to  three  gills  of  sulphuric  acid,  and  mix  the  whole  thoroughly. 

In  this  solution  hang  a  sheet  of  copper,  connecting  it  with  the  negative 
plates  of  the  battery,  and  when  the  solution  becomes  cool  and  settled,  immerse 
the  mould  and  connect  it  with  the  positive  or  zinc  pole  of  the  battery,  when 
the  surface  of  the  mould  will  be  quickly  covered  with  thin  copper.  Then 
remove  for  completion  to  another  and  larger  precipitating  cell,  containing  a 
solution  made  in  the  proportion  of  one  pound  of  sulphate  of  copper  and  one 
giU  of  sulphuric  acid  to  each  gallon  of  water. 

If  sulphate  of  copper  crystals  form  on  the  copper  plate  in  the  fli'st  pre- 
cipitating trough,  detach  it  and  dissolve  them  off,  substituting  for  it  a  clean 
plate. 

When  the  sohition  in  the  first  precipitating  cell  has  become  nearly  satu- 
rated with  tin,  which  will  happen  after  a  long  time,  it  should  be  thrown  away 
and  replaced  with  fresh. 

This  process  of  using  a  metaUic  powder  in  connection  with  black-lead,  or 
in  place  of  it,  accomplishes  in  a  few  minutes  what,  with  black-lead  alone, 
requires  from  two  to  four  hours. 

DIRECTIONS    FOR   THE    USE    OP    TIN    POWDER,    WITHOUT  CHANGING 
THE   MOULD   FROM   ONE   SOLUTION   TO  ANOTHER. 

Black-lead  the  face  of  the  wax  mould  while  stiU  warm,  and  prepare  the  form 
of  type  or  wood-cut  with  black-lead  in  the  usiial  way. 

After  the  mould  has  received  all  the  desii'ed  impressions,  remove  it  to  the 
black-lead  table,  and  hold  it  face  downward,  one  end  resting  on  the  table,  the 
other  supported  by  the  hand.  Then,  with  a  piece  of  board,  strike  it  on  the 
back  several  times  to  loosen  the  black-lead  that  is  pressed  on  the  wax  while 


92 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catax,ogue. 


moiilding,  and  blow  off  with  a  bellows  aU.  the  fine  dust  tbat  may  yet  cUng  to 
the  mould. 

When  built-up  and  connections  all  made,  place  it  in  tbe  maeliine,  or  hand 
case,  and  use  the  tin  powder  in  the  same  manner  that  black-lead  is  used.  It 
will  not  require  longer  to  apply  it,  either  by  hand  or  by  machine,  than  it 
does  black-lead. 

Both  the  machine  and  the  hand  case  should  be  kept  free  from  black  lead, 
employing  only  tin  powder  for  metallizing  the  face  of  moulds.  If  the  machine 
is  used,  place  the  mould  or  moiilds  on  the  carriage,  cover  well  over  with  tin 
powder,  close  the  door,  and  run  once  forward  and  backward  under  the  vibrating 
brush ;  then  turn  the  moulds  around,  put  on  more  tin  powder,  and  run  through 
again.  It  will  take  three  miniites  for  the  whole  operation.  On  the  table  used 
for  tin  powder,  beat  the  tin  powder  out  of  the  mould  as  before  directed,  then 
blow  it  out  most  thoroughly.  It  is  then  ready  to  be  painted  with  wax,  which 
should  be  kept  very  hot.  A  practical  workman  in  that  branch  can  coat  the 
back  and  sides  of  cases  rapidly,  and  also  blot  out  on  the  outer  edges  of  the 
face  those  parts  not  to  be  deposited  over,  and  do  it  much  quicker  than  with  a 
building  iron. 

STOPPING  OFF, 

For  prevention  of  the  deposit  in  certain  places,  is  effected  by  the  building  iron 
as  just  described,  or  by  varnish,  alcohoUc  solution  of  sealing  wax,  or  any  other 
non-conductor. 

QUICKING. 

To  prevent  the  copper  deposit  being  broken  over  Unes  in  set-up  type,  the  lines 
may  be  wetted  with  a  "quicMng"  liquid  (say  a  dilute  solution  of  nitrate  of 
mercury),  and  deposited  upon  again. 

The  nitrate  quicMng  solution  is  made  by  adding  one  ounce  of  mercury  to 
sufficient  nitric  acid,  and  diluted  with  three  times  its  bulk  of  distilled  water,  to 
dissolve  it ;  then  add  one  gallon  distilled  water. 

Cyanide  quicking  solution  is  made  by  dissolving  almost  any  salt  of  mercury 
in  a  solution  of  cyanide  of  potassium. 

Quicking  solution  should  contain  only  enough  dissolved  mercury  to  make 
the  upper  surface  white  in  a  few  seconds.    It  should  be  used  very  sparingly. 

DISPELLING   THE  AIR. 

To  dispel  the  film  of  air  which  forms  on  the  surface  of  the  black-leaded  wax 
when  the  dry  process  is  used,  before  placing  in  the  precipitating  ceU,  lay  the 
case  in  an  inclined  shallow  tin  pan,  and  pour  alcohol  over  it,  beginning  at  the 
upper  side.  Then  place  the  case  on  its  back  in  a  shallow  trough,  and  force 
water  on  it  by  a  pump  through  a  flexible  tube,  taking  care  that  the  water  thor- 
oughly penetrates  the  cavities  and  forces  out  the  air-bubbles  which  adhere  so 
tenaciously.  The  mould  should  now  be  taken  out  and  quickly  placed  in  the 
precipitating  cell. 


E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


93 


DEPOSITING. 

THE  BATTERY. 

For  some  time  after  the  invention  of  electrotyping,  first  DanieU's  and  then 
Smee's  batteries  were  generally  used.  The  plates  of  the  latter  extended  nearly 
the  whole  depth  of  the  glass  acid  cells ;  and  when  the  heavy  sulphate  of  zinc 
formed,  it  fell  directly  to  the  bottom  of.  the  vessel,  saturating  the  solution  about 
.the  lower  part  of  the  plates,  and,  so  far  up  as  it  gradually  extended,  the  action 
of  the  battery  was  nearly  aU  lost.  To  overcome  this  difficulty,  Mr.  Adams,  in 
1841,  arranged  a  battery  with  zinc  and  Smee's  platinized  platina  plates,  extend- 
ing to  but  one-third  the  depth  of  the  vessel,  and  by  this  means  secured  a  fuU 
current  and  equal  action  of  the  battery  for  a  much  longer  time  before  it  was 
exhausted  of  its  acid.  This  form  of  battery  is  now  in  general  use,  having 
superseded  all  other  kinds. 

Copper  plates,  silver  plated  and  platinized,  are  stiE  used  to  a  great  extent, 
because  their  first  cost  is  less  than  that  of  plates  of  platinized  platina  or  silver. 
These  copper  plates,  however,  are  liable  to  be  oxidized,  and  the  oxide  of  copper 
being  taken  up  in  the  acid  solution,  and  precipitated  on  the  platinized  surface 
of  the  plates,  wiU  greatly  weaken  the  electrical  current.  Platinized  platina  or 
silver  plates,  although  expensive  at  first,  are  cheapest  in  the  end,  and  work 
better  in  the  battery ;  are  not  so  liable  to  get  f oid,  and  are  much  more  easily 
cleaned. 

All  batteries  may  be  divided  into  two  classes :  those  which  require  only  one 
solution,  and  those  requiring  more  than  one.  To  the  first  class  belong  the 
Smee,  Wollaston,  etc. ;  to  the  second  class  the  Bunsen,  DanieU,  Leclanche,  etc. 


SINGLE-SOLUTION  BATTERIES. 

THE    SMEE  BATTERY. 

It  consists  of  a  triple  arrangement  of  amalgamated  zinc  and  platinized 
silver  plates,  immersed  in  a  solution  of  sulphuric  acid  perfectly  free  from 
nitric  acid. 

The  silver  plate  is  fixed  in  a  bar  of  wood,  which  is  laid  across  the  top  of  the 
jar ;  the  zinc  strips  are  clamped  on  each  side  of  the  silver  by  means  of  a  bind- 
ing screw ;  a  piece  of  cork  or  wood  should  be  placed  between  each  two  plates 
at  the  lower  end,  to  keep  them  from  coming  in  contact. 

Platinized  silver  gives  less  foothold  to  the  hydrogen  bubbles,  and  at  the 
same  time  produces  a  much  stronger  current  than  silver  alone. 

The  Smee  battery  is  adapted  to  light  work,  where  a  very  heavy  current 
is  not  required. 
9 


94 


E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue, 


THE   WOLLASTON  BATTERY. 

In  the  Wollaston  battery,  the  metals  employed  are  copper  and  zinc,  with  a 
solution  of  one  part  of  sulphuric  acid  (oil  of  vitriol)  to  ten  parts  of  water. 

A  stone  jar  is  nearly  filled  with  this  solution,  and  covered  with  a  varnished 
board  having  three  slits  cut  in  it  for  the  plates  to  slide  through. 

The  copper  plates  are  joined  by  a  copper  band,  forming  an  arch,  which 
serves  as  a  connection  and  may  be  used  as  a  handle  to  withdraw  the  plates. 

A  handle  should  be  made  to  the  zinc  plate,  by  passing  a  cord  through  a  hole 
in  the  top. 

By  regulating  the  amount  of  the  zinc  surface  immersed,  the  current  may 
be  increased  or  diminished  at  wUl. 

When  not  in  use  the  plates  should  be  withdrawn,  as  cupric  sulphate 
is  formed,  which  dissolves  and  attacks  the  zinc,  precipitating  the  copper 
on  itself. 

The  copper,  after  having  been  in  use  some  time,  becomes  coated  with  a  black 
oxide  of  copper,  which  should  be  scrubbed  off,  as  it  impairs  the  action,  lessen- 
ing the  strength  of  the  battery. 

New  sulphuric  acid  should  be  added  from  time  to  time,  to  keep  the  strength 
of  the  battery  uniform. 

THE   BUNSEN  BATTERY. 

This  consists  of  a  stone  jar  filled  with  a  solution  of  sulphuiic  acid,  in  which  is 
placed  a  porous  jar  containing  nitric  acid.  The  +  element  is  a  cylinder  of 
coke,  which  is  put  in  the  porous  cylinder.  The  negative  element — a  sheet  of 
amalgamated  zinc,  bent  in  the  form  of  a  cylinder,  with  a  slot  left  between  the 
two  ends  —  stands  in  the  sulphuric  acid,  and  surrounds  the  porous  jar. 

The  nitric  acid  is  apt,  by  capillarity,  to  rise  through  the  coke  and  corrode 
the  connections.  This  may  be  avoided  by  dipping  the  upper  end  of  the  coke 
(which  remains  out  of  the  liquid)  in  paraffine,  coal  tar,  or  shellac. 

Condit,  Hanson  &  Van  Winkle  have  an  improved  Bunsen  battery,  made 
up  of  two  six-quart  cells,  capable  of  running  one  hundred  gallons  of  nickel 
solution. 

The  single  cell  of  the  battery  is  complete  in  four  pieces,  viz.:  a  glass 
bath;  a  zinc  plate,  bent  into  the  form  of  the  bath;  a  porous  cup;  and  a 
carbon  strip. 

The  solution  used  in  the  outer  bath  is  the  usual  twelve-ounce  solution  of 
oil  of  vitriol  and  water — oil  of  vitriol,  one  part;  water,  twelve  parts.  In  the 
porous  cup,  the  solution  is  equal  parts  of  oil  of  vitriol  and  water,  with  the 
addition  of  two  ounces  of  nitric  acid. 

Strips  of  glass  should  be  placed  between  the  zinc  and  the  porous  cup,  to 
prevent  contact. 

When  the  outer  liquid  becomes  milky  from  use,  it  should  be  thrown  away, 
and  new  solution  substituted. 

The  intensity  of  this  battery  may  be  increased  by  using  nitric  acid  satu- 
rated with  bichromate  of  potash,  in  the  porous  cup;  or  a  solution  of  oil  of 


E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


95 


vitriol,  diluted  in  three  parts  of  water,  to  wMcli  has  been  added  twelve  ounces 
of  bichromate  of  potash,  dissolved  in  the  same  amount  of  hot  water. 

daniell's  battery. 

This  is  one  of  the  most  commonly  used,  on  account  of  the  regularity  of  its 
current  and  the  length  of  time  it  runs  without  renewing. 

One  variety  consists  of  a  copper  jar  filled  with  a  nearly  saturated  solution 
of  sulphate  of  copper,  in  which  is  stood  a  porous  vessel  filled  with  dilute 
sulphuric  acid,  containing  a  bar  of  zinc.  On  a  little  shelf  in  the  copper  vessel 
are  placed  a  few  crystals  of  blue  vitriol,  to  supply  the  loss  from  copper 
deposited. 

A  stone  containing-vessel  may  be  substituted  for  the  copper  one,  and 
copper  plates  used  in  the  solution  of  sulphate  of  copper  to  supply  its  place. 

THE  leclanch:^  battery. 

A  carbon  plate  standing  in  a  porous  vessel  is  filled  around  with  a  mixture 
of  the  needle  variety  of  peroxide  of  manganese  and  gas-retort  carbon.  An 
outside  vessel  containing  sal  ammoniac  contains  the  zinc  rod  which  forms 
the  +  pole. 

It  is  estimated  that  twenty-five  cells  of  this  battery  equal  forty  of  DanieU's. 
This  battery  is  constructed  to  avoid  leaking  and  prevent  destruction  of  the 
wooden  vessel  by  the  acids  in  use  in  the  battery,  against  the  action  of  which 
coal  tar,  paraflBue,  varnishes,  etc.,  are  ineffective.  It  is  lined  with  thick  glass, 
united  at  the  joints ;  and  leakage  is  guarded  against  by  cement  and  a  filling 
of  an  insoluble  hydrocarbon  substance. 


Patent  Battery  for  Eleetrotypers,  lined  with  Glass.    (R.  Hoe  &  Co.) 


Price,  $ 


96 


E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


MANAGEMENT    OF    THE  BATTERY. 

If  the  acid  liquid  ia  contact  with  the  zincs  be  very  strong,  they  require  frequent 
watching  to  see  that  there  is  no  local  action.  When  gas  is  seen  or  heard  rising 
from  them,  or  when  dull  patches  appear  upon  them,  when  the  acid  has  acted 
too  strongly,  they  should  be  re-amalgamated,  else  holes  will  be  corroded  in 
them.  Unless  deposition  be  desired  all  night,  take  them  out  of  the  cells  every 
evening,  if  the  acid  be  at  aU  strong. 

Wollaston's,  Smee's,  and  DanieU's  batteries,  after  a  few  days'  work,  need  to 
have  a  little  sulphuric  acid  stirred  in,  as  the  current  gets  feeble.  When  the 
liquid  gets  oily,  and  zinc  salt  crystallizes  on  the  cells  and  plates,  above  the 
surface  of  the  liquid,  it  is  time  to  recharge. 

Deposit  of  zinc  on  Smee  or  Wollaston  negative  plates  shows  that  the  acid 
is  exhausted.    DUute  siilphuric  acid  in  a  separate  vessel  removes  the  deposit. 

In  Grove's  and  Bunsen's  batteries,  nitric  acid  should  not  be  allowed  to  touch 
the  zinc,  as  it  wastes  it.  These  porous  cells  should  be  regularly  soaked  in 
water,  and  two  or  three  sets  kept  on  hand,  one  always  in  soak. 

In  "  two  liqiud  "  batteries  the  liquid  should  be  kept  at  the  same  level,  or  if 
any  difference  be  made  in  Grove's,  Bimsen's,  or  DanieU's,  the  zinc  liquid  should 
be  the  higher. 

Motion  of  the  copper  solution  is  advantageous. 

Too  great  a  current  causes  deposition  of  metal  in  brown  or  nearly  black 
powder,  and  sometimes  streaks  and  variation  in  thickness  of  deposit. 

Too  httle  water  causes  crystals  of  sulphate  of  copper  to  form  on  the  anode^ 
and  sometimes  even  on  the  cathode,  and  upon  the  bottom  of  the  vessel. 

Too  much  acid  corrodes  the  anode  while  the  current  is  passing. 

A  trace  of  bisulphide  of  carbon  in  the  sulphate  solution  causes  brittle 
deposit. 

If  the  battery  have  too  Httle  work  to  do,  the  deposit  will  be  a  dark  powder. 
If  it  have  too  much  work,  there  will  be  a  red,  brittle  deposit,  or  crystals. 

To  remedy  the  first  trouble,  pour  out  some  of  the  battery  solution,  or  par- 
tially raise  the  plate,  or  interpose  a  finer  wire  between  battery  and  mould. 

FREQUENCY   OF   CHANGING   SOLUTION   AND   AMALGAMATING  ZINCS. 

It  is  best  to  renew  the  battery  solution  every  twenty-four  hours,  as  the  second 
twenty-four  hours  do  not  give,  without  renewal,  above  half  the  deposit  of  the 
first,  while  the  waste  of  zinc  is  nearly  as  much. 

AMALGAMATING. 

Zinc  plates  are  always  amalgamated,  because  (1)  it  makes  them  more  electro- 
positive ;  and  (2)  it  largely  protects  them  from  corrosion  when  the  battery  is 
not  in  action. 

New  plates  are  probably  greasy  from  rolling,  and  should  be  dipped  in  caustic 
potash  solution  before  putting  in  the  acid,  or  they  should  be  scraped.  New 
zincs  require  frequent  amalgamating,  because  the  mercury  soaks  into  them. 


E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


97 


TO    AMALGAMATE    ZINC  PLATES. 

Immerse  them  in  the  acid  bath,  until  gas  is  freely  evolved ;  then  rub  pure 
mercury  well  into  them  with  a  hard  brush ;  stand  them  up  long  enough  to  let 
the  superfluous  quicksilver  run  off,  and  they  will  be  ready  for  the  battery. 

Another  plan  is  to  put  some  mercury  in  a  coarse  flannel  bag ;  dip  the  bag 
occasionally  into  dilute  muriatic  acid,  and  rub  it  upon  the  zinc  plate  or  rod. 

As  compared  with  stereotyping,  the  advantages  of  electrotyping  are  that 
the  metal  is  harder,  the  impression  sharper,  and  the  ink  delivery  more  rapid 
than  from  type  metal.  It  is  also  a  cleaner  process ;  the  plates  take  up  less  ink, 
and  the  printed  pages  dry  more  quickly. 

A  mould  of  electrotype  copper  of  the  London  Times  is  said  to  have  furnished 
twenty  million  copies  before  worn  out. 

The  dynamo-electric  machine,  sometimes  incorrectly  known  as  the  "  steam 
battery,"  is  a  device  for  the  conversion  of  mechanical  into  electrical  energy. 
It  is  not  a  "  generator,"  but  a  "  converter."  There  are  many  forms  of  them, 
•any  of  which  we  can  furnish. 

CONDUCTORS    AND  CONNECTIONS. 

Copper  has  conducting  powers  almost  equal  to  those  of  sUver  (99.9  to  100.0) — 
iron  being  16.8  and  graphite  0.069.  Being  cheap,  very  flexible,  and  ductile, 
easily  obtainable,  and  not  readily  oxidized,  it  is  nearly  always  employed  in 
electro-metallurgy  for  transmitting  currents. 

Arsenic  in  copper  is  very  injurious  to  its  conductivity,  lessening  it,  some- 
times, as  much  as  sixty-six  per  cent. ;  one-half  per  cent,  of  iron  lessens  it 
twenty-five  per  cent. 

A  rise  in  temperature  from  zero  to  one  hundred  degrees  centigrade  de- 
creases conductivity  of  most  metals  thirty  per  cent.  But  Mquids  conduct  best 
when  warm. 

As  electric  currents  produce  heat  in  overcoming  resistance,  it  follows  that 
if  the  conductors,  or  connections,  be  insufficient,  they  wUl  become  heated,  and 
have  their  conductivity  lessened  still  further. 

The  strips  of  sheet  copper  forming  the  connection  between  the  battery  and 
the  precipitating  trough  should  be  of  sufiicient  width  to  conduct  a  plentiful 
current  of  electricity ;  in  fact,  it  is  better  to  have  them  larger  than  is  actually 
reqiiired. 

The  rods,  hooks,  and  aU  connections,  on  both  battery  and  precipitating 
trough,  shoTild  be  kept  weU  cleaned  with  emery  or  sand-paper. 

The  copper  straps  from  the  dynamo  machine  are  generally  continued,  each 
along  one  side  of  the  depositing  tank,  and  brass  rods  extended  across  them, 
one  end  of  each  rod  being  insidated  by  a  piece  of  India-rubber  tubing. 

RESISTANCE    COIL,    OR  SWITCH. 

One  of  the  nicest  and  simplest  of  the  many  pieces  of  electrotypers'  gUders 
apparatus,  placed  on  the  market  by  Condit,  Hanson  &  Co.,  recommended  for 


98 


E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


its  efficiency,  simplicity,  and  cheapness,  is  the  resistance  coU,  or  switch, 
enabling  the  operator  to  regulate  the  current  to  a  fine  nicety,  thus  doiag 
away  altogether  with  the  more  complex  method  of  attaching  and  discon- 
necting batteries.  By  putting  the  key  on  the  pin  marked  strong,  the  greatest 
current  the  battery  will  give  is  obtained ;  by  moving  the  key  toward  the  pin 
marked  weak,  we  have  a  gradual  lessening  of  the  current  until  we  arrive  at  the 
minimum. 

GETTING  READY. 

Before  the  moulds  are  placed  in  solution,  the  battery  must  first  be  put  in 
order,  ready  for  work.  See  that  the  connections  are  perfectly  clean,  test  the 
working  condition  with  each  copper  plate  separately,  and,  if  everything  is  right, 
wash  out  the  moulds.  When  a  sufficient  force  of  water  for  this  purpose  cannot 
be  had  in  the  electrotype  room,  a  double-acting  pump  should  be  used,  with  a 
rubber  hose  and  pipe,  but  without  a  sprinkler.  Put  the  mould  about  four  inches 
under  water,  hold  the  nozzle  about  one  inch  below  the  surface  of  the  water,  and 
have  the  pump  worked  at  a  speed  of  thirty  strokes  per  minute,  directing  the 
jet  of  water  four  different  ways  over  the  mould.  Great  care  must  be  used  in 
this  operation,  as  any  neglect  may  cause  defects  in  the  shell,  it  being  indis- 
pensable that  every  part  of  the  mould  be  thoroughly  washed  out. 

CONNECTING. 

Now  place  the  mould  immediately  in  the  precipitating  solution,  and  quickly 
connect  with  the  battery.  If  there  be  ten  or  twenty  moulds,  let  the  first  one 
placed  in  solution  face  the  copper  plate  farthest  from  the  battery,  and  so 
in  regular  order  until  the  last  one  is  nearest  to  the  battery  trough.  Every 
mould  must  be  connected  as  soon  as  put  in,  and  remain  untU  finished. 

COPPER  SOLUTION. 

Suspend  in  the  upper  part  of  a  vessel  of  water,  sulphate  of  copper  held  in 
linen  bags.  When  the  salt  of  copper  has  dissolved  for  some  time,  stir  the 
solution  well  with  a  wooden  paddle,  and  test  it  with  an  hydrometer,  such  as 
are  used  for  liquids  heavier  than  water.  When  it  indicates  a  density  of  about 
ten  or  twelve,  the  bags  of  blue  vitriol  must  be  taken  out,  and  sulphuric  acid 
added,  which  should  also  be  well  stirred  up,  until  a  density  of  about  fourteen 
to  sixteen  by  hydrometer  is  attained.  (These  proportions  are  for  medium 
temperature ;  iE  colder  or  warmer,  they  must  be  varied  to  suit  the  temperature. 
More  blue  vitriol  should  be  added  for  the  hottest  peiiod  of  summer,  and  more 
acid  and  water  for  the  extremely  cold  days  of  winter.)  Occasionally,  water 
must  be  added  to  make  up  for  the  evaporation  that  takes  place. 

Every  day,  immediately  after  taking  out  the  shells  or  moulds,  stir  up  the 
solution  thoroughly,  to  allow  time  for  the  sediment  to  settle,  so  that  the  solution 
will  be  perfectly  clear  before  putting  in  the  new  moulds,  in  the  after  part  of 
the  day.    This  stirring  up  will  also  equalize  the  density  of  the  solution,  which 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


99 


woiild  otherwise  become  lighter  at  the  top  and  heavier  at  the  bottom ;  conse- 
quently the  copper  shell  in  that  case  would  be  correspondingly  thick  and  thin. 

On  trial,  should  the  battery  not  work  freely  and  weU,  add  a  httle  more  acid ; 
if  it  works  too  ficeely,  it  will  be  necessary  to  take  out  some  of  the  plates. 

The  copper  plates  get  eaten  off  at  the  line  of  immersion.  The  piece  which 
remains  may  be  utilized  by  simply  bending  it  double,  and  hanging  it  over  the 
edge  of  the  new  plate. 

REVERSING  DEPOSITS. 

Plates  which  have  been  used,  or  spoiled  plates,  may  be  utilized  by  employing 
them  instead  of  new  anodes — hanging  them  with  the  copper  face  opposite  the 
moulds.  The  copper  is  stripped  off  by  the  battery,  and  deposited  on  the 
moulds,  the  white  metal  remaining  inert. 


THE  SHELLS. 

THICKNESS  OF  SHELL. 

For  ordinary  book  or  job  work,  the  copper  sheU  should  be  about  as  thick  as 
good  book  paper — say  about  three  to  four  hours  in  the  bath.  Tor  newspaper 
headings  and  such  other  blocks  as  have  excessive  use,  the  shell  should  be  very 
thick — say  two  to  three  days'  deposit. 

REMOVING    THE  SHELL. 

Place  the  mould  in  an  inclined  position;  liberate  all  the  connections;  take 
hold  of  one  corner  of  the  shell,  and  from  a  pitcher  of  hot  water  pour  from  the 
top  of  the  sheU.  across  the  moxild,  carefully,  yet  quickly,  lifting  up  the  sheU  as 
the  hot  water  flows  over  it.  The  removal  of  the  shell  from  the  wax  should  be 
done  carefidly,  so  as  to  keep  it  straight ;  if  not,  it  will  be  diificult  to  perform 
the  backing  properly,  and  make  the  "  plate  "  a  imif  orm  height. 

In  taking  the  sheU  from  the  mould,  a  thin  film  of  wax  adheres  to  the 
copper;  the  quantity  remaining  on  the  shell  depends  a  great  deal  on  the 
expertness  of  the  operator;  but  the  less  wax  left  the  better.  In  order  to 
remove  aU  the  wax  from  the  copper,  it  is  well  to  wash  it  with  a  saturated 
sohition  of  common  potash  dissolved  in  water.  This  solution  is  made  as 
f oUows :  Drop  potash  into  water,  so  long  as  the  water  will  dissolve  it ;  pour 
the  solution  into  a  two-gaUon  iron  pot,  and  place  it  on  the  fii'e.  When  hot, 
take  the  copper  shell,  lay  it  on  a  shovel  or  gridiron,  and  pour  the  hot  potash 
over  it  until  the  wax  is  aU  dissolved  and  disappears,  allowing  the  potash  to 
run  again  into  the  pot,  which  should  have  around  it  a  sheet-iron  apron  slanting 
down  to  the  edge  of  the  pot ;  then  rinse  the  shell  thoroughly  in  cold  water. 

It  is  necessary  to  remove  all  of  the  wax  to  prevent  its  taking  fire  during 


100 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


the  pi'ocess  of  tinning,  in  which  case  it  would  leave  a  hard  crust  of  carbon. 
The  sheU  should  now  be  perfect  in  every  way,  and  clean.  The  next  manipula- 
tion performed  with  it  is  called  tinning  the  sheU. 

TINNING    THE  SHELL. 

Tin  has  a  great  affinity  for  copper,  and  serves  to  unite  the  shell  and  the  back- 
ing metal,  which  would  otherwise  separate  in  finishing.  The  process  of  tinning 
is  very  simple.  Ordinary  "soldering  solution"  is  first  prepared  in  a  wide- 
mouthed  quart  bottle,  by  poui-ing  in  about  a  pint  of  muriatic  (hydrochloric) 
acid,  and  dropping  in  some  pieces  of  unamalgamated  zinc,  to  which,  when  no 
more  gas  is  given  off,  should  be  added  one-third  water,  with  a  half -ounce  of 
sal  ammoniac  dissolved  in  it. 

Place  the  shell  face  downward  in  the  backing  pan,  and  brush  over  the  back 
of  it  with  this  solution ;  then  spread  alloyed  tin-foU  over  it,  and  float  the  pan  on 
the  hot  backing  metal  until  the  foil  melts  and  completely  covers  the  whole  shell. 

When  melted  solder  instead  of  alloyed  tin-foil  is  used,  the  sheU,  after  being 
brushed  with  the  soldering  solution,  is  transferred  to  the  furnace,  laid  on  a 
float  face  downward,  and  the  molten  solder  poured  thereon.  This  process  is 
repeated,  in  order  to  insure  the  thorough  tinning  of  the  whole  surface. 

Formerly  the  shell  was  held  upon  a  shovel  or  gridiron  as  nearly  perpen- 
dicular as  possible,  and  the  hot  solder  poured  upon  it,  beginning  at  the  upper 
edge,  and  allowing  it  to  run  into  the  pot  again.  If  there  were  any  minute 
holes  in  the  shell,  the  solder  wotdd  follow  the  acid  and  run  through  them,  and 
the  face  as  well  as  the  back  would  be  tinned,  and  the  shell  ruined.  The  shell 
was  liable  to  get  warped  in  this  pouring  process,  and  unless  it  laid  perfectly 
flat  in  the  backing  pan,  it  was  impossible  to  produce  a  perfect  electrotj^e  plate, 
and  the  operator  had  the  chagrin  of  receiving  it  back  from  the  printer. 

STEAM    MELTING  TABLE. 

After  the  shell  has  been  removed  from  the  wax  movJd,  the  case  is  placed 
upon  the  steam  melting  table  and  the  wax  melted  out,  leaving  the  cases  clean, 
ready  to  be  used  again,  and  thus  saving  much  time  and  labor. 


BACKING,  FINISHING,  AND  BLOCKING. 

BACKING. 

When  the  foil  has  melted,  swing  the  backing  pan  on  the  leveUing  stand,  and 
with  an  iron  ladle  pour  the  melted  metal  carefully  on  the  shell,  commencing  at 
one  of  the  corners  and  gradually  running  it  over  the  whole  until  it  is  of 
sufficient  thickness.  The  experienced  eye  will  at  once  see  when  enough  has 
flowed  over  it.    While  it  is  cooling,  another  shell  can  be  got  ready. 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


101 


BACKING    PAN    AND  STAND. 

The  top  of  the  stand  should  be  made  perfectly  level,  and  then  screwed  fast  to  the 
floor  by  the  feet.  In  this  way  the  metal,  when  poured  over  the  tinned  shell, 
will  be  of  uniform  thickness  throughout.  As  floors  sink  imevenly,  the  surface 
of  the  stand  should  be  tested  from  time  to  time  with  a  level — say  every  three 
months. 


Backing  Pan  and  Stand. 


Sizes  and  Prices  of  Baching  Pan. 


No. 

size  of  matter. 

Price. 

No.                 Size  of  matter. 

Price. 

1 

.    .     6x9  inches 

$10.00 

5    .    .   18  X  24  inches     .  . 

$28.00 

2 

9  X  12  inches 

13.00 

6    .    .   21x28  inches  . 

34.00 

3 

.    .    12  X  16  inches 

17.00 

7    .    .   24  X  32  inches 

40.00 

4 

.    .   15x20  inches     .  . 

22.00 

Sizes  and  Prices  of  Stands  for  Baching  Pan. 

No. 

Price. 

No. 

Price. 

3 

For  No.  1  to  No.  3  pan 

$12.00 

7    For  No.  6  to  No.  7  pan 

$18.00 

5 

For  No.  4  to  No.  5  pan 

15.00 

102 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


Saw  Table. 


The  mandrel  is  of  steel,  driven  by  a  treadle,  the  heavy  fly-wheel  having  the  momentuna 
sufficient  to  carry  the  saw  through  the  work.  This  wheel  is  so  balanced  as  to  stand  with  the 
treadle  always  raised  from  the  floor,  in  a  position  to  start.  The  saw  can  be  sharpened  in  place 
by  pressing  a  wooden  wedge  beside  it  into  the  slit  in  which  it  runs.  A  glass  protects  the  eyes 
from  chips.  For  running  by  power,  the  fly-wheel  and  cranked  shaft  are  replaced  by  an 
ordinary  pulley,  and  a  straight  shaft  having  tight  and  loose  pulleys  on  its  outer  end.  When 
so  ordered,  a  cutter-head  is  put  on  the  outer  end  of  the  mandrel,  with  a  small  sliding  table 
outside  of  it,  as  represented  in  the  cut,  for  squaring  up  metal  blocks,  etc.  A  parallel  gauge 
and  square  furnished  when  ordered. 


Price  of  Iron  Saw  Table  and  Saw,  with  Parallel  Gauge  and  Square. 


To  work  by  foot  or  steam  power  

Outside  ciitter  for  squaring  up,  and  sliding  table,  extra 


$200.00 
80.00 


E,  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


103 


BACKING  METAL. 

It  has  "been  found  very  difficult  to  make  a  backing  metal  which  will  not 
separate  from  the  shell  in  the  process  of  finishing  the  plate.  Antimony  has  a 
great  affinity  for  tin,  and,  if  greatly  in  excess,  will  absorb  so  much  as  to  leave 
the  shell  partly  stripped  of  it ;  but  when  the  proportion  is  correct,  there  will  be 
no  trouble. 

The  following  has  been  found  a  very  good  composition : 

Tin    .  . 

Antimony 
Lead 

* 

FINISHING. 

The  plates,  as  they  come  from  the  backer's  or  caster's  hands,  are  rough  on  the 
back  and  of  uneven  thickness,  there  are  more  or  less  of  imperfections  in  the 
letters,  the  blanks  are  higher  than  they  should  be  for  printing,  and  there  are 
bearers  which  are  necessary  to  make  the  plate  strong  enough  for  the  operations 
it  has  to  undergo,  but  which  must  be  removed.  All  these  defects  it  is  the 
finisher^s  work  to  remedy. 

If  several  pages  are  cast  in  one  piece,  they  are  first  sawn  apart  on  the 
proper  table.  Each  plate  is  then  trimmed  all  around  to  remove  the  rough  edges, 
and  if  there  are  projections  which  would  prevent  its  lying  fiat  on  its  face,  they 
are  cut  down  carefully  with  a  smaU  chisel.  The  plate  is  then  shaved,  to  take 
the  roughness  off  the  back  and  to  make  it  of  even  thickness  in  all  parts.  In 
large  establishments  this  is  done  with  power  planing  machines,  but  till  within 
a  few  years  it  was  altogether  done  by  hand  shaving  machines,  as  it  is  still  in 
smaller  shops.  When  done  by  hand  it  is  the  most  laborious  part  of  the  finish- 
ing, and  if  the  amount  of  work  will  at  all  justify  it,  the  power  machine  is 
preferable. 

The  plate,  being  now  nearly  of  proper  thickness,  and  almost  true,  is  tested 
with  a  straight-edge  on  the  face,  and  the  unevennesses  are  beaten  down  with  a 
light  hammer  and  planer.  This  is  preparatory  to  the  final  shaving,  and  is 
indispensable.  The  plate  is  then  passed  through  the  hand  machine,  accu- 
rately adjusted,  and  two  or  three  light  cuts  are  taken  off. 

DOUBLE-GEARED    HAND    SHAVING  MACHINE. 

For  wide  plates  it  is  desirable  to  have  a  double-geared  machine,  such  as  is 
shown  on  page  106.    A  power  machine  is  shown  on  page  125. 

BRINGING    UP    LOW  PLACES. 

A  proof  being  taken  of  the  shaved  and  dressed  plate,  low  places  are  brought 
up  by  laying  the  plate  face  downward  on  a  smooth  iron  plate,  and  striking  the 
thin  place  with  a  baU-faeed  hammer.  The  face  is  then  tested,  rubbing  it  with 
a  flat  piece  of  willow  charcoal,  which  will  not  blacken  the  low  places. 


4  parts. 

5  " 
91  " 


104 


E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


9  Planing  and  Sawing  Machine. 

The  machine  is  intended  for  roughing  off  plates  before  sending  them  to  the  shaving  machine, 
and  is  very  simple,  quick,  and  efficient  in  operation.  A  circular  saw  runs  in  an  elevating 
iron  table  at  one  corner,  for  squaring  up,  and  an  outside  cutter  with  sliding  table  is  attached, 
when  so  ordered,  for  squaring  up  metal  bodies,  etc. 


Prices  of  Power  Planing  and  Sawing  Machines,  with  outside  cutter 
and  sliding  table  for  squaring  up. 


No.    3.      12-INCH  STROKE. 

Price. 


To  take  on  plate  12  x  20  inclies,  $600 
Without  saw  table  and  saw  .    .  550 


With  saw,  but  without  cutter 
Without  saw  or  cutter     .  . 


Price. 

$550 
500 


No.   5.      18-INCH  STROKE. 
Price. 


To  take  on  plate  18  x  30  inches,  $750 
With  saw,  but  without  cutter  .  675 


With  cutter,  but  without  saw 
Without  saw  or  cutter     .  . 


Price. 

$675 
600 


No.    6.      24-INCH  STROKE 
Price. 

To  take  on  plate  24  x  40  inches,  $1000 
With  saw,  but  without  cutter,  900 


With  cutter,  but  without  saw, 
Without  saw  or  cutter     .  . 


Price. 

$900 
850 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


105 


This  hand  machine,  for  thieknessing  plates,  is  made  all  of  iron.  It  consists  of  a  table, 
planed  true,  on  which  the  plates  are  placed,  and  a  head,  with  adjustable  knife,  driven  by  rack 
and  pinion  behind  it.  • 

Prices  of  Hand  Shaving  Machines,  for  stereotype  and  electrotype  plates. 

No.  Taking  plate  Price. 

3  .  .  12  inches  wide   $150.00 

5  .  .  18  inches  wide  2  handles    .    .  200.00 

6  .  .  21  inches  wide  .    .    Double  geared    .    .    2  handles    .    .  325.00 

7  .  .  24  inches  wide  .    .    Double  geared    .    .    2  handles    .    .  425.00 

HIGH  PLACES 

Are  rubbed  down  with  a  slip  stone  and  water,  and  rough  places  touched  up 
with  a  piece  of  fine  emery  paper. 

DEFECTIVE  LETTERS 

May  in  some  cases  be  remedied  by  punching  them  up — as  in  the  case  of  the 
dots  of  small  i's,  which  are  very  often  wanting. 


106 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


To  replace  a  single  letter,  the  old  one  is  first  punched  out  with  a  chisel- 
edged  punch  the  exact  size  of  the  body  of  the  letter.  To  prevent  "  bui-ring," 
the  backing  metal  below  the  letter  to  be  removed  is  first  ploughed  out  with  a 
square-pointed  graver.  The  exact  place  to  cut  this  away  is  found  by  a  paii-  of 
gauging  calipers,  one  point  of  which  marks  the  under  side  of  the  plate,  while 
the  other  points  to  the  letter. 

FuU  instructions  concerning  shaving,  bevelling,  dressing,  routing,  and 
altering  wiU  be  found  on  page  123  et  seq.,  following  Part  II.,  on  Stereotyping. 


Double-Geared  Hand  Shaving  Machine. 


See  prices  on  page  105. 
MISCELLANEOUS. 

ELECTROTYPING    PROM    PLASTER  MOULDS. 

Plaster  moulds  *  may  be  used  for  electrotypes  by  soaking  them  in  wax,  cover- 
ing with  a  mixture  of  a  solution  of  one  gramme  of  nitrate  of  silver  in  two 
grammes  of  water,  to  which  are  added  two  and  a  half  grammes  of  ammonia, 
and  then  three  grammes  of  absolute  alcohol.  The  mould  is  then  exposed  to 
sulphuretted  hydrogen  gas  (made  by  pouring  dilute  sulphuric  acid  on  powdered 
sulphide  of  iron). 

*  For  the  preparation  of  these,  see  under  Stereotyping. 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


107 


II. 

STEREOTYPING. 

In  stereotyping,  or  tlie  making  of  cast  type-metal  duplicates  of  relief  printing 
forms,  there  are  three  processes  employed,  respectively  known,  from  the 
material  employed  in  making  the  reverse  matrix,  or  mould,  as  the  plaster,  the 
clay,  and  the  paper  processes,  each  adapted  to  special  cases.  In  the  first  two, 
the  preparation  of  the  forms  is  alike,  and  is  identical  with  that  described 
under  Electrotyping  (page  79).    In  the  paper  process,  low  spaces  may  be  used. 


THE  PLASTER  PROCESS. 

Thin  pieces  of  metal,  bevelled  at  the  top,  are  put  at  the  sides  of  the  pages,  to 
form  bevels  to  the  plates  when  cast.  The  chases  used  in  stereotyping  are 
thinner  than  printers  use,  in  order  that  the  flask  may  sit  low  enough  around 
the  tj^e.  They  are  seldom  larger  than  will  hold  three  octavo  or  four  smaU 
duodecimo  pages. 

It  is  very  important  that  the  composition  should  be  well  done,  the  lines 
evenly  justified,  and  that  the  type  be  square  on  its  feet,  for  carelessness  in 
these  particulars  will  be  apt  to  cause  the  plaster  to  break  away  and  spoU  the 
mould.  It  is  also  essential  that  the  type  be  washed  perfectly  clean,  and  that 
lye  be  thoroughly  rinsed  off  before  it  has  time  to  dry  on  the  type,  as  it  will  act 
upon  the  plaster  and  destroy  the  face  of  the  mould.  All  spaces  and  leads 
sticking  up  should  be  pushed  down,  and  the  form  properly  planed  down  before 
the  mould  is  taken. 

OILING. 

After  the  form  is  prepared,  the  type  is  oiled  with  a  soft  hair  brush,  made 
specially  for  stereotypers'  use,  using  not  much  oil,  but  working  it  thoroughly 
into  every  crevice,  to  prevent  the  plaster  from  adhering  to  the  form.  Sweet 
oil  is  generally  preferred  for  this  purpose,  though  other  kinds  are  sometimes 
used.    Too  much  oil  impairs  the  sharpness  of  the  cast. 

THE  FLASK. 

After  the  type  is  oiled,  a  frame  called  a  flask,  which  is  also  oiled,  is  put  on 
the  form  and  surrounds  the  type.  It  is  intended  to  hold  the  haK-fluid  plaster 
over  the  type  till  it  becomes  hard,  and  it  is  commonly  made  of  stereotype 


108 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


metal,  though  it  may  be  made  of  iron.  It  has  a  flange  around  the  lower  inside 
edge,  and  is  beveUed  from  the  flange  to  the  top,  affording  sufficient  support  to 
raise  the  mould  from  the  type,  to  which  it  adheres  with  considerable  tenacity. 
Through  each  corner  of  the  flask  runs  a  thumb  screw,  by  which  it  can  be 
accurately  adjusted  on  aU  sides,  and  after  the  mould  is  set,  can  be  gradually 
lifted  clear  from  the  form.  The  flask  shovdd  sit  pretty  close  to  the  type,  but  as 
forms  vary  so  much  that  it  is  impossible  to  have  flasks  fit  all,  pieces  of  tin  or 
pasteboard  are  laid  under  the  flask  where  it  does  not  come  close  enough  to  the 
type  to  prevent  the  plaster  from  running  out  at  the  bottom.  The  flask  itself 
need  not  sit  close  upon  the  chase  or  furniture ;  it  is  enough  that  the  screws  aU 
touch,  so  as  just  to  clear  it  from  the  chase. 

PLASTER   CASTS   FROM   GELATINE  PLATES. 

In  making  plaster  casts  from  swelled  gelatine  films  on  glass  plates,  in  photo- 
relief  engraving,  the  operation  is  very  much  the  same  as  when  moulding  from 
type.  The  irons  are  used  with  the  thin  side  resting  on  the  plate,  their  ends 
being  propped  up  with  a  piece  of  glass  the  same  thickness  as  the  gelatine  film 
and  plate.  A  little  water  is  allowed  to  rest  on  the  surface  of  the  gelatine,  to 
prevent  sticking.  The  preparation  of  the  plaster,  pouring,  etc.,  are  the  same  as 
when  moulding  from  type.  The  mould  may  be  removed,  when  set,  by  inserting 
the  straight-edge  between  the  plate  and  the  mould,  and  using  it  as  a  lever. 

Before  casting,  it  is  usual  to  harden  the  gelatine  with  some  such  agent  as 
chrome  alum.  This  prevents  the  gelatine  film  from  ripping  off  the  glass,  or 
adhering  to  the  cast. 

THE  PLASTER. 

When  the  flask  is  properly  adjusted,  the  moulder  mixes  his  plaster,  the  quantity 
varying  with  the  number  and  size  of  the  forms.  About  a  pint  suffices  for  a 
form  of  three  pages  duodecimo.  It  is  mixed  in  a  copper  can,  or  other  vessel, 
which  may  be  six  inches  in  diameter  and  nine  inches  deep,  the  water  being  put 
in  first,  and  then  all  the  plaster  that  may  be  required,  as  it  is  better  to  have  to 
add  water  than  plaster.  The  plaster  should  be  slowly  added,  squeezing  it  as  it 
mixes,  to  prevent  lumping.  They  are  stirred  together  for  a  few  seconds  till 
thoroughly  mixed,  and  of  the  consistence  of  thick  molasses.  A  little  salt  is 
usually  added,  to  make  the  casts  set  quicker.  The  rapidity  of  setting  varies 
with  different  plasters.  The  salt  also  renders  the  mould  less  liable  to  crack 
with  the  heat  in  casting. 

A  small  portion  of  the  plaster,  just  about  enough  to  cover  the  form,  is  poured 
over  the  face  of  the  tyipe.  This  should  be  done  very  carefully,  putting  the  lip 
of  the  can  near  one  corner  of  the  flask.  Pouring  from  a  height  produces 
bubbles,  which  ruin  the  cast. 

ROLLING. 

The  plaster  is  by  many  worked  into  the  type  with  a  small  wooden  roller, 
having  an  iron  rod  running  through  it,  and  projecting  at  the  ends  for 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


109 


handles,  and  covered  with  several  thicknesses  of  flannel,  and  a  tight  buckskin 
over  aU. 

The  roUing  in  of  the  plaster  is  for  the  pui-pose  of  forcing  it  into  the  hollows 
of  the  type  and  expeUing  the  air,  thus  preventing  what  are  caUed  "  round  picks  " 
in  the  plates,  which  are  occasioned  by  air-holes,  which  in  casting  are  filled  with 
metal,  and  form  globules  that  have  to  be  picked  out. 

When  the  plaster  is  roUed  too  much,  what  are  termed  "solid  picks"  result — 
that  is,  the  plaster  breaks  off  so  that  the  bowls  of  the  letters  of  the  plate  are 
filled  with  metal,  which  must  be  removed  by  the  fijiisher.  A  large  propor- 
tion of  the  picking,  the  most  expensive  part  of  finishing,  may  be  saved  by  good 
moulding.  Some  use  a  brush  and  commence  the  process  of  working  the  plaster 
in  while  it  is  yet  creamy. 

Having  worked  the  plaster  in  enough,  more  is  poured  on  to  fill  the  flask, 
and  when  it  has  become  somewhat  stiff  (not  before),  the  top  of  the  mould  is 
levelled  off  by  running  a  straight-edge  across  it,  bearing  lightly  upon  the  top 
of  the  flask. 

As  the  plaster  begins  to  set  from  the  time  it  is  first  mixed,  only  requiring  a 
few  minutes  to  lose  its  fluidity,  all  the  operations  of  moulding  must  be  per- 
formed expeditiously. 

In  about  five  minutes  the  mould  will  become  hard  enough  to  take  off.  Never 
disturb  it  until  the  plaster  has  completely  set.  Taking  off  is  done  by  gently 
turning  the  screws  so  as  to  raise  the  flask  and  mould  evenly  and  gradually  all 
around,  as  the  quality  of  the  mould  depends  a  good  deal  on  this.  The  two 
screws  situated  diagonally  to  each  other  are  turned  half-way  around,  then  a 
half -turn  is  given  to  the  other  two  screws,  and  so  alternately,  tUl  the  moTild  is 
felt  to  give  way,  when  they  may  be  turned  faster. 

After  the  mould  is  taken  off  the  type,  it  is  examined,  by  holding  it  up  in 
front  of  the  Hght,  and  looking  directly  into  the  letters.  If  too  many  picks, 
either  round  or  solid,  or  any  other  serious  defects,  are  discovered,  the  mould  is 
condemned,  and  another  taken,  as  it  is  less  trouble  and  expense  to  make  a  new 
mould  than  to  finish  imperfect  plates.  The  form  is  also  looked  over,  and  the 
plaster  that  may  have  broken  off  in  or  around  the  type  is  carefully  picked  out. 
A  needle  fitted  with  a  handle  is  used  for  this  purpose. 

CASTING. 

The  pans  used  for  casting  are  of  iron,  and  a  good  size  is  twenty  inches  in 
length  by  fifteen  in  width,  and  one  and  three-quarters  in  depth.  They  are 
made  with  sloping  sides,  wider  at  the  top  than  at  the  bottom,  and  have  covers 
fitted  to  them,  with  the  corners  cut  off,  so  as  to  leave  openings  into  the  pan, 
and  with  holes  near  the  centre.  Each  pan  has  also  a  float,  or  iron  plate,  of 
the  size  of  the  bottom,  and  a  movable  and  curved  iron  handle,  which  catches 
on  flanges  on  the  sides  of  the  pan,  and  is  furnished  with  a  screw  to  hold  the 
cover  in  its  place,  and  has  holes  near  the  centre,  by  which  it  may  be  attached 
to  the  crane. 

The  pan  having  been  heated,  the  float  is  laid  on  the  bottom  of  the  casting 
pan,  and  the  moulds  are  placed  upon  it,  with  face  downward.    The  cover  is 
10 


110 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


tlien  chalked  on  the  under  side  and  adjusted  to  the  pan,  leaving  a  space  of 
about  one-eighth  of  an  inch  between  the  back  of  the  moulds  and  the  cover. 
The  movable  handle  is  attached  to  the  pan,  and  the  screw  brought  down  to  the 
cover,  after  which  the  handle  is  fitted  to  the  crane  and  the  pan  swung  over  into 
the  pot  of  melted  metal  on  the  furnace,  where  it  floats,  upon  the  surface.  In 
order  to  avoid  cracking,  it  is  left  in  this  position  a  little  while,  that  the  pan  and 
contents  may  become  evenly  heated,  and  is  then  pressed  down  by  means  of  the 
crane  till  the  metal  can  just  flow  into  the  corners.  (The  metal  should  be  care- 
fully skimmed  just  before  putting  the  pan  in.)  It  soon  covers  the  floater,  and 
finds  its  way  between  it  and  the  moulds,  filling  up  the  interval,  and,  pressing 
upward  against  the  face  of  the  moulds,  fiLUs  aU  the  crevices  and  irregularities. 
As  soon  as  the  pan  is  filled,  it  is  submerged,  and  remains  so  till  the  bubbling 
and  boiling,  caused  by  the  expulsion  of  air  and  moisture  contained  in  the 
mould,  cease. 

Great  care  must  be  taken  to  have  the  metal  of  a  proper  temperature.  If 
not  hot  enough,  it  will  not  flow  freely,  and  there  will  be  no  face  to  the  plates ; 
and  if  too  hot,  the  moulds  will  crack,  and  the  metal  will  make  a  ridge  upon  the 
face  of  the  plate  and  spoil  it.  The  test  commonly  appUed  by  casters  is  to  dip 
stiff  writing-paper  into  the  metal,  when,  if  the  temperature  is  right,  the  paper 
will  turn  a  hght  brown ;  but  if  too  high,  the  paper  will  be  quickly  scorched 
to  a  dark  brown,  or  snap  off  with  the  heat,  and  measures  must  be  taken  to 
cool  the  metal  down,  either  by  diminishing  the  draught  of  the  fire,  and  waiting 
till  this  has  its  effect,  or  by  putting  cold  metal  into  the  pot. 

The  pan  and  its  contents  are  then  Hf  ted  out  and  swung  on  to  the  bed  of  the 
cooUng  trough,  which  is  of  about  twice  the  size  of  the  pan,  and  has  in  the 
centre  a  raised  platform.  The  bed  must  be  perfectly  level,  and  the  water 
should  just  cover  it  when  the  pan  is  first  put  in,  more  being  added  as  the  pan 
cools,  till  it  comes  nearly  to  the  top  of  the  pan. 

If  the  casts  are  rapidly  cooled,  owing  to  too  much  water  in  the  trough,  they 
will  crack. 

The  metal  shrinks  in  cooling,  and,  as  fast  as  it  settles  down,  the  caster 
supplies  the  deficiency  by  pouring  a  little  hot  metal  from  a  ladle  into  the 
openings  through  the  cover. 

When  the  cast  is  cooled  off,  it  is  taken  from  the  water-trough  and  placed 
on  a  large  block  of  wood,  called  the  knocking-out  block,  which  is  about  twenty- 
eight  inches  high,  and  a  little  larger  than  the  pan.  The  iron  handle  is  then 
unscrewed  and  the  cover  taken  off,  by  prying  it  up  with  a  cold  chisel  at  the 
corners.  The  pan  is  then  turned  over  and  allowed  to  fall  top  downward  with 
a  Httle  shock.  The  cast  falls  out.  It  looks  Uke  a  sohd  pig  of  metal,  the 
floater,  plates,  and  moidds  being  enveloped  with  a  covering  of  metal.  The 
cast  is  again  turned  over,  so  that  it  lies  upon  the  block  in  the  same  position 
that  it  did  in  the  pan.  A  few  smart  blows  with  a  hammer  upon  the  corners 
and  sides  remove  the  heavier  parts  of  the  cast,  leaving  the  moulds  and  plates 
exposed  upon  the  floater.  The  thin  covering  of  metal  is  stripped  off  the 
backs  of  the  moulds,  and  the  sohd  metal  which  fills  the  spaces  between  the 
moulds  is  knocked  away.  The  plaster  has  become  brittle  by  the  heat,  so  that 
it  crumbles,  and  is  easUy  removed  from  the  plate,  except  that  which  was  in 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


Ill 


contact  with  the  metal,  which  will  adhere  to  it.  The  plates  are,  therefore,  put 
into  a  trough  of  water  and  allowed  to  soak,  so  that  the  plaster  may  be  easUy 
washed  out  by  beating  with  a  stiff  brush.  The  moulds  are,  of  coiirse,  com- 
pletely destroyed  in  casting,  and  cannot  be  used  a  second  time. 

In  melting  off  the  adhering  metal  from  the  old  plaster  moidds,  be  suxe  that 
the  plaster  is  not  wet,  as  the  steam  generated  would  cause  melted  metal  to  fly 
out  of  the  pot,  and  the  operator  would  be  apt  to  be  badly  burned. 


Casting-  Pan. 


Prices  of  Iron  Casting  Pans. 


-No. 

Size  of  matter. 

Price. 

No. 

Size  of  matter. 

Price. 

1  . 

6x9  inches 

.  $14.50 

4  . 

.    15x20  inches  . 

.  $30.00 

2  . 

9X12  inches  . 

.  18.00 

5  . 

.    18x24  inches  . 

.  36.00 

3  . 

.    12x16  inches  . 

.  24.00 

6  . 

.    21 X  28  inches  . 

.  42.00 

Includes  cover  floater,  bridle,  and  screw. 


COLOR  PLATES. 

In  stereotyping  blocks  used  for  color  printing,  where  absolute  register  is 
imperative,  care  must  be  taken  (especially  with  large  ones)  to  make  all  of  a  series 
with  the  same  batch  of  plaster  and  the  same  run  of  metal,  and  as  nearly  as 
possible  under  the  same  conditions,  else  unequal  shrinkage  (of  the  plaster 
especially)  will  give  blocks  differing  in  register,  and  hence  utterly  useless  for 
color  printing.  It  is  best  to  mould  and  cast  all  the  plates  the  same  size, 
although  there  may  be  no  need,  for  printing  purposes,  of  having  some  blocks — 
say  those  for  red  or  for  gold — as  large  as  the  "  key."  From  a  plate  which  is  a 
trifle  too  large,  one  somewhat  smaller  may  be  obtained  by  taking  a  cast,  then  one 
from  the  second,  etc.,  each  one  being  slightly  smaller  than  the  one  from  which 
it  is  taken.    The  thinner  the  plaster,  the  greater  the  shrinkage. 


112 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


Melting  Furnace,  Crane,  Casting  Pan,  and  Cooling  Trough  used  in  Plaster  Process. 


Prices  of  Iron  Melting  Furnaces,  for  Plaster  Process. 

No.             Size  of  matter.            Depth  of  pot.                   Capacity.                          Price.  Boxing. 

2  .    .     9x12  ill.    .    .    10  in.    .    .    600  lbs.  metal    .    .  $75.00  .    .  $2.50 

3  .    .  12x16  ill.    .    .    10  in.    .    .  1000  lbs.  metal    .    .   135.00  .    .  4.00 

4  .    .   15  X  20  in.    .    .    10  in.    .    .  1500  lbs.  metal    .    .   195.00  .    .  6.00- 


Price  of  Iron  Crane  for  iron  furnaces  $60.00- 

Price  of  Iron  Cooling  Troughs  for  casting  pans  

These  troughs  are  furnished  with  waste  cask  and  cooling  stand  for  the  pans. 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


113 


THE   CLAY  PROCESS. 


THE    MOULDING  COMPOSITION. 


Take  potters'  washed  clay,  dried  and  powdered,  eight  pounds ;  kaolin,  four 
pounds ;  powdered  soapstone,  three  pounds ;  pass  them  through  a  fine  sieve ; 
then  add  water,  and  mix  thoroughly  until  the  mixture  is  of  the  consistency  of 
dough,  and  the  composition  is  ready  for  use. 

Place  the  form  on  the  bed  of  the  moulding  press ;  see  that  it  is  properly 
locked-up,  spaces  down,  etc.,  as  is  usual  with  plaster  stereotyping ;  then  take  a 
fine  goat's-hair  brush,  dip  it  lightly  into  a  little  benzine,  and  brush  the  face  of 
the  type  well  with  it. 

Take  a  sufficient  quantity  of  the  composition  to  mould  the  form ;  spread  it 
■out  on  the  slab  and  sprinkle  about  two  tablespoonfuls  of  fine  plaster  of  Paris 
to  every  quarter  of  a  pound  of  composition ;  pour  a  little  water  on,  and  mix 
it  well  with  a  trowel.  This  should  be  done  quickly,  as  the  plaster  is  designed 
to  harden  the  composition  slightly  during  the  process  of  moulding,  for  which 
it  is  now  ready. 


The  moulder  will  observe  that  there  are  two  flat  iron  plates,  one  being  an  inch 
narrower  than  the  other.  Take  the  smaller  of  the  two,  and,  with  a  brush, 
cover  the  surface  with  thick  gum-arabic  water ;  then,  with  the  trowel,  spread 
the  moulding  composition  smoothly  over  it  and  level  it  off  by  the  instrument, 
which  is  made  to  fit  exactly  the  sides  of  this  plate,  and  is  drawn  over  the  com- 
position to  make  a  perfectly  even  surface. 


MOULDING. 


Press  for  Stereotype  Moulding. 


Price  of  moulding  press,  9  x  12  inches 


$125.00 


114  E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


stereotype  Melting  Furnace  —  Clay  Process. 

Metal  furnace,  complete,  aU  iron,  for  300  lbs.  metal  $75.00 

Clay  Process. 

The  iron  plate,  with  the  moulding  material  thus  prepared,  is  set  into  the- 
spring  frame  on  the  bed  of  the  press,  and  kept  steady  by  the  thumb  screw. 

The  form  having  been  previously  brushed  over  with  the  benzine,  now 
cover  it  with  a  sheet  of  thin  white  paper,  and  over  that  with  a  piece  of 
thin  white  muslin ;  then  turn  the  plate  over  and  take  a  light  impression ;. 
run  the  bed  back,  lift  the  plate,  and  observe  how  far  the  impression 
has  gone;  take  the  muslin  and  paper  off,  brush  the  form  lightly  with  the 
benzine  again,  put  on  another  piece  of  paper  and  cloth,  laying  the  previous 
ones  aside  for  future  use;  then  run  under  again  and  take  another  light 
impression,  being  careful  not  to  go  too  far ;  lift  the  moulding  plate  again,  and 
take  off  both  cloth  and  paper.  This  operation  is  only  to  give  depth  to  the 
spaces  and  blanks. 

Now  brush  again  with  the  benzine,  and  take  an  impression  into  the  clay, 
without  any  cloth  or  paper.  This  must  be  done  lightly  and  with  care,  as,  if 
the  impression  is  too  deep,  the  clay  wiU  tear  out.  It  generally  requires  two  or 
three  impressions,  after  the  cloth  and  paper  are  removed,  to  get  a  good  mould, 
each  impression  being  a  little  deeper  than  the  preceding  one ;  by  the  time  the 
last  impression  is  made,  the  composition  has  become  somewhat  harder  from 
the  setting  of  the  plaster  of  Paris. 

After  getting  a  good  mould,  clean  the  edges  of  the  iron  plate  from  the 
surplus  composition,  so  that  the  bent  wire  may  go  around  three  sides.  The 
iron  plate,  with  the  mould,  should  now  be  placed  on  the  flat  part  of  the  metal 
furnace,  and  dried  until  no  steam  can  be  seen,  when  it  must  be  taken  off  and 
placed  on  the  top  of  the  other  flat  iron  plate,  which  is  one  inch  larger,  and  the 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


116 


two  placed  on  the  melted  metal;  where*  they  will  float,  with  the  face  of  the 
mould  up.  Here  they  must  reniain  until  the  two  plates  and  the  mould  are 
of  the  same  temperature  as  the  melted  metal,  which  can  be  easily  found  by 
pouring  a  few  drops  of  the  metal  on  the  cleared  edge  of  the  iron  plate ;  at  first 
it  will  set,  then,  when  it  is  melted,  the  plates,  with  the  mould,  can  be  taken  out. 

Place  the  two  plates  on  the  upper  edge  of  the  metal  pot,  and  slide  one  off 
the  other ;  put  the  bent  wire  around  the  three  sides  of  the  mould ;  then  with  a 
pair  of  tongs  put  the  larger  plate  on,  so  that  three  of  the  sides  shaU  be  even, 
and  the  inch  of  extra  width  shall  project  over  on  the  fourth  side.  Now  clamp 
the  three  sides,  and  place  the  whole  in  the  trough  in  an  inclined  position,  the 
larger  plate  being  at  the  back;  pour  in  the  melted  metal,  and,  when  fuU, 
sprinkle  water  on  with  the  watering-pot,  commencing  at  the  bottom,  and 
gradually  cooling  up ;  as  the  metal  cools  and  shrinks,  fill  up  with  fresh  metal. 

When  the  metal  sets,  take  out  the  cast  and  wash  out  the  clay  with  a  brush 
and  water. 


THE  PAPIER-MACHE*  PROCESS. 

This  process  is  especially  adapted  to  newspaper  work,  where  curved  plates  are 
desired  and  time  is  an  object.  Its  peculiar  beauty  is  that  several  casts  can  be 
taken  from  one  mould  or  matrix.  It  is  also  extensively  used  in  job  work,  par- 
ticularly when  many  plates  of  the  same  kind  are  required. 


TO   PREPARE   THE  PASTE. 

Take  five  ounces  of  flour,  seven  ounces  of  white  starch,  a  large  teaspoonful  of 
powdered  alum,  and  four  quarts  of  water.  Put  the  flour,  starch,  and  alum  into 
a  saucepan,  and  mix  with  a  little  of  the  water,  cold,  until  the  whole  becomes  of 
the  consistency  of  thick  cream.  Then  gradually  add  the  remainder  of  the 
water,  which  must  be  boiling,  stirring  well  meantime  to  prevent  hxmps.  Put 
the  mixture  over  the  fire  and  stir  until  it  boils ;  then  let  it  stand  until  quite 
cold,  when  it  should  look  like  jelly.  When  you  are  ready  for  work,  add  Spanish 
whiting,  the  mixture  not  to  be  too  stiff  to  spread  readily  with  the  paste-brush. 
Put  through  a  fine  wire  sieve  with  a  stiff  brush,  and  it  is  ready  for  use. 


THE  FORM. 

Impose  the  form  with  the  type-high  wood  or  metal  border  furniture  around 
it  like  an  ordinary  ride  border,  putting  tht^  bevelled  edge  close  against  the  type, 
and  slightly  loosening  the  quoins.  It  is  possible  to  cast  metal  border  furniture 
in  the  mould,  using  the  gauge,  and  beveUing  the  edge  that  goes  against  the  type 
with  plane  and  shoot-board ;  but  a  more  convenient  way  is  to  cast  it  in  a  border 
furniture  mould,  made  for  the  purpose.  For  regular  newspaper  work,  the 
chases  are  made  type-high,  and  no  border  furniture  is  required. 

*  Pronounced  "pap-yay  mah-shay";  and  not  "paper  mashay." 


116 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


TO   PREPARE   THE   MATRIX  PAPER. 

See  that  the  paper  used  is  like  the  specimens  furnished  with  the  apparatus. 
Take  a  sheet,  unsized  and  soft,  not  so  thick  as  ordinary  blotting  paper,  and 
spread  the  paste  evenly  upon  it.  Lay  a  piece  of  tissue  paper  lightly  over  this, 
and  roU  it  with  an  iron  roller  tiU  all  wrinkles  disappear.  Add  a  second  sheet 
of  tissue,  then  a  third,  and  the  matrix  is  made.  When  enough  are  made  for  one 
or  two  days,  dip  them  severally  in  water,  saturating  them  thoroughly,  and 
place  the  whole  between  two  heavy  plates  about  three-sixteenths  of  an  inch 
thick,  that  may  be  cast  in  the  mould,  and  place  the  whole  under  water  in  a 
trough.    They  will  be  ready  for  use  the  next  day. 


Iron-Top  Beating  Table,  for  Paper  Process. 


Prices  of  Iron-Top  Beating  Table,  for  Paper  Process. 


Price, 

Price,  ele- 

Price, 

Price,  elo- 

No. 

Size  matter. 

fixed  top. 

vatiDf?  top. 

No. 

Size  matter. 

fixed  top 

vatiiis  top. 

4 

15  X  20  in. 

$40.00 

$75.00 

6 

21  X  28  in. 

$55.00 

$105.00 

5 

18  X  24  in. 

50.00 

95.00 

7 

24  X  32  in. 

65.00 

125.00 

R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


117 


Matrix  Rolling  Machine  for  Newspaper  Work  —  Papier-Mach6  Process. 

This  machine,  which  is  constructed  entirely  of  iron,  in  a  very  substantial  manner,  takes  the 
place,  in  large  establishments,  of  the  beating  table  and  brush,  and  on  it  a  paper  matrix  can 
be  prepared  for  the  drying  press  in  from  two  to  four  minutes,  thus  making  a  very  consid- 
erable saving  in  time.  The  form  is  laid  upon  the  traversing  bed,  and  passes  slowly  backward 
and  forward  under  the  large  roller. 

Price  of  matrix  rolling  machine,  32  x  37  inches  $450.00 

TO    MOULD    THE  MATRIX. 

Cut  a  piece  of  this  prepared  paper  with  scissors,  rather  larger  than  the  page 
to  be  stereotyped;  prepare  the  face — /.  e.,  the  tissue  side — with  impalpably 
fine  powdered  French  chalk,  absolutely  free  from  grit ;  gently,  but  evenly, 
smoothing  it  over  with  the  preparing  brush.  OH  the  type  sparingly  with  a 
soft  brush  dipped  in  the  best  oMve  oil,  and  lay  the  paper  face  downward  on  the 
form.  Dip  a  piece  of  coarse  linen  in  cold  water,  and  wring  it  out ;  lay  it  over 
the  back  of  the  matrix,  and  beat  the  latter  gently  into  the  type,  taking  care  to 
bring  the  beating  brush  down  flat  every  stroke.  When  weU  beaten  in,  paste  a 
piece  of  soft,  matrix  paper  on  the  back  of  the  matrix,  and  beat  again  without 
the  cloth,  gently  lifting  up  one  corner  to  see  if  it  is  sufficiently  deep.  If  an 
open  or  rule-work  form,  gently  pick  the  cartridge  paper  through  in  the  open 


118 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catai^ogue. 


parts,  to  liberate  the  air.  Extra  depth  may  be  had  by  packing  between  the 
matrix  and  cartridge  paper  small  pieces  of  an  old  matrix,  carefully  pasting 
them  to  the  matrix,  observing  that  the  piece  do  not  exceed  half  the  size  of  the 
blank  spaces. 

DRYING. 

The  matrix  is  dried  on  the  form  of  type  by  means  of  a  special  press.  The 
steam  having  been  turned  on,  put  a  double  thickness  of  blanket  on  the 
matrix,  and  screw  down  pretty  hard.  After  ten  or  fifteen  minutes,  unscrew 
the  press,  remove  the  blanket,  and  let  the  matrix  dry  about  ten  minutes ;  then . 
gently  separate  the  matrix.  It  sometimes  happens  that  the  matrix  will  not 
leave  the  type,  in  which  case  the  form  must  be  made  once  more  hot,  and  form, 
matrix,  and  all  plunged  into  cold  water ;  the  matrix  will  then  come  off,  but  of 
course  is  destroyed.    This  seldom,  if  ever,  occurs  after  a  little  practice. 

If  wood-cuts,  or  forms  with  wood-cuts,  are  to  be  done,  the  same  process  is 
applicable,  except  that  the  matrix  must  be  dried  cold,  consequently  taking 
much  more  time. 

TO     PREPARE    THE    MATRIX    FOR  CASTING. 

Cut  around  it  with  scissors,  leaving  about  three  pica  ems  of  margin.  Beat 
down  with  a  hammer  any  inaccuracy  caused  by  the  imperfect  joining  of  the 
border  furniture,  paste  a  piece  of  brown  paper  to  the  front  margin  of  the 
matrix,  and  lay  it  on  the  drying  press  to  get  thoroughly  warmed  through. 

The  following  note,  by  the  compiler,  in  the  Polytechnic  Review  for  May, 
1876,  may  be  interesting  as  showing  some  variations  in  the  before-described 
practice,  and  as  giving  the  usual  running  time  for  each  operation : 

"type,  presses,  and  the  wee  sma'  hours. 

"  A  recent  visit  to  the  stereotyping  department  of  the  New- York  Herald  was  well  repaid- 
Mr.  E.  L.  Henderson,  the  superintendent,  very  kindly  explained  the  whole  process  of  making 
paper  matrices,  and  stereotype  casts  from  these.  The  writer  timed  the  operations,  with  the 
following  result : 

"At  12.24  the  form  of  the  fifth  page  of  the  Herald,  bearing  the  date  of  March  21st,  came 
up  the  elevator  from  the  composition-room.  It  was  slid  on  a  long  iron  table,  oiled  with  a 
roller,  and  a  sheet  of  thick  tissue-faced  paper  (dampened)  and  then  a  blanket  placed  thereon. 
The  whole  was  riui  under  a  heavy  roller  and  back  again,  forcing  the  paper  into  the  finest 
recesses  of  the  type,  by  12.26;  by  12.27  the  depressions  were  filled  with  plaster;  by  12.28 
the  paper  and  plaster  were  coated  with  thick  size,  and  anotlier  thick  sheet  of  paper  applied  as 
a  backing.  A  blanket  was  then  laid  on  all,  and  the  whole  '  hot  pressed '  in  a  steam  press  imtil 
12.34;  by  12.35  the  matrix  was  removed,  trimmed  square,  and  'dusted';  by  12.36  it  was 
snugly  curved  in  a  semi-cylindrical  iron  casting  box,  and  a  semi-cylindrical  iron  core,  with 
peripheral  corrugations,  clamped  so  as  to  leave  a  semi-annular  space  of  about  three-eighths  of 
an  inch;  by  12. 36^  the  melted  metal  was  dashed  in  from  an  adjacent  kettle;  by  12.37  the 
mould  partly  cooled  by  a  dash  of  water,  and  the  curved  cast  removed;  by  12.37 }4.  the  cast 
was  placed  on  a  semi-cylindrical  horse,  and  the  end  trimmed  and  bevelled  by  a  vibrating 
circular  saw;  by  12.38>^  the  relief  was  improved  by  rapid  chiselUng  in  open  spaces;  and  by 
12.39  the  inside  was  dressed  neatly  to  gauge  by  a  rotating  planer  bit.    The  dumb-waiter 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


119 


then  received  the  completed  and  yet  hot  cast,  and  sent  it  down  six  or  seven  stories  into  the 
basement  press-room. 

"  Time  of  operation,  fifteen  minutes,  of  which  eleven  were  occupied  in  making  the  paper 
mould.  From  this  same  mould  ten  casts  are  taken  for  the  turtles  of  the  single  and  double 
Bullock  presses.  These  last  receive  the  paper  in  a  continuous  web,  print  it  on  both  sides, 
divide  the  twin  sheets,  and  cut  them  off,  and  flirt  them  off  in  foiu-  piles,  at  the  rate  of  15,000 
sheets  per  hour  for  each  double  press. 

"  The  pressman,  Mr.  Hale,  keen-eyed  and  alert,  motions  or  shouts  to  his  assistants  to  stop  or 
adjust  the  presses  or  paper,  on  the  discovery  of  a  fault  or  break.  The  hum  of  the  whirring 
wheels,  the  soft  cracking  or  kissing  of  the  rollers,  and  the  rustling  of  the  flying  paper,  the 
shouting  and  rushing  to  and  fro,  the  glittering  lights  and  dancing  shadows,  are  exciting  in  the 
highest  degree." 

THE  METAL. 

The  metal  used  iu  stereotyping  should,  when  cast  in  a  plate,  possess  a  bright, 
smooth  surface,  hardness,  toughness,  closeness  of  grain,  and  freedom  from 
bubbles.  To  test  the  quality  of  the  metal,  run  a  little  ingot  out  on  a  stone  slab. 
The  hardness  may  be  tried  with  a  graver,  and  the  surface  easily  examined.  By 
cracking  the  ingot  with  a  hammer,  the  grain  or  crystalline  quality  is  observed. 
A  bright-surfaced  and  close-grained  metal  makes  the  best  stereotypes.  When 
the  metal  is  too  crystalline  (generally  due  to  excess  of  antimony),  a  little  lead 
should  be  added.  When  too  soft,  add  a  little  antimony.  By  pouring  ingots 
and  examining  the  fracture,  the  desired  quality  is  arrived  at. 

Old  type  or  stereotype  plates  melted  down  wUl  answer  every  purpose,  if 
good.    Be  careful  not  to  put  damp  pieces  in  the  molten  metal,  or  it  will  fly. 

OLD   AND    DIRTY  METAL. —  FLUXING. 

It  often  happens  that  after  constant  use  the  metal  becomes  so  dirty  as  to  render 
good  plates  an  impossibility,  and  cleaning  then  becomes  a  necessity.  This  is 
done  by  heating  the  metal  until  it  burns  the  roll  of  test  paper,  and  putting  in 
powdered  rosin,  stirring  the  whde  with  an  iron  rod.  As  the  scum  or  dross 
appears  on  the  surface,  it  should  be  skimmed  off,  and  more  rosin  added,  and 
the  stirring  continued  imtd  no  more  impurities  can  be  extracted. 

Wax  and  paraffine  are  also  used  in  the  place  of  rosin,  but  are  not  quite  so 
effectual. 

Metal  that  is  not  very  dirty  may  be  renewed  by  heating  the  metal  quite  hot, 
but  not  red  hot,  throwing  on  it  about  a  tablespoonful  of  oil,  and  stirring  it  well, 
adding  a  little  more  oil,  and  stirring  again,  then  throwing  a  handful  of  ashes 
over  the  metal  and  skimming  it,  when  it  shoidd  look  like  quicksilver.  The 
dirty  oil  from  a  press,  an  old  oily  rag,  or,  in  fact,  almost  any  greasy  substance, 
will  answer  the  purpose.  If  the  metal  clings  to  the  melting  pot,  making  it  look 
as  though  tinned,  it  is  of  poor  quality,  and  if  not  set  right  by  the  flux,  is  nearly 
worthless,  and  the  plates  cast  from  it  will  be  honey-combed.  As  fluxing  causes 
a  bad  smeU,  it  is  well  to  have  a  portable  sheet-iron  bonnet  made  to  the  melting 
pot,  with  a  smaU  door  through  which  to  stir  the  metal,  and  a  pipe  leading  to  a 
flue  to  carry  off  the  odor.  This  bonnet  must  be  lifted  off  when  casting.  To 
ascertain  the  right  heat  of  the  metal  for  casting,  fold  some  paper  into  slips,  dip 


120 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


into  the  pot,  and  if  turned  black,  the  metal  is  too  hot,  but  if  turned  to  a  straw- 
color,  it  is  just  right. 

TO   CAST   THE  PLATE. 

Place  the  gauge  in  the  casting  mould,  properly  adjusted,  and  pour  it  full 
of  metal  about  three  times,  to  heat  the  mould;  then  place  the  matrix  in  the 
mould,  so  that  the  paper  hangs  out  of  the  mouth ;  place  the  gauge  around 
three  sides  of  the  matrix,  close  to  the  work,  and  upon  the  margin,  close  to  the 
mould,  and  screw  tight.  Hold  the  overhanging  piece  of  paper  in  the  left- 
hand,  and,  after  skimming  off  the  dross,  pour  a  quick,  continuous  stream  of 
molten  metal.  The  paper  is  simply  to  conduct  the  metal  and  to  prevent  its 
getting  behind  the  matrix. 

In  handling  hot  metal  plates,  furniture,  etc.,  it  is  of  course  requisite  to 
have  holders,  made  of  some  stout  woollen  fabric. 


Small  Melting  Furnace  and  Drying  Press,  combined. 


Price,  $ 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


121 


Stereotype  Mould  Drying  Press,  for  Paper  Process. 


The  table  is  heated  by  steam,  which,  at  ordinary  pressure,  will  dry  a  matrix  in  from  six  to 
eight  minutes.  Where  haste  is  important,  steam  platens  are  furnished,  by  which  the  time  of 
drying  is  reduced  nearly  one-half.  It  is  desirable  that  the  platen  be  perforated,  to  allow  the 
escape  of  the  moisture. 


Prices  pf  Steam  Drying  Presses. 


No. 

2 
3 
4 


Size  matter. 

9  X  12  in. 
12  X  16  in. 
15  X  20  in. 


Price  with 
solid  platen. 

$120.00 
180.00 
240.00 


Price  with 
steam  platen. 

$140.00 
216.00 
288.00 


size  matter. 

18  X  24  in. 
21  X  28  in. 
24  X  32  in. 


Price  with  Price  with 
solid  platen.  Hteam  platen. 


$300.00 
360.00 
450.00 


$360.00 
440.00 
550.00 


122 


E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


Flat  Stereotype  Plate  Moiild,  for  Paper  Process. 


This  mould,  for  easting  stereotype  plates  from  a  paper  matrix,  is  made  of  iron  and  balanced  in 
bearings  in  an  iron  frame.  When  used,  it  is  held  in  a  horizontal  position  by  a  trip  lever,  and 
the  cover  is  thrown  up  against  the  back  stay.  The  matrix  is  then  laid  in,  the  gauge  bars 
adjusted  to  it,  and  the  cover  closed.  In  the  smaller  sizes,  the  cover  is  secured  by  a  single 
screw  in  the  centre ;  but  in  the  larger  sizes  it  is  fastened  by  four  or  six  clamps  at  the  sides. 
The  mould  is  then  tiirned  in  an  upright  position  to  receive  the  metal,  and  back  to  a  horizontal 
one  to  have  the  stereotype  plate  removed. 


Prices  of  Iron  Casting  Moulds. 


Price  of        Price  of  Box- 
No,      Sizematter.     flatform.  curveil  fonn.  ing. 

2  9  X  12  in.  $120.00  $180.00  $2.00 

3  12x16  in.    145.00    210.00  2.25 

4  15x20  in.    185.00    270.00  2..50 


Price  of 
flat  form. 


Price  of 
curved  form. 


Box- 
ing. 


No.    Size  matter. 

5    18x24  in.  $240.00  $330.00  $2.75 
300.00    400.00  3.00 


21  X  28  in. 
24  X  32  in. 


360.00    480.00  3.25 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue.  123 


stereotype  Melting  Furnace.    Papier-Maeh6  Process. 


This  furnace  is  strongly  made  of  iron  and  lined  with  fire-brick.  It  stands  clear  of  the  floor  on 
feet ;  and,  as  the  bottom  is  lined,  and  a  hearth  projects  in  front  of  the  doors,  it  is  entirely  free 
from  the  danger  of  setting  fire. 

Prices  of  Iron  Melting  Furnaces  with  Circtilar  Pot. 


Diameter  Lined  witli 

No.                                    of  pot.  Capacity.  fire-brick.  Boxing. 

1   11  inclies  .    .    .  150  lbs.  metal  .  .  $75.00  .  .  $2.00 

2   15  inclies  ...  330  lbs.  metal  .  .  100.00  .  .  2.50 

3   19  inclies  ...  750  lbs.  metal  .  .  150.00  .  .  3.50 

4   23  inches  .    .    .  1,450  lbs.  metal  .  .  195.00  .  .  5.00 

5   27  iacbes  .    .    .  1,725  lbs.  metal  .  .  240.00  .  .  6.00 

6   32  inclies  .    .    .  3,025  lbs.  metal  .  .  300.00  .  .  8.00 


TO    SEPARATE    THE    MATRIX    FROM    THE  PLATE. 

Should  they  refuse  to  part,  beat  the  matrix  with  the  beating  brush ;  if  still 
obstinate,  make  the  plate  hot  on  the  moulding  press  and  plunge  into  cold  water, 
then  put  them  with  the  matrix  downmost  in  the  hot  moulding  press,  and 
press  tightly  with  the  hand,  when  the  steam  will  force  the  matrix  from  the 
»  plate.  The  plate  will  be  good,  but  the  matrix  spoiled,  which  is  evidence  that 
these  instructions  have  not  been  (correctly  followed.  Should  the  matrix 
separate  from  the  plates  without  difficulty,  many  plates  may  be  cast  from  the 
same  matrix.    (See  directions  for  finishing.) 

SHAVING. 

All  the  plates  of  the  same  book  should  be  shaved  to  the  same  gauge,  and  there 
is  no  part  of  the  finishing  the  printer  criticizes  so  closely  as  accuracy  in  this 


124 


E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


respect,  for  liis  labor  may  be  greatly  increased  by  neglect  of  the  stereotyper  or 
electrotyper  to  make  them  even. 

The  plates  are  then  chiselled — that  is,  the  bearera  are  cut  away  and  aU  the 
blank  spaces  are  chipped  down  with  chisel  and  maUet  low  enough  to  avoid 
danger  of  blacking  in  printing.  The  foot-Uues  are  cut  down  low  and  partially 
trimmed  off.  The  heads  are  trimmed  close  to  the  head-line,  and  should  be 
perfectly  accurate. 

The  sides  of  the  plate  are  bevelled  with  a  plane,  made  specially  for  this 
purpose,  which  gives  a  smooth  edge  with  a  true  and  uniform  slope  the  whole 
length.  This  is  necessary  to  enable  the  printer  to  make  register,  for  it  ensures 
that  the  catches  of  the  blocks  wiU  hold  all  the  plates  in  the  same  relative 
position.  In  large  establishments  this  is  done  with  the  power  bevelling  machine. 

After  beveUing,  and  squaring,  and  routing,  the  plates  are  examined  and 
closely  scrutinized,  letter  by  letter,  though  practice  enables  the  finisher  to  do 
this  very  rapidly,  and  his  eye  catches  quickly  and  surely  aU  the  defects. 
Some  letters  may  be  filled  up  with  metal,  which  must  be  picked  away  to 
restore  the  shape  of  the  type,  or  the  mould  may  have  broken  away,  leaving 
several  lettei-s  run  together.  Any  unnecessary  matter  that  would  show  in 
printing,  and  which  was  left  in  chiselling,  must  be  cut  away,  and  letters  injured 
in  any  of  the  previous  processes  must  be  repaired  or  replaced.  In  short,  the 
finisher's  aim  is  to  make  the  plate  as  good  as  the  form  from  which  it  is  made. 

ALTERATIONS. 

An  important  part  of  the  finisher's  business  is  making  alterations  in  plates. 
Sometimes  before  the  work  is  sent  to  the  printer,  but  after  the  type  is  dis- 
tributed, it  is  found  necessary  to  make  corrections  or  improvements  in  plates, 
and  often  changes  are  called  for  in  later  editions.  These  may  be  of  single 
letters  or  words,  or  parts  of  a  line,  or  whole  paragraphs.  If  the  change  is  of 
a  single  letter  or  word,  occupying  the  same  space  as  that  already  in  the  plate, 
the  latter  is  cut  out  and  a  hole  is  made  through  the  plate  just  large  enough  to 
admit  the  new  letter  or  word,  the  type  of  which  is  taken  and  put  into  the  hole. 
A  good  workman  will  make  it  so  accurate  that  a  little  pressure  must  be  exerted 
to  insert  the  type.  The  plate  is  then  laid  face  downward  upon  a  smooth,  level 
surface,  the  bottom  of  the  type  projecting  out  of  the  back  of  the  plate ;  the 
correction  is  driven  lightly  to  the  surface  on  which  the  plate  rests ;  the  ends 
of  the  type  are  cut  off  close  with  a  pair  of  nippers,  and  the  parts  remaining  in 
the  plate  are  soldered.  The  inequalities  of  the  solder  are  then  filed  or  shaved 
down  to  the  gauge  of  the  plate. 

If  the  correction  should  occupy  more  or  less  space  than  the  matter  it  super- 
sedes, more  words  are  taken  in,  tiU  the  difference  can  be  made  up  by  reducing 
or  increasing  the  spaces  between  the  words.  A  good  finisher  wlU  prefer,  how- 
ever, to  put  ill  a  whole  line,  or  even  have  a  piece  set  up,  than  have  the  spacing 
so  uneven  as  to  make  the  correction  conspicuous.  If  the  alteration  involves 
more  than  a  Une,  it  is  generally  set  up  and  cast ;  the  plate  is  sawed  through, 
the  incorrect  matter  is  cut  off,  and  the  new  piece  adjusted  properly  and 
soldered  on  the  back. 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


125 


After  all  the  work  on  the  plates  is  done,  the  foreman,  or  some  experienced 
workman,  sees  that  they  are  arranged  in  order  by  folios,  and  that  they  are 
made  up  into  sheets,  with  pasteboards  between  the  plates,  examining  each 
plate  as  he  handles  it,  to  make  sure  nothing  has  been  overlooked.  The  plates 
are  then  packed  in  boxes  of  proper  construction,  and  are  ready  to  go  to  press. 


Power  Shaving  Machirie. 


Price  of  Stereotype  Plate  Power  Shaving  Machine. 

No. 

6    To  shave  plate  having  matter  22  x  28  inches  $850.00 

MOUNTING.  —  BLOCKING. 

For  all  job  work  and  much  book  work,  the  backed  shells  are  not  used  on  the 
press  direct,  but  must  be  made  type-high.  This  is  generally  done  by  a  wooden 
block. 

11 


126 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


Plate  Bevelling  Machine. 


This  little  machine  dresses  off  and  bevels  the  edges  of  stereotype  and  electrotype  plates  in 
the  most  perfect  and  rapid  manner,  equally  on  all  sides,  and  parallel  to  the  matter.  The  edge 
of  the  printing  matter  is  placed  against  an  adjustable  side  gauge,  secured  in  this  position  by 
clamps,  and  passed  quickly  before  the  revolving  cutter,  a  stationary  cutter  at  the  same  time 
taking  off  the  sharp  corner  from  the  under  edge  of  the  plate.  The  table  can  be  adjusted  in 
height  and  also  inclined  to  give  a  bevel  more  or  less  acute,  and  the  revolving  cutter-head  is 
adjustable  horizontally  to  suit  the  position  of  the  table.  A  brass  cover  over  the  cutter 
prevents  the  chips  from  flying,  and  drops  them  into  a  box  below.  A  larger-sized  machine  is 
used  for  newspaper  work. 

A  counter-shaft,  hangers,  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  driving  pulleys,  and  a  set  of  cutters, 
with  gauges  for  grinding  and  setting  them,  accompany  each  machine. 


Power  Bevelling  Machines. 

No.  Price. 

1  For  book  work,  llj  x  36  incli  table   $180.00 

2  For  news  work,  16  x  51  inch  table   200.00 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


127 


Dressing  Table  for  Cxirved  Newspaper  Plates. 
(Used  on  perfecting  presses.) 


Prices  of  Iron  Finishing  or  Chiselling  Cylinders  for  stereotype  2)lates. 
Small  curve,  for  weh  presses. 


No. 

For  plates 

Price. 

No. 

I'or  plates 

Price. 

2  . 

9x12  inches  . 

.  $120.00 

5  . 

.    18x24  inches  . 

.  $135.00 

3  . 

.    12x16  inches  . 

.  125.00 

6  . 

.    21x28  inches  . 

.  140.00 

4  . 

.    15x20  inches  . 

.  130.00 

7  . 

.    24x32  inches  . 

.  155.00 

THE  WOOD. 

For  this  purpose,  cherry  is  the  most  generally  used  wood,  though  mahogany 
and  oak  are  employed  by  some.  Whatever  wood  be  iised,  it  should  be  very 
well  seasoned,  and  free  from  knots  or  checks. 

The  plate  being  sawed  by  circular  or  hand  saw,  as  small  as  is  possible,  a 
block  is  chosen,  exactly  that  size,  if  possible,  although  if  too  large  it  may  be 
readily  dressed  off.  The  plate  is  fastened  to  it  by  round  wire  nails  aboiit  half 
an  inch  long.  If  the  nails  be  good,  and  the  operator  skilful,  they  can  be  driven 
without  risk,  perforating  the  metal,  and  hold  much  tighter  than  where  the  awl 
is  used.  The  nails  should  be  plentifully  used,  especially  on  large  blocks,  where 
there  is  great  danger  lest  the  strain  in  the  press,  or  twisting  of  the  blocks  from 
heat  or  dampness,  draw  them.  In  fact,  it  is  best  to  use  some  countersunk  wood 
screws  on  at  least  the  largest  blocks. 

Care  should  be  taken  lest  the  nail-heads  project,  or  the  neighboring  metal  be 
forced  up  above  the  printing  surface,  this  being  more  likely  with  stereotype 
than  with  electrotype  blocks.  It  is  well  to  use  a  small  nail-punch,  to  ensure 
that  the  nails  are  well  driven  home. 


128 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


The  wooden  block  and  finished  plate  should  together  be  exactly  type-height 
— that  is,  the  height  of  type  in  the  city  where  the  blocking  is  done,  for  many 
type-founders  purposely  maintain  special  type-heights  of  their  own,  to  jirevent 
their  rivals'  type  being  used  in  the  same  form  with  theirs. 

Many  European  blocks  which  come  over  here  (especially  the  Grerman  and 
Swedish)  are  at  least  "  a  card-board"  lower  than  om*  standard. 

It  might  be  well  in  some  cases  to  make  the  blocks  a  trifle  under  type-height, 
which  would  ensure  their  being  underlaid,  and  printing  better  than  without 
any  such  care. 

But  all  blocks  of  a  series  shoiild  be  invariable  in  their  thickness,  and  xinless 
some  special  reason  exist,  aU  those  from  any  one  blocker  should  gauge  the 
same. 

After  blocking,  they  are  squared  up  with  a  plane,  and  the  surfaces  must  be 
not  only  smooth,  square,  and  true  one  with  another,  but  the  sides  must  be 
exactly  "plumb,"  or  at  right  angles  with  the  printing  face  and  bottom.  Rough 
or  untrue  blocks  entail  annoyance,  delay,  and  loss  to  the  printer,  and  are  an 
abomination  and  utterly  inexcxxsable. 

For  thus  squaring  the  sides  and  ends  of  blocked  and  unblocked  electrotypes 
or  stereotypes,  the  "shoot-board"  is  used.  It  consists  of  an  accurately  trued 
iron  bed,  with  a  crosspiece  exactly  at  right  angles  to  it.  One  plane  is  narrow 
and  bevelled  for  unblocked,  the  other  for  wide  and  square  blocked,  plates. 


Shoot-Board  and  Two  Planes. 


Prices  of  Iron  Shoot-Boards. 

9  X 15  inches,  with  one  bevel  and  one  side  plane  .  . 
18  X  32  inches,  with  one  bevel  and  one  side  plane  .  . 


$35.00 
40.00 


MORTISING. 


Mortised  blocks  are  those  which  have  the  plate  and  block  cut  away  in  places 
to  allow  of  type  being  inserted.    Sometimes  merely  a  small  part  of  the  edge 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


129 


or  corner  is  sawed  out ;  sometimes  only  a  small  portion  is  left  projecting.  But 
frequently  the  removed  portion  is  entirely  surrounded  with  the  block.  To  do 
this,  a  jig  or  "  fret "  saw  with  fine-strained  blade  is  used.  A  starting  hole 
is  drilled  and  the  outline  of  the  mortise  carefully  followed  with  the  blade, 
care  being  taken  to  make  the  cut  true  and  smooth. 


Stereotypers'  Dressing  Table  for  Newspaper  Plates. 
(Used  on  type-revolving  presses.) 


Prices  of  Iron  Tables  for  bevelling  and  cutting  off  curved  plates. 
Large  curve,  for  rotary  presses. 


Piice, 
by  hand. 


Price, 
bj'  liowor. 


No.        Size  matter. 

4  15X20  inches    $200.00  $260.00 

5  18x24  inches      210.00  270.00 


No.       Size  matter. 


Price, 
l)y  hand. 


Price, 

by  power. 


6  21 X  28  inches    $225.00  $285.00 

7  24x32  inches      245.00  305.00 


130 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


Routing  Machine. 


Routing,  or  cutting  out  the  blank  spaces  in  plates,  is  effected  by  means  of  rotating  steel  cutters 
used  in  the  machine  shown  above,  which  is  the  same  as  that  used  by  wood-engravers.* 
Power  is  communicated  to  the  upright  shaft  in  the  corner  of  the  table,  and  thence  by  pulleys 
and  belts  to  the  steel  cutters,  which  revolve  seven  thousand  times  a  minute,  and  which,  by 
means  of  the  double  lever,  can  be  brought  to  any  point  with  ease  and  precision.  A  spring 
rest  prevents  the  tool  from  touching  the  plate  till  pressed  down  by  the  operator.  The  stand 
contains  shelves  for  tools,  etc. 

Routing  Machine^  for  cutting  out  blank  spaces  in  stereotype  and  electrotype  plates. 
To  work  iy  power.    Will  take  on  plate  22  x  28  inches. 

Price,  with  six  cutters  and  upright  shaft  $300.00 

*  Wood-engravers  rarely  rout  out  large  spaces  on  their  blocks,  except  where  the  original  is 
to  be  printed  from,  as  they  prefer  letting  the  stereotyper  rout  them  out  in  the  cast,  or  the 
electrotyper  build  up  the  mould. 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


131 


MOUNTING    ON  METAL. 


Advertising  blocks,  newspaper  heads,  and  many  other  pieces  of  work,  are 
often  mounted  on  metal  instead  of  wood.  To  do  this,  an  ingot  is  poured,  and 
the  backed  electrotype  or  stereotype  block  is  soldered  to  it,  and  the  back  then 
dressed  off. 

These  blocks  are  poured  in  an  adjustable  ingot  mould,  formed  by  clamping 
together  two  plates,  each  with  a  side  piece  as  high  as  the  desired  block.  Very 
often  the  block  has  cavities  or  deep  grooves  cast  in  its  under  surface,  to  lighten 
it  and  make  it  stand  squarely  on  its  feet. 


Unmounted  plates  (either  electrotypes  or  stereotypes)  are  used  on  the  press 
by  being  held  on  blocks  of  mahogany  or  iron,  supplied  with  gripping  pieces 
which  clamp  the  plates  firmly,  and  while  bringing  them  up  about  type-height, 
enable  them  to  be  imposed  and  locked-up.  Fig.  1  shows  a  plain  old-style 
mahogany  block  with  wrought-iron  hooks  (for  cyHnder  presses),  worked  with 
a  brass  pinion.  These  should  be  made  of  the  best  heart  boards,  thoroughly 
seasoned,  that  they  may  remain  true.  Fig.  2  is  a  patent  block  of  iron  or 
wood. 


Fig.  1. 


Fig.  2. 


PLATE  BLOCKS. 


132 


E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


APPENDIX  A. 


MATERIALS. 

« 

Nitric  Acid — commonly  called  aqua  fortis — keep  cool. 

Hydrochloric  (and  " ehlorohydrie,"  "mmiatic,"  "spirits  of  salt,"  and  "smoking  salts") 
keep  cool. 

Black-lead  ("plumbago,"  "graphite")  get  free  from  clay. 

Sulphuric  acid  ("oil  of  vitriol ")  keep  dry.  It  is  dangerous  to  pour  water  into  this  acid. 
Poxir  the  acid  slowly  into  the  water  (both  cool),  stirring  the  while. 


APPENDIX  B. 


ANTIDOTES    FOR    POISONS,  ETC. 

GENERAL  PRINCIPLES. 

In  cases  of  acid  poisoning,  the  best  antidotes  are  alkalies  and  earths.  These  should  be  followed 
by  mucilaginous  drinks.  Soap  in  large  quantities  applies  to  all  mineral  acids.  In  cases  of 
alkaline  poisoning,  vegetable  acids  prove  the  most  effectual. 

Keep  the  hands  and  arms  as  free  from  chemicals  as  possible,  as  the  pores  of  the  skin  absorb 
them,  and  produce  blood-poisoning,  which  is  very  often  fatal.  Never  dip  the  arms  in  a 
chemical  bath  to  recover  anything  dropped  therein. 

Where  the  hands  have  been  burned  by  acid,  bicarbonate  of  soda  is  the  best  antidote. 

Lime  water  and  olive  oil  should  be  applied  to  sores  produced  by  cyanide  of  potassium,  and 
the  sores  washed  frequently  in  rimning  water. 

ANTIDOTES   FOR  POISONS. 

Hydrocyanic  add  (prussic  acid) — Cyanide  of  silver,  cyanide  of  potassium,  or  ammonia  vapor,  if 
promptly  employed,  is  an  antidote  for  prussic  acid.  Acetate  or  citrate  of  iron  is  also 
effectual. 

Mercurial  poisoning — Iron,  white  of  egg.  For  corrosive  sublimate,  white  of  egg  is  most 
effectual. 

Muriatic  add — Magnesia,  soap. 

Sulphuric  add — Carbonates,  alkalies,  earths,  soap. 

Nitric  add — Magnesia,  soap  in  large  quantities. 

Ammonia — Vegetable  acids. 

Acetic  add — Vinegar. 

Citric  add — Lemon  jiiice. 

Lead — Iodide  of  potassium,  soluble  sulphates. 

Chlorine — White  of  egg,  ammonia. 

Nitrate  of  silver — Chloride  of  sodium  (common  salt). 

When  using  cyanide  of  potassium  to  remove  silver  stains,  add  to  its  solution  tincture  of 
iodine ;  then  it  is  more  effectual,  and  much  less  harmful. 

Hyposulphite  of  soda  is  weaker,  but  there  is  no  danger  in  using  it. 
Acid  stains  may  generally  be  removed  by  aqua  ammonia. 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


133 


APPENDIX  C. 


RELATIVE    POWER    OF  BATTERIES. 

The  following  experiments,  made  with  electrodes  double  the  size  of  the  zinc  plates  of  the 
batteries,  all  at  equal  distances  (one  inch)  apart,  will  show  the  relative  power  of  batteries. 
The  time  in  action  was  one  hour  each  ;  only  one  pair  of  plates  constituted  the  battery. 


Deposited. 

Grove's  battery  104  grains. 

Single-cell  battery  ....  62  grains. 
Daniell's  battery   33  grains. 


Depositeil. 

Smee's  battery  22  grains. 

Wollaston's  battery    ....    18  grains. 


CONSTANCY    OF  BATTERIES. 


But  the  first  hour  of  the  action  of  most  batteries  differs  from  an  hour  afterward,  so  that  one 
kind  of  battery  may  be  useful  for  a  short  time,  and  another  sort  if  the  action  is  to  be  continued 
for  a  length  of  time.  The  following  table  will  illustrate  this  remark,  the  condition  being  the 
same  as  in  last  experiment,  or  the  last  experiment  being  continued,  and  the  results  taken 
every  hour  for  seven  successive  hours : 


One 

Two 

Three 

Four 

Five 

Six 

Seven 

hour. 

hours. 

hours. 

hours. 

hours. 

hours. 

hours. 

Total. 

Grove's  battery 

104 

86 

66 

60 

54 

49 

45 

464  grains. 

Single-cell  battery  . 

62 

57 

54 

46 

39 

29 

24 

311  grains. 

Daniell's  battery  . 

33 

35 

34 

32 

32 

30 

31 

227  grains. 

Smee's  battery  .  . 

22 

16 

14 

11 

12 

11 

10 

96  grains. 

Wollaston's  battery 

18 

14 

15 

12 

11 

10 

10 

90  grains. 

To  make  this  comparison  more  practical,  larger  plates  were  used  for  the  battery,  and  pro- 
portionately larger  electrodes,  and  the  battery  kept  in  operation  until  one  pound  of  copper 
was  deposited,  renewing  the  acid  and  brushing  the  zincs  every  twenty-four  hours.  The  time 
taken  to  effect  this  was : 


Grove's  battery  19^  hours. 

Single-cell  battery  45  hours. 

Daniell's  battery  49  hours. 


Smee's  battery  147  hours. 

Wollaston's  battery   .    .    .    .    151  hours. 


RELATIVE  INTENSITY  OF  BATTERIES. 


Different  batteries  have  different  degrees  of  power  to  overcome  resistance — greater  intensity. 
The  following  experiments  will  illustrate  this :  A  single  pair  of  Wollaston's,  Smee's,  and 
Grove's  batteries  were  fitted  up  as  nearly  equal  in  circumstances  as  the  different  arrangements 
would  allow — each  exposing  the  same  surface  of  zinc,  and  connected  with  electrodes  placed  in 
a  solution  of  sulphate  of  copper,  first  one  inch,  then  two  inches,  three  inches,  and  four  inches 
apart — half  an  hour  in  each.  They  were  then  reversed,  beginning  with  the  electrodes  at  four 
inches,  and  coming  to  one  inch.  These  experiments  were  repeated  several  times,  and  a  mean 
of  the  whole  taken.    The  results  were  : 


134 


R;  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


Electrodes. 

One  inch  .... 
Two  inches  .  .  . 
Three  inches .  .  . 
Tour  inches   .    .  . 


Deposited. 


Wollaston. 

Smee. 

Grove. 

8.8  grains. 

12.0  grains. 

31.0  grains. 

6.6  grains. 

6.8  grains. 

26.0  grains. 

4.7  grains. 

6.0  grains. 

17.0  grains. 

3.0  grains. 

4.6  grains. 

14.0  grains. 

From  this  it  will  be  seen  that  Wollaston's  stands  lowest  in  intensity,  which  is  more  apparent 
as  the  distance  of  the  electrodes  is  increased.  Smee's  is  one-third  more  than  Wollaston's  at 
one  inch,  and  one  half  more  at  four  inches,  while  Grove's  is  three  and  a  half  more  than  Smee's 
at  one  inch,  but  four  and  a  half  more  than  Wollaston's  and  three  more  than  Smee's  at  four 
inches.  K  we  take  the  mean  of  these  results  as  a  comparison  of  batteries,  their  value  will 
stand  as  tmder : 

One  of  Grove's  equal  to  three  of  Smee's  and  to  three  and  three-fourths  of  Wollaston's. 

The  following  table  gives  the  results  of  different  batteries,  arranged  in  series,  kept  in 
action  the  same  length  of  time,  namely,  one  hour.  The  battery  plates  were  very  small,  the 
electrodes  twice  the  size  of  the  battery  plates. 


One 

Two 

Four 

Six 

Nino 

pair. 

l)airs. 

pairs. 

pairs. 

pairs. 

55 

72 

93 

97 

98 

15 

35 

60 

77 

86 

11 

19 

29 

41 

58 

8 

15 

24 

33 

48 

This  table  gives  results  approaching  to  and  in  principle  the  same  as  the  others ;  it  will  be 
observed  that  one  pair  of  Grove's  is  equal  to  nine  pairs  of  either  Wollaston's  or  Smee's.  It  is 
also  worthy  of  remark  that  Grove's  increases  slowly  in  quantity  above  four  pairs,  the  intensity 
being  sufficient  at  four  pairs  to  overcome  the  resistance  offered  to  the  current  of  electricity. 
For  ordinary  electrotyping,  intensity  arrangements  are  unnecessary,  except  when  the  article 
upon  which  the  deposit  is  being  made  is  of  such  a  character  as  will  not  allow  the  positive 
electrode  to  be  brought  close  to  it,  or  when  there  are  deep-cut  objects,  or  any  circtimstance 
that  increases  distance  and  necessitates  power  to  overcome  resistance. 


APPENDIX  D. 


PURITY    OF    THE   ACIDS — TESTS    FOR  IMPURITIES. 

The  acids  must  be  pure.  Sulphuric  acid  is  apt  to  contain  nitric,  which  causes  it  to  waste  zinc 
and  silver.  To  test,  add  a  small  quantity  of  indigo  to  sulphuric  acid  to  be  tested,  and  boU  the 
mixture.    If  the  color  persists,  no  nitric  acid  is  present. 

The  nitric  acid  used  in  Grove's  batteries  should  be  free  from  hydrochloric  (muriatic),  else 
it  will  ruin  the  platintmi.  To  test  for  this,  add  two  drops  of  solution  of  nitrate  of  silver  to 
a  dilute  solution  of  the  acid  in  rain-water.  The  presence  of  hydrochloric  is  shown  by  white 
cloud  or  milkiness,  formed  by  the  precipitation  of  the  chloride  of  silver.  Common  oil  of 
vitriol  generally  has  stdphate  of  lead  in  it,  which  causes  wasting  of  the  zinc.  Test :  When 
one  measure  of  the  acid  is  added  to  five  or  ten  of  cold  water,  the  mixture  clouds.  [Mem.  Pour 
the  acid  slowly  into  the  water,  stirring  all  the  while.  ] 


BOOKBINDING. 


136 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


PATENT  POWER  PAPER  -  CUTTING  MACHINE. 

This  is  exceedingly  strong,  simple,  and  effective.  Will  cut  the  heaviest 
work  with  ease  and  precision.  The  knife  is  brought  down  obliquely  to 
exactly  the  desired  position  by  a  crank  motion,  which  returns  it  by  a  quick 
upward  stroke,  and  then  stops ;  and  can  be  stopped  and  started  at  any  part 
of  the  stroke  by  means  of  two  treadles  at  the  front  of  the  machine.  This 
insures  perfect  work,  as  the  machine  is  always  under  control.  It  is  adjust- 
able in  height,  but  requires  no  other  regulating  for  the  various  kinds  of 
work ;  is  quickly  taken  off  and  replaced,  and  will  stand  at  any  point.  The 
paper  clamp  is  moved  by  screws,  operated  by  a  hand  wheel  at  the  front 
of  the  machine.  The  rear  giiide  is  moved  by  a  screw  and  small  hand  wheel 
at  the  front  of  the  table,  and  a  side  guide  insures  the  cutting  of  the  work 
perfectly  square.  This  is  the  fastest  and  smoothest  paper-cutting  machine 
now  manufactured. 


For  prices,  etc.,  see  next  page. 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue.  137 


Dimensions,  Weight,  and  Prices  of  Power  Paper-Cutting  Machines. 


Ureatrst 

Width  of 

space  under 

No. 

paper  cut. 

kuife. 

Room  occupied  ou  floor. 

Weiglit  boxed. 

Price. 

1 

24  in. 

6  in. 

4  ft.          X  6  ft. 

3,000  lbs. 

2 

30  in. 

6  in. 

4  ft.  4  iu.  X  6  ft.  6  in. 

3,250  lbs. 

3 

36  in. 

6  in. 

4  ft.  8  in.  X  7  ft. 

3,500  lbs. 

$850 

4 

42  in. 

6  in. 

5  ft.           X  7  ft.  6  in. 

4,750  lbs. 

950 

5 

48  in 

1,100 

Prices  include  boxing  and  shipping,  or  putting  up  in  New- York. 


CIRCULAR  MILL-BOARD  CUTTER. 

This  is  a  strong  and  heavy  machine  for  bookbinders'  use.  The  shafts  and 
cutters  are  of  the  best  cast  steel,  and  the  table  is  of  iron.  The  cutters  are 
pressed  together  by  adjustable  springs,  and  have  lubricating  pads  to  prevent 
their  chafing  against  each  other.  The  work  is  placed  against  adjustable 
gauges  on  the  table,  and  drawing  rollers  at  each  side  insure  accuracy  of 
cut.  A  fast  and  a  loose  pulley  are  attached,  so  that  no  counter-shaft  is 
required. 

Dimensions  and  Prices. 

Width       No.  of  pairs  Width     No.  of  pairs 

No.  of  board  cut.     cutters.       Price.  No.  of  board  cut.    cutters.  Price. 

1  ...    24  inches.     7  3    ...    36  inches.     9  $575.00 

2  ...    30  inches.     8     $450.00      4    ...    42  inches.    10  650.00 


Extra  cutters,  per  pair :  six-inch,  $20 ;  eight-inch,  $30.  Treadle,  extra,  $30. 


138 


R.  Hoe  &  Co's  Catalogue. 


CIECULAE  CAED-BOAED  CUTTER,  SELF-FEEDING 

ATTACHMENT. 

This  macliine  is  especially  designed  for  cutting  up  card-board  and  similar 
material.  The  work  is  placed  against  adjustable  gauges  on  an  iron  table. 
Drawing  rollers  at  each  side  of  the  cutters  insure  accuracy ;  and  an  arrange- 
ment of  carrying  bands  is  added,  when  desired,  for  unusually  small  sizes. 
The  cutters  are  made  of  the  best  cast  steel,  and  tempered.  The  machine  is 
aiTanged  to  run  by  steam  power,  but  can  also  be  worked  by  treadle,  if 
required.    It  occupies  a  space  of  from  three  to  four  feet  square. 

Dimensions  and  Prices. 


Width  of 

No.  of 

Width  of 

No.  of 

No. 

board  cut. 

pairs  cutters. 

Price. 

Xo. 

board  cut. 

pains  cutters. 

Price. 

1  . 

.    24  inches. 

7 

3  . 

.    36  inches. 

9 

$525.00 

2  . 

.    30  inches. 

8 

$450.00 

4  . 

.    42  inches. 

10 

600.00 

EXTRA  CUTTING  MACHINE  KNIVES  FOR  HAND  AND 
POWER  PAPER  CUTTERS. 

No.                               To  cut  paper.            Each.            No.                               To  cut  paper.  Each. 

1  24  inches.                    3  36  inches.  $25.00 

2  30  inches.                   4   ......   42  inches.  35.00 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


139 


SHEARS  AND  WOODEN  TABLE  FOR  MILL  BOARD. 

This  table  is  strongly  made,  and  is  fiirnislied  with  leaf  and  necessary  gauges 
to  insure  accuracy.    The  shears  are  of  best  cast  steel,  and  warranted. 


Length  of 
No.      shear  hlade. 

1     24  inches 


Price. 

$45.00 


No. 

2 


Length  of 
shear  blade. 

30  inches 


Price. 

$65.00 


No. 


Length  of 
sliear  blade. 


Price. 


3     36  inches  $80.00 


PATENT  CARD  CUTTER. 

This  cutter  is  entirely  of  iron  and  steel.  The  bed  is  so  made  as  to  slide  on 
ways,  and  adjusted  by  a  rack  and  pinion  imderneath.  All  parts  are  carefully 
fitted,  and  enable  the  operator  to  work  with  the  greatest  possible  accuracy. 

Sizes  and  Prices. 


Size. 

Price. 

Size. 

Price. 

With  six-inch  shears    ,  . 

.  $15.00 

With  fifteen-inch  shears  .  . 

$30.00 

With  eight-inch  shears 

.  18.00 

With  twenty-inch  shears  .  . 

37.50 

With  ten-inch  shears  .  . 

.  22.50 

With  twenty -five-inch  shears 

47.50 

With  twelve-inch  shears  . 

.  25.00 

SHEARS  AND  IRON  TABLE  FOR  MILL  BOARD. 

The  frame  and  table  are  made  of  cast  iron,  and  fitted  up  substantially. 
The  table  and  gauges  are  planed  true.  The  cutters  are  of  cast  steel,  and  can 
be  adjusted  by  set  screws,  taken  off  to  be  reground,  and,  when  worn-out, 
replaced  at  a  trifling  expense.  A  spring  lever,  which  is  brought  down  by 
a  treadle,  holds  the  board  while  cutting. 

Length  of  Length  of  Length  of 

Xo.      sliear  blade.  Price.  No.       shear  blade.  Price.  Xo.      .shear  blade.  Price. 

1     24  inches     $125.00  |  2     30  inches     $137..50  |  3     36  inches  $150.00 
Prices  include  boxing  and  shipping,  or  putting  up  in  New- York. 

ROTARY  CARD  CUTTER. 

This  cut  represents  our  rotary 
card  cutter,  which  we  have  lately 
improved.  It  is  substantially 
made,  and  is  furnished  with  aU 
the  conveniences  to  make  it  a 
handy  and  useful  machine. 
Rotary  Card  Cutter. 

Sizes  and  Prices. 

Twenty-five-inch  card-board,  $35.00;   Twenty-eight-inch  card-board,  $38.00; 
Thirty-inch  card-board,  $40.00. 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue.  141 


PLOUaH- KNIFE  PAPER  CUTTER,  WITH  IRON  FRAME. 

This  is  the  simplest  form  of  the  ph)ugh-kuife  machine,  and  is  made  entirely  of 
iron,  excepting  the  table.  The  plough  slides  on  the  cross  head,  being  worked 
back  and  forth  over  the  paper  by  hand,  and  any  wear  of  the  parts  can  be 
taken  up  by  adjusting  screws.  The  knife  is  fed  down  by  double  gearing. 
A  small  wheel,  not  shown  in  the  cut,  moves  the  table  backward  and  for- 
ward, while  the  spring  treadle  locks  the  cross  head  fast  in  any  position. 

Width  of  paper  cut    .    .    28  inches.   |   Price  $60.00 


PLOUGH -KNIFE  PAPER  CUTTER,  WITH  WOODEN  FRAME. 

This  machine  resembles  the  one  shown  in  above  cut,  hxit  has  the  hand  wheel 
placed  horizontally  under  the  board.  The  knife  slides  back  and  forth  on  the 
cross  head,  and  is  moved  up  or  down  by  turning  the  handles.  The  cross 
head  is  brought  down  to  hold  the  paper  in  place  by  means  of  the  hand 
wheel.    The  stand  is  of  hard  wood,  well  put  together. 

Width  of  paper  cut    .    .    28  inches.   |   Price  $50.00 

Prices  include  boxing  and  shipping,  or  putting  up  in  New- York. 

12 


142 


E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


HYDRAULIC  PRESS, 
WITH  PUMP  ON 
BASE. 

The  cut  shows  the  pattern 
used  for  pressing  printed 
sheets;  but  we  make  them 
also  for  lead  pipe,  tobacco, 
cotton,  oH,  mustard,  etc. 
The  platen  of  press  is  fur- 
nished with  grooves  running 
into  a  faucet,  which  carries 
off  the  surplus  oil.  The  cyl- 
inder is  of  solid  wrought 
iron,  and  lined  with  copper. 
The  rods  are  forged  from 
picked  scrap.  The  pump 
may  be  placed  on  the  base 
of  the  press,  as  shown  in  the 
cut,  or  on  a  separate  cistern. 
The  cylinder  shotdd  be 
wiped  out  from  time  to  time, 
and  the  cistern  frequently 
cleansed  and  supplied  with 
pure  water. 


Hydraulie  Press,  with  Pump  on  Base. 


Dimensions  and  Prices  of  Paper  Htjdraulic  Presses. 


Diameter  of  l  am. 

Size  of  platen. 

Greatest 
space between 
liead  &  platen. 

Ijcngtli  of  rods. 

Pressure  obtained. 

Price 
without 
pump. 

Six  in. 

25  X  37  in. 

48  in. 

8  ft.  4  in. 

140  tons. 

$700 

Eight  in. 

26  X  40  in. 

54  in. 

9  ft.  2  in. 

250  tons. 

900 

Ten  in. 

28  X  44  in. 

66  in. 

10  ft.  8  in. 

390  tons. 

1100 

Twelve  in. 

32  X  47  in. 

72  in. 

11  ft.  8  in. 

560  tons. 

1450 

Fourteen  in. 

35  X  51  in. 

72  in. 

12  ft.  3  in. 

765  tons. 

1900 

Sixteen  in. 

38  X  55  in. 

72  in. 

12  ft.  9  in. 

1005  tons. 

2500 

Other  sizes  and  designs  made  to  order. 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


143 


HORIZONTAL  HYDRAULIC  PRESS. 

Used  for  pressing  any  seeds  or  material  from  which  oil  may  be  extracted. 
The  cylinder  is  of  solid  wrought  iron,  and  lined  with  copper.  The  rods 
are  forged  from  picked  scrap  iron.  Two  heavy  cast-iron  frames,  securely 
fastened  to  the  rods  with  the  head  of  the  press,  form  the  box  or  hopper 
for  receiving  the  bags  containing  the  seed,  etc.,  and  the  twelve  iron  plates 
to  go  between  the  bags.  The  plunger  is  forced  into  the  box  by  means  of 
the  ram  of  the  cylinder.  Tlie  ram  is  drawn  back  again  to  place  by  counter 
weights.  A  tank  for  catching  the  oil  is  furnished  with  press,  and  is  placed 
directly  under  the  hopper.  This  press  is  very  strongly  built,  and  wiU  give 
a  pressure  of  390  tons. 


HAND  AND   STEAM  PUMPS. 

Price. 

Single  pump  on  base  of  press  (as  shown  in  cut,  page  140)   .    .    ,  $175.00 

Single  pump  on  separate  cistern   225.00 

Double  pump  on  separate  cistern   300.00 

Double  horizontal  steam  pump  on  separate  cistern   600.00 

Double  vertical  steam  pump  on  separate  cistern   1000.00 


Counter-shafts,  connections,  and  pipes,  extra. 


144  R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue, 


HYDEAULIC  BALING  PRESS  FOR  COTTON,  HAY,  ETC. 

This  cut  represents  a  new  pattern  of  hydraulic  press  used  for  baling  cotton, 
bagging,  rags,  or  any  kind  of  merchandise.  The  ram  and  cylinder  are  placed 
below  the  floor,  as  shown  in  the  cut,  so  that  the  platen  of  the  press  is  on  a 
level  with  it,  and  the  goods  to  be  baled  are  trucked  into  position,  thus  avoiding 
any  heavy  lifting.  The  platen  and  bead  of  press  are  grooved,  to  aUow  the 
bands  to  be  placed  and  fastened  around  the  goods  after  they  are  sufficiently 
pressed.  These  presses  can  be  made  to  do  any  kind  of  baling,  and  the  one 
represented  in  cut  is  especially  for  pressing  bags  into  bales,  and  is  extensively 
used  in  this  country.  The  cylinder  of  press  is  of  solid  wrought  iron  and  lined 
with  copper.    The  rods  are  forged  from  picked  scraps. 

Dimensions  and  Price  of  Baling  Press. 

Diameter  of  ram  ....   6  inches.       Lift  of  platen    ....  48  inches. 

Size  of  platen  .    .    .  3G  x  60  inches.       Pressure  obtained  .    .    .  140  tons. 

Greatest  space  bet. head &platen,78  in.      Price,  without  pump  .    .  .  $1000 


E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


145 


DOUBLE  VERTICAL  STEAM  PUMP  FOR 
HYDRAULIC  PRESSES. 

TMs  pump  is  flmshed  in  tlie  most  thorough,  manner,  and  any  number  of 
presses  may  be  operated  by  it  by  means  of  the  proper  connections.  Run- 
ning at  its  usual  speed  of  fifty  revolutions  per  minute,  it  will  raise  the 
platen  of  a  twelve-inch  hydraulic  press  at  the  rate  of  one  itich  and  a  half 
per  minute.  The  cistern  should  be  fi'equently  cleansed  and  supplied  with 
pure  water. 


Dimensions,  Weight,  and  Price. 


Space  occupied  on  floor  .... 
Capacity  of  cistern    .    .    55  gallons. 
Height   6  feet. 


.    .    .    .    4  feet  X  6  feet  8  inches. 

Weight   2400  lbs. 

Price   $1000 


146 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


DOUBLE  HORIZONTAL  STEAM  PUMP  FOR 
HYDRAULIC  PRESSES. 

The  action  is  simple  and  direct.  The  cylinders  are  in  line  on  the  water 
cistern,  and  the  plungers  fixed  in  a  sliding  head  moving  in  an  adjustable 
guide  block.  A  number  of  hydraulic  presses  may  be  worked  by  this  pump, 
which,  at  its  usual  speed  of  fifty  revolutions  per  minute,  will  raise  the  ram 
of  a  twelve-inch  press  one  inch  and  a  half  per  minute.  The  cistern  should 
be  frequently  cleansed  and  supplied  with  pure  water. 


Dimensions,  Weight,  and  Price. 


Room  occupied  on  floor,  3x5  feet. 
Weight   1400  lbs. 


Capacity  of  cistern 
Price  


50  gallons. 
.  $600.00 


E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


147 


OAK  STANDING  PRESS. 

The  box  is  of  brass;  tbe  platen  planed  true.  The  timber  used  is  of  the 
best  quality,  well  seasoned,  and  secm*ed  by  iron  plates,  bolts,  and  nuts. 
The  gear  is  turned  either  by  means  of  a  nut  with  four  sockets,  or  by  a 
spring  ratchet,  shown  in  the  cut. 


Dimensions  and  Prices. 


Price  with 

Price  with 

No. 

Diameter  of  screw. 

Size  of  platen. 

four-socket  nut. 

ratchet  wheel. 

1  

2  J  inches. 

17x21  inches. 

$75.00 

$82.50 

2  

3  inches. 

19x24  inches. 

125.00 

132.50 

3  

3i  inches. 

24x29  inches. 

162.50 

170.00 

4  

4  inches. 

26x34  inches. 

262.50 

270.00 

148 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


IRON  STANDING  PRESS,  WITH  BRASS  BOX. 


This  is  entirely  of  iron,  except  tlie  brass  nut.  It  is  made  to  work  as  desired, 
either  with,  a  spring  ratchet  or  with  the  four-socket  nut  shown  in  the  cut. 
The  screw  is  covered  by  a  tin  box. 


Dimensions  and  Prices. 


Price  with 

Price  with 

No. 

Diameter  of  screw. 

8ize  of  platen. 

four-socket  nut. 

ratcliet  wheel. 

1  

2J  inches. 

17x21  inches. 

$75.00 

$82.50 

2  

3  inches. 

19x24  inches. 

125.00 

132.50 

3  

3J  inches. 

24x29  inches. 

162.50 

170.00 

4  

4  inches. 

26X34  inches. 

262.50 

270.00 

R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue, 


149 


This  macMne  is  massive  in  structure,  simple  and  efficient  in  operation. 
The  cut  represents  the  No.  2,  which  may  be  advantageously  used  with  the 
hand  lever.  The  No.  3  is  similar  in  form,  but  is  double  geared,  and  has  a 
fly-wheel  on  each  end  of  the  diuving  shaft.  The  No.  4  is  of  immense 
power,  and  corresponding  strength. 


Dimensions  and  Prices. 


Room  occupied 

No. 

Size  of  liead. 

on  tilt"  floor. 

Weiglit  boxetl. 

Price. 

1  

10x12  inches. 

4x5  feet. 

2,000  lbs. 

$600 

2 

15x17  inches. 

4^x5J  feet. 

3,360  lbs. 

900 

3  

19x24  inches. 

5JX6A  feet. 

8,000  lbs. 

1,200 

4  

24x30  inches. 

6x7'  feet. 

11,500  lbs. 

1,750 

Printing  attachment  about  $300  extra  for  each  of  the  above  sizes. 
Hand  attachment  about  $50  extra. 


150 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catai,ogue. 


NEW  EMBOSSING  PRESS. 

The  cut  on  this  page  represents  our  embossing  press,  which  has  been  entirely 
remodelled,  and  its  general  efficiency  greatly  increased. 
This  press  is  massive,  and  strongly  put  together. 

The  bed  is  guided  by  the  frame,  so  that  a  heavy  impression  can  be  had 
at  either  corner  of  the  platen  without  tilting. 

The  feed  guides  on  bed  are  adjustable  in  either  direction,  and  specially 
adapted  to  good  color  work. 

In  this  press  we  have  done  away  with  the  cam  for  driving  the  toggle, 
and  substituted  a  crank  motion  which  is  noiseless;  and,  by  means  of  a 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


151 


patent  friction  clutch,  operated  by  treadles,  the  bed  can  be  stopped  and 
started  without  reverse  or  jar.  This  is  an  entirely  new  feature  with  a 
machine  of  this  description. 

The  bed  is  constantly  in  motion ;  and,  in  order  that  no  time  may  be  lost, 
it  is  given  sufficient  travel  to  enable  the  operator  to  place  on  and  take  oflf 
the  work  without  stopping  the  machine  and  without  danger  to  the  operator. 

The  inking  attachment,  which  is  furnished  with  press  when  desired,  is 
simple  and  complete,  and  consists  of  an  ink  fountain  with  an  adjustable 
knife,  two  form  roUers  and  five  distributing  rollers,  with  a  distributing 
cylinder,  making  it  specially  adapted  for  doing,  at  one  operation,  the  heaviest 
kind  of  stamping  and  inking. 

Dimensions  and  Prices. 

Size  of  head  .    .    .  12  x  18  inches.  Price,   with   inking  attaeh- 

Size  of  bed    .    .    .  13x18  inches.         ment  $1500 

Largest  work  that  Price,  without  inking  attach- 

can  be  taken  on  .  12  x  18  inches.         ment   1200 


HALF  AECH  GILDINa  PEESS. 

This  is  exceedingly  convenient  for  light  work,  as  the  bed  is  open  on  three 
sides,  and  has  a  forward,  backward,  and  lateral  motion,  while  the  jaws  of 
the  head  may  be  worked  from  the  front  or  from  either  side. 

Size  of  head  5x8  inches. 

Price   $150.00  |   Weight,  boxed  .    .  . 


152 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


EMBOSSING  AND  GILDING  PRESS,  WITH 
FIXED  OR  SLIDING  BED. 

This  is  a  powerful,  yet  simple,  hand  press  for  job  work.  The  head  has 
jaws  screwing  together  from  the  sides,  and  is  intended  to  be  heated  by 
steam,  but  may  be  adapted  to  gas  or  hot  irons,  if  ordered.  Adjustable 
side  and  end  gauges  are  furnished,  by  which  to  set  the  work.  The  impres- 
sion is  regulated  by  the  nuts  on  the  top  of  the  press. 

Dimensions  and  Prices. 

Price,  with  sliding  bed,  head  7  x  11  inches   $350.00 

Weight,  boxed,  970  lbs. 

Price,  with  fixed  bed,  head  5X8  inches   $175.00 

Weight,  boxed,  500  lbs. 


BOOK  PRESSING  OR  SMASHING  MACHINE. 

This  macliine  is  on  the  same  plan  as  the  embossing  press  (page  147),  but  it 
has  a  cam  of  different  shape,  is  arranged  to  run  slower,  and  has  a  wider 
space  between  the  head  and  bed.  It  is  used  for  compressing  books,  and 
may  be  adjusted  to  all  ordinary  thicknesses.  The  prices,  weights,  etc.,  are 
the  same  as  those  of  the  embossing  press,  shown  on  page  147. 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue.  153 


BOOK-SAWINa  MACHINE,  TO  WORK  BY  POWER. 

The  table  is  hinged  to  the  frame  of  the  machine,  which  is  aU  of  iron,  and 
is  held  up  out  of  the  way  by  a  counterbalance,  while  the  saws  are  being 
changed.  It  is  adjusted  for  sawing  from  both  ends,  and  by  this  means  a 
great  nicety  is  attained  in  regulating  the  depth  of  the  saw  cut.  It  has 
also  an  adjustable  side  gauge.  The  brass  sUding  frames,  or  trucks,  are 
easily  set,  and  can  be  used  for  any  sizes  of  books. 

The  mandrel  is  of  steel,  so  arranged  that  there  can  be  no  side  play, 
and  the  saws  can  be  taken  from  mandrel  without  lifting  it  from  its 
bearings. 

There  is  furnished,  when  desired,  a  light  wood  and  u-on  box,  arranged 
to  be  guided  l)y  the  table,  on  which  the  books  are  placed  and  securely 
held  by  an  adjustable  spring  and  catch,  before  being  passed  over  the  saws. 

Two  sets  of  saws  of  four  and  six  each,  washers  for  regulating  width 
of  cut,  and  counter-shaft  and  hangers,  go  with  each  machine. 


164 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


PIERCING  OR  STABBING 
MACHINES. 

These  machines,  for  pamphlets  and 
similar  work,  are  simple  and  durable. 
The  clamp  which  holds  the  needles  is 
so  made  that  they  can  be  changed  in 
position,  and  the  number  increased 
or  diminished,  in  a  few  seconds. 


FOOT   STABBING  MACHINE. 
Wood  stand  $60.00 


Wood  stand, 

very  strong,  $125.00 


Prices  include  three 
awls. 


PIERCING  OR  STABBING  MACHINE,  TO  WORK  BY 

STEAM  POWER. 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


155 


BOARDS  A^D  PLOUaH  FOR  SQUARING  PAPER. 

The  boards  usually  furnished  are  respectively  13  x  16  inches,  151  x  19J  inches, 
17x21^  inches,  and  19x27  inches,  but  the  sizes  can  of  course  be  varied, 
as  desired. 

Price  of  plough,  with  knife  and  four  boards ;  wood  screw  for  plough, 

with  nut  and  iron  point  $48.00 

Table  of  hard  wood,  extra  15.00 

Boxing  and  carting,  extra   2.00 

The  above  prices  do  not  include  the  wooden  frame  by  which  the  nut 

for  the  screw  is  held  in  place. 


IMPROVED  CUTTING  BOARD. 

It  is  made  of  many  small  pieces  of  the  best  kiln-di-ied  maple  or  beech, 
thoroughly  clamped  together,  and  in  such  a  manner  that  only  the  end 
wood  is  used  for  cutting  upon.  It  is  the  most  durable  board  that  is  made, 
is  not  affected  by  variation  of  temperature,  and  always  remains  perfectly 
true. 

Price  per  face  measure  of  end  wood  : 
Board  2J  to  2^  inches  thick  2J  cents  per  square  inch. 


156 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


BRASS -BOUND  BOARDS  AND  CASE  FOR 
MUSLIN  WORK. 

These  boards  are  made  of  the  very  best  seasoned  cherry,  and  warranted 
perfectly  true.  The  brass  border  is  made  with  bevelled  or  folded  corners, 
and  of  hard  brass.    The  case  is  made  of  hard  wood,  handsomely  finished. 

K.acli.      I  Each. 

Boards   16  x  24   inches,   for  With  lapped  corners    .    .    .  $3.50 

muslin  work  $3.25   |   Case  to  hold  fourteen  boards  4.00 


SUPERIOR  PLANISHED  TIN  BOARDS,  FOR  LEATHER. 

In  sets  of  fourteen  boards. 


No 

1 


Size  of  board. 

7^x12  in. 


Each 
board. 

$2.50 


Xo 

9 


Size  of  board. 

12  X  16  in. 


Each 
board. 

$3.75 


Size  of  board. 


Each 
board. 


3    13x19^  in.  $3.75 


Case  for  a  set  of  fourteen  boards 


$4.00 


BINDERS'  PRESS  AND  PLOUOH. 

The  cheeks  and  plough  frames  of  these  presses  are  made  of  beech,  and  the 
screws  of  hickory,  all  thoroughly  seasoned  and  kiln-dried. 

Press  and  plough,  complete  $13.50 

Press  pin  $  .75   |   Knife   .75 


GILDING  PRESS  AND  STAND. 


This  press  is  similar  to  the  above  cut,  with  the  exception  that  there  is  no 
plough,  and  the  screws  are  of  metal,  with  gun-iron  boxes.  When  desired, 
a  substantial  stand  is  furnished  with  press. 


Sizes  and  Prices. 


No. 

1 

2 


LengtU 
of  iron  screws. 

35  inches. 
35  inches. 


Diameter 
otiron  screws. 


1|  inches. 
2  inches. 


Size  of  wood. 


51  X  5§  inches,  iron  boxes. 
6^  X  55  inches. 

Stand  for  gilding  press,  $9. 


Price. 

$35.00 
45.00 


FINISHING  PRESSES. 


Length  of  press.    Space  between  screws.  Price. 


21  inches. 
25  inches. 
28  inches. 


14  inches. 
18  inches. 
21  inches. 


$2.50 
2.75 
3.00 


Length  of  press.    Space  between  screws. 


31  inches. 
35  inches. 
38  inches. 


24  inches. 
28  inches. 
31  inches. 


FINISHERS'  STAND  TO  ATTACH  TO  TABLE. 
SmaU  size  $5.00   1   Large  size    .    .  . 


$3.25 
3.50 
3.75 


$5.00 


FINISHERS'  STOVES. 

Round  furnace  for  gilt  work  ^J?'?? 
Single  stove  for  blank  work,  $20.00 
13 


Double  stove  for  blank  work,  30.00 


168 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


PATENT  MACHINE  FOR  BEVELLINa  BINDERS'  BOARDS. 

This  machine  is  entirely  of  iron,  except  the  knife,  which  is  of  the  best 
plane  steel.  The  plane  runs  in  an  oblique  channel,  so  as  to  use  the  whole 
edge  of  the  knife,  and  to  give  a  shearing  cut  down  the  grain  of  the  board. 
The  groove  should  be  set  to  just  the  thickness  of  the  work.  The  table 
is  adjustable,  to  give  any  required  bevel.  The  front  gauge,  or  stop,  is 
formed  by  the  farther  edge  of  the  groove;  the  end  gauge  is  movable 
on  the  table. 

Price,  with  six  knives  $90.00 

Price  includes  boxing  and  shipping,  or  delivery  in  New- York. 


IRON  TABLE  STANDINa  PRESSES. 


These  presses  are  screwed  to  the  table  to  hold  work  ghied  or  pasted  until 
dry  enough  to  lay  aside.    The  yoke  and  rods  are  of  wrought  iron. 


No.  Size  of  platen.        No.  of  rods.       Price.  No.  Size  of  platen.        No.  of  rods.  Price. 

1       7^  X 15  inches.       2       $25.00   |   2       16  x  24  inches.       4  $35.00 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


159 


BACKING  MACHINE. 

Our  bookbinders'  backing  machine,  as  shown  in  above  cut,  is  an  economical 
addition  to  large  bookbinding  establishments.  It  is  adapted  to  back  blank 
books  from  one-fourth  to  four  inches  wide,  and  thirty  inches  long  and 
under.  The  revolving  backing  iron  is  hollow,  and  is  heated  from  the  centre 
by  gas  or  steam.  On  the  right  of  cylinder,  as  shown  in  cut,  is  the  adjusting 
lever,  and  here  also,  by  a  simple  device,  the  cylinder  is  secured  for  work 
on  the  groove  desired. 


Price  $200.00 

Price  includes  set  of  fifteen  wood  dies. 


160 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


SHEET -POINTING  MACHINE. 

Above  is  cut  of  sheet-pointing  machine,  for  preparing  printed  sheets  for 
cutting.  The  needles  are  adjustable  to  suit  the  perforations  made  by  points 
in  process  of  printing;  and  when  a  sufficient  number  of  sheets  are  placed^ 
they  are  drawn  down,  leaving  the  paper  ready  for  the  cutting  machine. 

Price,  with  table  


CHERRY  PRESSING  BOARDS. 


They  are  made  of  the  best  kUn-dried  cherry  or  maple,  and  in  the  most 
perfect  manner.    The  ends  of  the  boards  are  feathered,  so  that  they  are 
[always  kept  straight. 


Size.  Price. 

6  X  lOJ  inches  $  .35 

8  X  lol  inches  40 

10  X 13  inches  50 

10  X  16  inches  70 

12  X  18  inches  75 

13  X  20  inches  80 

17  X  22  inches  1.00 

20  X  24  inches  1.10 


Size.  Price. 

20  X  28  inches   $1.30 

24  X  32  inches   1.55 

24  X  38  inches   2.25 

28  X  38  inches   3.00 

30  X  36  inches   3.00 

26x40  inches   3.00 

28  X  44  inches   4.00 


Other  sizes  in  proportion. 


Maple  boards,  ten  per  cent,  extra. 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


161 


BOOKBINDERS'  MATERIALS. 


^  No.  1.  Quarto. 
^  No.  2.  Cap. 

^  No.  3.  Demy. 


No.  4.  Medium. 


No.  5.  Super 
Royal. 


No.  6.  Cap. 


No.  7.  Demy. 


No.  8.  Medium 
and  Royal. 


No.  9.  Imperial. 


JOINT  RODS  FOR  BLANK  BOOKS. 
Price,  per  dozen  75  cents. 


PALLET. 

Price  $5.00  Price 


BURNISHER. 


$4.50 


AaATE  BURNISHERS. 
Price,  each  $2.50 


STEEL  POLISHER. 
Price  $4.00 


162 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


SQUARINO  SHEARS. 
Price,  per  incli  of  cutting  edge  $1.75 


BACKING  BOARDS. 

Length.  Price. 

10  inches  $1.20 

12  inches  1-44 

14  inches  1-68 

16  inches  1.92 

18  inches  2.16 

Other  sizes,  12  cents  per  inch. 


SEWING  BENCH. 

No.                      Space  between  screws.  Price. 

1  24  inches.  $2.00 

2  30  inches.  2.50 

3  36  inches.  3.00 


BACKING  IRON. 
Price  $2.00 


GOLD  CUSHION,  WITH 
DRAWER. 

Dimension.s.  Price. 

7X13  inches  $3.50 

8x16  inches  4.50 

9x18  inches  5.50 


R.HOEI.C. 


BACKING  HAMMER.                 BEATING  HAMMER. 
Price  $2.00      Price  $2.50 


COPYING  PRESSES. 


164 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


No. 

3 
4 


FEENCH  PATTERN. 
Finished  with  great  care.     Boxes  and  steps  of  brass. 


Size  of  platen. 

11 X 16  inches 
12x18  inches 


Price.  Boxing. 

$40.00  $  .75 
45.00  1.00 


No.  Size  of  platen. 

5  15x20  inches 

6  20x25  inches 


Price.  Boxing. 

$65.00  $1.50 
85.00  2.50 


ENGLISH  PATTERN. 
Light,  strong,  and  handsomely  finished. 


No.  Size  of  platen. 

2  10x13  inches 

3  11x16  inches 


Price.  Boxing. 

$25.00  $  .60 
30.00  .75 


.Size  of  platen. 


Boxing. 


12x18  inches     $40.00  $1.00 


WROUGHT  IRON  YOKE  COPYING  PRESSES. 


The  above  can  be  made  either  with  the  bar  handle  or  the  patent  wheel. 
Japanned  balls,  extra,  $5;  nickel-plated  balls,  extra,  $10. 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


165 


GOTHIC  PATTERN. 

No.  Size  of  platen.  Price.  Boxing. 

2       10  X 13  inches  $15.00      $  .60 

Iron  stand  for  press,  $13.    Boxing,  75  cents. 


CAST  IRON  COPYING  PRESSES. 

These  presses  are  of  cast  iron,  substantially  made,  handsomely  japanned, 
and  adapted  to  ordinary  work. 


166 


E.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


EXPORT  PATTERN. 

No.  Size  of  platen.  Price.  Boxing. 

4      12x18  inehes  $24.00  $1.00 


CAST  IRON  COPYING  PRESSES. 


These  presses  are  of  cast  iron,  substantially  made,  handsomely  japanned, 
and  adapted  to  ordinary  work. 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


167 


No.   Size  of  platen.     Price.  Boxing. 

1  9  X  12  in.  $11.00    $  .50 

2  10X13  in.    15.00  .60 

3  11x16  in.    20.00  .75 

This  press  is  of  cast  iron, 
substantially  made,  hand- 
somely japanned,  and  adapt- 
ed to  ordinary  work. 


CAST  IRON  COPYING  PRESS,  GERMAN  PATTERN. 


Upright  Pattern. 


UPRIGHT  PATTERN. 


No.  of  Tablets. 


Price. 


Cap    ....     3     ...  $20.00 
Letter    ...     3     ...  15.00 
Boxing,  50  cents. 


HORIZONTAL  PATTERN. 


No.  of  Tablets. 


Cap  ....  3  .  . 
Letter    ...     3     .  . 

Boxing,  50  cents. 


Price. 

$12.00 
10.00 


Extra  tablets,  letter  or  cap  size, 
each,  20  cents.  Enclosing  in  tin  box, 
to  keep  wet,  for  shipment,  $1. 


PATENT  TABLET  CASES  AND  DAJ^IPENING 
TABLETS  FOR  COPYING. 

These  dampening  tablets  take  the  place  of  the  brush,  water  cup,  and  blotting 
paper.  Letters  can  be  copied  by  their  use  with  great  dispatch,  and  three  or 
four  copies  of  the  same  letter  can  be  taken  at  one  operation.  They  will  draw 
ink  through  the  thickest  writing  paper,  and  may  be  advantageously  used  by 
the  legal  profession  instead  of  handwriting  in  copying  on  thick  paper. 


168 


R.  Hoe  &  Go's  Catalogue. 


Name  of  pattern. 

Notarial 

Spring  .  . 

Face     .  . 

Inca     .  . 


SEAL  PRESSES. 


size  of  die. 

3  inches 
3J  inches 
3J  inches 
4^  inches 


Space  between  centre 
of  (lie  anil  arch. 

.    If  inches  . 

.    2^  inches  . 

4  inches  . 

9  inches  . 


Price. 

$12.50 
35.00 
50.00 

100.00 


Boxing. 

$  .50 
.75 
2.00 
4.00 


BANK  NOTE  PRESS. 

It  has  grooves  for  cords  in  the  bed 
and  follower,  so  that  the  notes  may 
be  tied  up  in  the  press. 

The  columns  and  yoke  are 
wrought  iron. 


Size  of  platen. 

3J  X  9 J  in. 


Price. 

$15.00 


Boxing. 

$  .75 


Bank  Note  Pre.s.s. 

SEAL  AND  NOTARIAL  PRESSES. 


E.  Hoe  &  Oo's  OATALoacjE: 


169 


Cabinet  Pattern. 

BLACK  WALNUT  COPY  PRESS   TABLES  AND  STANDS. 


INDEX. 


A. 

B. 

Before  Making-Ready,  17. 

Bed  and  Platen  Power  Book  Presses,  19. 

Bodkins,  62. 

Brass  Riile,  64,  65. 

Brass  Dashes,  66,  67. 

Brass  Column  Rules,  67. 

Backing  Pan  and  Stand,  101. 

Building  Iron,  87. 

Black-Leading  Machine,  88. 

Battery,  95. 

Beating  Table,  116. 

Book  Pressing  or  Smashing  Machine,  152. 

Book  Sawing  Machine,  153. 

,Boards  and  Plough  for  Squaring  Paper,  155. 

Brass-Bound  Boards,  156. 

Binders'  Presses,  157. 

Binders'  Gilding  Presses,  157. 

Binders'  Finisher's  Stoves,  157. 

Binders'  Bevelling  Machines,  158. 

Binders'  Iron  Table  Standing  Presses,  158. 

Binders'  Backing  Machine,  159. 

Binders'  Burnisher,  161. 

Binders'  Backing  Boards,  162. 

Binders'  Backing  Iron,  162. 

Binders'  Backing  Hammer,  162. 

Binders'  Beating  Hammer,  162. 

Blocks,  care  and  use  of,  71. 

Burnisher,  Agate,  161. 

Bevelling  Machines  for  Binders,  158. 

Backing  Machine  for  Binders,  159. 

Burnisher  for  Binders,  161. 

Backing  Boards  for  Binders,  162. 

Backing  Iron  for  Binders,  162. 

Beating  Hammer  for  Binders,  162. 

Backing  Hammer  for  Binders,  162. 

Blankets,  Cloth,  57. 

C. 

Care  of  Inking  Rollers,  15. 
Coupon  Ticket  Machine,  20. 
Card   Press    without   Numbering  Attach- 
ment, 23. 
Copperplate  Presses,  35. 


Copperplate  Presses,  Geared,  34. 
Chases,  42. 

Cabinet  with  Sort  Drawers,  44. 
Cases,  45,  46. 
Case  Stands  (Wood),  48. 
Case  Racks,  48. 

Case  Stands  (Iron),  49,  50,  and  51. 
Cabinets  (Combination),  53. 
Cabinets  (Eagle),  54. 
Cabinets,  55. 

Cabinets  (Projecting  Front,  Economic),  56. 

Composition  Kettles,  58. 

Card  Cutters,  59. 

Composing  Sticks,  63. 

Composing  Rules,  63. 

Casting  Pans,  111. 

Crane,  112. 

Cooling  Troiigh,  112. 

Chiselling  Cylinders,  127. 

Circular  Mill -Board  Cutter,  137. 

Circular  Card-Board  Cutter,  138. 

Card  Cutters,  139. 

Cabinet  with  Projecting  Front,  54. 

Copying  Presses,  163-169. 

D. 

Double  Cylinder  Presses,  1. 
Dimensions,  weights,  etc.,  of  above,  2. 
Dimensions,  weights,  etc.,  of  Small  Cylinder 
Presses,  4. 

Dimensions,  weights,  etc.,  of  Two-Revolu- 
tion Presses,  5. 

Dimensions,  weights,  etc.,  of  Stop-Cylinder 
Presses,  8,  17. 

Dimensions,  weights,  etc.,  of  Large  Cylin- 
der Presses,  four-roller,  11. 

Dimensions,  weights,  etc.,  of  Large  Cylin- 
der Presses,  two-roller,  13. 

Dimensions,  weights,  etc.,  of  News  and  Job 
Cylinder  Presses,  15. 

Dimensions,  weights,  etc.,  of  Bed  and  Platen 
Power  Book  Presses,  19. 

Dimensions,  weights,  etc.,  of  Coupon  Ticket 
Presses,  21. 

Dimensions,  weights,  etc.,  of  Lithographic 
Presses,  32. 

Diamond  Card  Presses,  25. 


INDEX. 


171 


Distributors  (Common),  29. 
Double  Stand  and  Cabinet,  53. 
Dressing  Table,  127. 

Dimensions,  weights,  etc.,  of  Paper  Cut- 
ters, 137. 
Dimensions  of  Hydraulic  Presses,  142. 
Dimensions  of  Hydraulic  Pumps,  145,  146. 
Dimensions  of  Embossing  Presses,  149. 
Dimensions  of  Gilding  Presses,  151. 
Dashes,  Brass,  66,  67. 


E. 


Estimates  for  Type,   Presses,   and  Mate- 
rial, 72,  73,  74,  75. 
Electric  Connection  Gripper,  89. 
Embossing  Presses,  149,  150,  152. 


Flannel,  32. 
Furniture,  6'f. 

Eleetrotyping  Furnaces,  112, 
Finishing  Cylinders,  127. 
Finishers'  Stoves  for  Binders,  157. 


G. 


Galley  Cabinet,  43. 

Galleys  (Proof),  46. 

Galleys  (Patent  Lined),  46. 

GaUeys  (Patent  Tubes),  46. 

Galleys  (Angle  Eim),  47. 

Galleys  (Patent  Lock-up),  47. 

Galleys  (Common),  47. 

Galleys  (Addressing  Machine),  47. 

G;alleys  (Mailing),  48. 

Galleys  (Job),  48. 

Galley  Racks,  49. 

Gilding  Presses  (half  arch),  151. 

GUding  Roll,  161. 

Gold  Cushion,  162. 


Hints  on  Making-Ready  for  Cylinder  Presses, 

6,  12,  14,  16,  18,  21. 
Hand  Lever  Presses,  27. 
Hints  to  Buyers,  28. 
Hand  Inker  for  Hand  Press,  29. 
Hints  on  the  Purchase  of  Type,  74,  75. 
Hydraulic  Electrotype  Moulding  Press,  85. 
Hydraulic  Presses,  142. 
Hydraulic  Presses  (Horizontal),  143. 


Hydraulic  Pumps,  143,  145,  146. 
Hydraulic  BaUng  Press,  144, 


Imposing  Tables,  39,  40. 

Imposing  Tables,  with  Letter  Boards,  41. 

Ink  Closet,  58. 

Ink  Table,  58. 

Ink  Balls,  58. 

Ink  SHee,  62. 

Improved  Cutting  Board,  155. 

Ink,  about  choice  of,  28. 

Iron  Table  Standing  Press,  for  Binders,  158. 

Inking  Rollers,  their  care,  15. 


Job  Sticks,  63. 
Joint  Rods,  161. 


K. 

Knife  and  Bodkin,  60. 


Lithographic  Power  Press,  31. 
Lithographic  Axioms,  32. 
Lithographic  Press  (Hand),  33. 
Letter  Boards,  41. 
Lead  Cutters,  59. 
Lye  Brushes,  62. 
Labor-Saving  Furniture,  67, 
Labor-Saving  Rules,  68. 

M. 


Making-Ready  for  Cylinder  Presses,  Hints 
on,  6,  12,  14,  16,  18,  21. 

Molleton,  32. 

Moleskin,  32. 

Mallets,  60. 

Mitre  Machines,  61. 

Mitre  Boxes,  61. 

Melting  Furnace,  112. 

Matrix  Rolling  Machine,  117. 

Melting  Furnace  and  Drying  Press  Com- 
bined, 120. 

Moulding  Case  (Brass),  89. 


N. 


Noiseless  Finger  Motion,  10. 
News  and  Job  Cylinder  Press,  15, 


172 


INDEX. 


Numbering  Ticket  Press,  24. 

Numbering   Card  Press   with  Table  and 

Coupon  Attachment,  23. 
Newspaper  Addressing  Machine,  36. 

P. 

Positive  Vibrating  Apparatus  for  Distrib- 
uting Rollers,  9. 

Patent  Fly,  10. 

Paper  Wetting  Machine,  30. 

Proof  Press  (Newspaper),  38. 

Proof  Press  (Job),  39. 

Printers'  Knife,  60. 

Planers,  60. 

Proof  Brushes,  62. 

Perforating  Rule,  67. 

Planing  and  Sawing  Machine,  104. 

Press  for  Stereotype  Moulding  (Clay  Pro- 
cess), 113. 

Plate  Bevelling  Machine,  126. 

Paper  Cutters,  Power,  136. 

Paper  Cutter  Knives,  138. 

Paper  Cutters,  Hand,  141. 

Piercing  Machine,  154. 

Planished  Tin  Boards  for  Leather,  156. 

Pressing  Boards,  160. 

Pallet,  161. 

R. 

Roller  Moulds,  25,  57, 

Rubber  Blanketing,  57. 

Roller  Cloth,  57. 

Roller  Frames  and  Stocks,  57. 

Rule  and  Lead  Cutters  (Double  Lever),  59. 

Rule  and  Lead  Cutters,  59. 

Reglet,  67. 

Rules  (Newspaper),  68. 
Routing  Machines,  130. 
Rotary  Card  Cutters,  140. 

S. 

Suggestions  to  Pressmen,  2,  4,  8. 
Single  Small  Cylinder  Presses,  3. 


Stop-Cylinder  Presses,  7. 

Single  Large  Cylinder  Presses,  four-roller,  9. 

Single  Large  Cylinder  Presses,  two-roUer,  13. 

Stop-Cylinder  Presses,  two-roller,  17. 

Stansbury  Presses,  27. 

SeK  Inkers,  28. 

Suggestions  concerning  Choice  of  Presses,  11. 
Standing  Galleys,  Iron  Racks  and  Brass 
Tops,  51. 

Standing  Galleys,  Wood  Racks  and  Hard 

Wood  Tops,  52. 
Shooting  Sticks,  62. 
Sheep's-Foot  Hammers,  62. 
Suggestions  to  Printers,  68. 
Stereotype  Blocks,  69,  70,  71. 
Stereotype  Saw  Table,  102. 
Stereotype  Shaving  Machines,  105,  106. 
Stereotype  Furnace  (Plaster  Process),  112. 
Stereotype  Furnace  (Clay  Process),  114. 
Stereotype  Mould  Drying  Press,  121. 
Stereotype  Moulding  Press  (Clay  Process), 

113. 

Stereotype  Casting  Mould,  122. 
Stereotype  Furnace  (Paper  Process),  123. 
Stereotype  Shaving  Machine  (Power),  125. 
Stereotype  Shoot  Board  and  Planes,  128. 
Stereotype  Dressing  Tables,  129. 
Shears  and  Wooden  Table  for  Mill-Board, 
139. 

Shears  and  Iron  Table  for  Mill-Board,  140. 

Standing  Presses,  147,  148. 

Sheet  Pointing  Machine,  160. 

Steel  Polisher,  161. 

Squaring  Shears,  162. 

Sewing  Bench,  162. 


T. 

Two-Revolution  Press,  four-roUer,  5. 
Tape,  57. 

Toggle  Moulding  Press,  83,  84. 
Type,  76. 

W. 

Washington  Hand  Printing  Presses,  26. 
Wetting  Boards,  40. 


/ 


